Oe ee BIS OF S18 Se eh eg ee ew Bye Ny Oke as ee er oO i ad ae an ee We ee i ee ce Pe tae ke ae ge re ere a o* ee Vey CMI WY ih oF Ha ra, oe Pe ek ee tr ie ey raeat ‘ twine, PDL ah Ae A ee Ce ay Ce oo ey . recs ee i Cee eon ee | yeaa ® en, | PAT Rr ar ern Ma Ad pln ey dakee ’ epee ee | A bs . oy cared, Weer ry: , svete trie tim i ilmNcNT Mim Area ~ whee eyo fe 0 € £4 $8 we Ore . Ce Ce | . . y or ee | 1 ee OLN OO hee tig besa a nis CR OT Or WO ieee cee ee Ce Re ‘ CAR, ee eo ae A Pale ' Lk NiCr Arr ae ee ce hr we ee oe eee et eee, ore ME Ut LO aae "SP te WMA TEE WMULO GD Ne Lt eee ee A Re POC aor vetee Cee ae rine Ue ae eee tala, ee oe ee Se . ve @ana vue e ‘ ee ‘a se RAL SCE na see cy Tae ke Gee a hee Hea ee eM LVWL@ 6 O4pp bb RID y te ye tan atbee Seek e ' aie Re eae a eee "x Set eae nee see ’ Li ote 4 weer , Pas ’ + eae genial gral! ve raph) bile eke Lt tee nS fits tte + Mae Usa . ,otme WA fob DER CERO SOLOS RE Wate a becky oe ee Vee OR er gem Ow hte yy See rea ot ee ape ee ee ee ie OW GT deme wae bale 1a Ad tte oa gw tall 4 tm «ome oo 1M, We daty aig, sek hee rate 10 Op ek Fe Ae era re ey hae et gd, ay Ap td. fF we oe ’ maw Where 8 au @ tee he Li eee 8 Og 8 We Qe 5 apostate . ber Ad er Cart. teil way yp tye ypu) ae es eo er UN lieht Au Aaa Odd Nala: bb eat Lik adh Bilal 2248 8 8 Ow ee 6m ieee em ey .+ . ee te wee rte rh ee en Pi RSS aah ati s Ei te ee J yo act Vtets arate ee 1 WoO; eM tie Pe tetany vs re ee ee reuse eae, 4 ? Woe te tem by nt che ‘ Vewewe 1 a . sets ol CC De Se on eo Buti wee . re eer ype taste See hg ash ra ge las dea b's bs Wy: ey A eee ye Hee Tee ek ce ce a Sai he ere i es Pe ia ert Ce | “7 ua hoe Cr rd Lied » * See tei the eh a . oe “ae ee owe * eo str gee “ cS Se ee eee 2,4 04s me a a ee er ee re | SA etary ree yee ERMA Lem Raye Gen Vege ee ee . ea ee oe a) VAAHE TS hEe we ewe be A Hh) Hee OE Gp ae A ye W Ne yeh Hae hee Osteen vere & bee wuee 828 FS gO ERED RHE my ie a Oe ee ee ae LOT NTA ee ae aed be ee ee se eee 2 ey AAs ene ee Sere yee < ‘ 1 . ‘ ie i haa i + ‘ ‘ ‘ ia ' ‘ aes ed 6 idee O ‘ , ' t* to Yew ‘ ae t , ‘ 4 ‘ ta hye . . . . ‘ o* ‘ + ’ al ‘ ® ‘ . ee ft ‘ ” ' . ios ’ H : {* 2 ore eer ey are . 5 ‘ ‘ i 4 . our ; ‘ : . P . ‘ i wk 3 ‘ I * 6 +4 4-4 jadi bo eia ' . 8 : wet ’ ' ¥ . ‘ rae ar ' BS : d - ‘ ’ ‘ ta ‘ ‘ 53 i : : y , Diy ’ hte dh ‘ ‘ ’ ‘ ' . s+ Ded ce Pdr eam ra u a , fed od bed a des . ’ ' | 5 Firat eet dee eden bebe d | . ' ; i ‘ eer ceo. be Bhd ‘aise ' : ot » peace edie ld tied OL J ’ ja ty ob uke Ae Bh ated fede ' . . a} danad ’ wis © bein 4 ‘ ae y J : ‘ . x ‘ . deh @ hows = tdodeds ] ete J ’ 4 eae | ta vi ada o didgt b alee fede ude die i ‘ ‘ r ; : . | Poy ieee ae Were rent Sr oa) ed ee tad ow wees i . to <3 ra eet ob Cae ere Ie ee Perea oh mir eg dik Nha ‘ ‘ dowd qa Blea Bed da oP ehh APY te “ ; 7 +f aon ~4 io 4.4 UM caela fread ot 6 seb det ited bee oh Diy abe . : . rear x Fe eh paste Oa ba ate 0 be Syren wh sed dete 7 ‘ hy ‘ F : oy scala ‘ rar * ata rr | faci be eeree Pre Tee e ta 7 ae P q oe wm a dB ar A Ue or dade seme ok oe weed A ‘ ‘ or Fy .ay 4 ia M4 Pld ba twenes tte rd ee . ' ‘ " Sw 4 ee © ee eee a , i , t 1 ea, 4% ‘ ‘ Bie le ry 4 Lew ela we ‘ ‘ . Ha i« . Yalw | awe pa 1 ot bom Lb 7 “ ' eta. «4 aba ot Wey 8 fi 1 now bribe Piao f! Sethe Sra) oitag 238 4 a ‘ 4 ‘ iys ' Co er ee thw did Oe fee at & . 4 ’ ’ te od Ot winch dh hae bee tN oe Lab eided bleed & ow 2 oot ow sb ” ‘ 4 Piva of ce a eer ere iy Oe ee oe ' i 1) ae. ‘ rae re ’ oH het eek ee dee ba ee eet Piatt wis avons habeded Ada ‘ ‘ 4+ te ” re ere Pea, east rerren st ere Biter wore ey 9 a ae > eo4 bat ' ar iva #49 ” + dude BONS lO id Soo Bei aN te pete Cf Pog M fs oa ‘ . . 7 Sih rexas bys . ~ ede ede . . 25 ' oe se . oe 4 A. | .* aaewe me bie ots nee cani J + ‘ J ‘ see . 8 . © ted a. eee is err <0 ives hae ed : a aut : Pid tag by dsb 2e\b or ote bore . i os ora ‘ ‘ jo \ Pent Ct er ree eee PPh b ope eid bere hei dO Ad ed 4h KS Chee coded he BD . oaerhites dood V1 oa bis sav ha . rom ‘ * om een) Ck ee ee ce ee ere ee ee we eRe he pete Dh HR Nie tees dais s o4e ae ‘ os Pb ey Foods FR A het ntl Oth . Oe I ¢ ¥ tw 1 a de sf ’ 4 oud wwe ot #beeee P wet vy sO emt ee a ede Mand. d we Pete® of bo M4 . ' * . “a cre Te a | ae 1-04 Cente ae in “Ys hae 2 hee bol dee em OE ed ie ween # Sethe " i as * ‘ ie ey Uy ene se ‘ ot Ce ee ee a ee ee er ee ee . q ‘ ‘ Li ‘ 7 cay hevpaad df i seed kde ed dette cine al weeds pedi ay da ’ . ‘ i ded i4@ oa Hoan, yd a bea eh dw iead uy wey ‘ f ‘ ‘ ' A moe ew Oe Boe on ig ‘ ’ . . i he ‘ . ae ‘ or 4 . rn a ead hte eh aera A ‘ 4 , 1 . € cs ' ’ ¥ i ry fae ai ed dried co mw Oa 6 bed ver AU abs adgt ee we G 5 Leo ‘ . boos ‘ . Cer er oe ae) ra Paid align date mkt eed ie 4p? eovk cae 6 wad ‘ " aot re or oe ene cee or ees at] mi ak f : toa ' te 7 os ' +4 it trde 26 dau Sn ebb Wd diel 6 bhpind 6 lake 7) ‘ be fod » abirta, ve 34 A oo 6 ro, ee ee ere eC et or ‘ ‘ rary we ‘ \ ‘ oa we ‘ to. bow ft : BG 0 Spisbred bard ed bead ark pdt Wed ] ’ . ‘ t 4 rom! ‘ acme re ee ee oC a er! Se ee oe eee : J 7 . . : ' ' he Crt hay We 0D fa. Saw bh haw ad 2 & i ee " a Smo ‘ 3 ‘ . ’ ‘ . +2 . x» > Leeecc £4 Bie oka Se amt ae. ,- ae if tae Oe + 7 i a) ahry wi ay pis “iy thins ~! . ‘a f ~] I ing ri Ad Pes: wes at y | fe me AeA hi ' fae ; via fi i AS) a aA i 5 Nar Nea eta vig Lae a Be m4 ri ‘ fp? SOC 7S MINT) ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. Volume XI. 1895. Editor : GILBERT VAN INGEN. New Pork. PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY. Tue New Era Printinc Company, LANCASTER, PaA., PRINTERS. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, OFFICERS, 1898-9. President—HEnky F. Ossporn, American Museum of Natural History. Vice- Presidents—N. L. Britton, J. F. Kemp. Secretary—RICHARD E. Doncg, Teachers College, W. 120th St. Corresponding Secretary—\WM. STRATFORD, College of the City of New York. Treasurey—CHARLES F.. Cox, Grand Central Depot. Librarian—ARTHUR Hottick, Columbia University. L:ditor—GILBERT VAN INGEN, Columbia University. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS. Chairman—P. H. DupDLey, 80 Pine St. Secretary-—REGINALD GORDON, Columbia University. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. Chatyman—F rep. S. Lee, Columbia University. Secretary —Gary N. CALKINS, Columbia University. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. Chatrman—JamMEs F. Kemp, Columbia University. Secretary —GeEo. F. Kunz, 15 Union Square. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY, PHILOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. Chatyman—Lawrence A. McLoutu, New York University. Secretary for Philology—A. V.\W. JacKxson, Columbia University. Secretary for Anthropology and Psychology—Cuas. B. Buiss, New York University. SESSION, 1898-1899. The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8 o’clock, from October 3d to May 22d, in the rooms of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, at 12 West 31st Street. (iii ) TABLE OF CONTENTS OF VOL. XI. 1.—Wilson, EB. B. Considerations on Cell-Lineage and Ancestral Reminiscence, based on a Re-examina- tion of Some Points in the Early Development of Annelids and Polyclades, (Figs. 1-7), 2.—Trowbridge, ©. C. An ‘X-Ray Detector” for Re- search Purposes. (Figs. 8-11), 3.—Trowbridge, ©. ©. The Use of the Fluoroscopic Screen in Connection with Rontgen Rays. (Figs. 12-14), 4,—Lloyd, Francis E. On Hypertrophied Scale-Leaves in Pinus ponderosa. (Plate I), : 5.—Hollick, Arthur. Notes on Block Island. (Plates II-IX), boty aoe: ee 6. —Dudley, P.H. The Use of the Dudley ‘“Stremma- tograph”’ in Determining Stresses in Rails under Moving Trains. (Plates X—XIII), 7.—Weller, Stuart. Descriptions of Devonian Crinoids and Blastoids from Milwaukee, Wisconsin. (Plate IVS. 8.—Huntington, Geo. S. The Eparterial Bronchial Sys- tem of the Mammalia. (Plates XV—X XVIII), 9.—Stevenson, J. J. The Debt of the World to Pure Science. Annual Address of the Retiring President, 10.—Griffin, B. B. Description of Some Marine Nemer- teans of Puget Sound and Alaska. (Figs. 15—24), 11.—Crampton, H.E., Jr. An Important Instance of In- sect Coalescence, PAGE. 39 45 55 89 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS: OF VOL) XE- 12.—Rankin, W. M. The Northrop Collection of Crus- tacea from the Bahamas. (Plates XXIX, XXX), 13.—Calman, W. T. Ona Collection of Crustacea from Puget Sound. (Plates XX XI-XXXIV), 14.__Mathews, Albert. The Physiology of Secretion, 15.—Prince, J. Dyneley. Some Passamaquoddy Docu- ments, 16.—Calkins, Gary N. The Phylogenetic Significance of Certain Protozoan Nuclei. (Plate XXXV), 17.—Levison, W. “fuer A Simple and Convenient Phos- phoroscope, 18.—Levison, W. Goold. eee Ocular Microm- eters, 19.—Clark, Hubert reaps Notes on Bermuda Echino- derms, 20.—Hollick, Arthur. Additions to the Palzobotany of the Cretaceous Formation on Staten Island. No. II. (Plates XXXVI-XXXVIII), 21.—Sihler, E.G.. The Latter Part of Lucretius and Epi- curus 7é0l PeTEWOUY, 22.—Dodge, Richard E., Recording Secretary. Records of Meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences, January, 1898, to December, 18098, Index to Volume XI, APPENDIX, 39 PAO OS ae Me eS aera . 443 ecu Catalogue of the Fifth Annual Reception and Exhibit, April £3, 14, 1693. NoTE REGARDING PUBLICATIONS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. Publication of the Transactions of the Academy is discontinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898. The matter heretofore printed in the Transactions will be incorporated in the Annals. The Annals (8vo), beginning with Volume XVI, will appear with new forms of typography and arrangement of matter; many changes having been made in the endeavor to facilitate the use of the volume for reference purposes. A volume of the Annals will hereafter coincide with the calendar year and will be issued in three parts. The price per volume is three dollars. The Memoirs in quarto form will be published at irregular inter- vals. Part I of Volume I has been issued. ( vii ) sy £8 4 1 Oe Pay ot r \ “7 Ae ’ Ki at) ialyt [ANNALS N. Y. Acad. Sci., XI., No. 1, pp. 1-27, March 30, 1898. ] CONSIDERATIONS ON: CELL=LINEAGE AND ANCESTRAL REMINISCENCE, BASED ON A RE-EXAMINATION OF SOME POINTS IN THE EARLY DEVEL— OPMENT OF ANNELIDS AND POLYCLADES. EpMuND B. WILSON. (Read December 13, 1897.) FIvE years ago I observed in the embryos of two polyche- tous annelids, Avicia fwtida (Clap.) and Spio fulginosus (Clap.), that the two so-called “primary mesoblasts’”’ bud forth a pair of extremely minute superficial cells near the posterior lip of the blastopore before giving rise to the mesoblast-bands.' Scarcely larger than polar bodies, these cells lie at or near the surface at the posterior margin of the entoblast-plate, wedged in between the latter and the primary mesoblasts (Fig. 1, A, C, ¢; Fig. 2, A, ¢, ce); and in this position they are carried into the interior during the ensuing invagination. I could not determine their fate, and found no evidence that they underwent growth or di- vision, or that they took any part in the building of the embryo. In Nerets, however, I found that this pair of rudimentary cells was represented by a group of not less than six or eight some- what larger cells (Fig. 1, 8, D; Fig. 2, 4), formed in exactly the same way and in the same position,” and further that these 11892,-p. 458. 21892, p. 411. 2 WILSON. cells were functional in development, giving rise to a definite part of the body, though, as will appear beyond, I fell into error regarding their precise fate." These facts strongly sug- gested that the pair of rudimentary cells in Avzcra and Spio were to be regarded as vestiges of an ancestral type of devel- opment in which they were represented by a group of larger functional cells, such as are still found in the embryo of JVerezs. Such a conclusion, if it could be established, would possess an importance for the general problems of cell-lineage even greater than its interest for the more special problems of annelid em- bryology. For,if vestigial structures may appear in ontogeny in the form of single cells, the fact would not only afford a striking illustration of the inadequacy of all so-called ‘ mechan- ical’’ explanations of cleavage-forms, but would supply a very important datum for the estimation of the cell-theory as applied to development. The results of a re-examination of the history of these small cells in Verezs, taken in connection with other recent studies in cell-lineage, lend strong support to the conclusion indicated above, enabling us, as I believe, to give a definite interpretation to the vestigial cells of Avicia, Spro and other forms in which they have recently been observed ;* and they also raise some interesting further questions regarding ancestral reminiscence in cell-lineage. I am also able to contribute some new observa- tions on the cell-lineage of a polyclade (Leptoplana), which bear directly on these questions and considerably extend their range. 1 Von Wistinghausen (1891 ) had previously observed in Merets Dumeriliz, a group of small cells derived from the ‘‘ second somatoblast,’’ which probably correspond with those I have described in WV. bata and NV. megalops, though their exact origin was not followed. Wistinghausen believed that they gave rise to a part of the ectoblast—a result wholly different from both my earlier account and the present one. 2 Minute cells exactly corresponding in origin and number to those of Avicza have been found by Mead in Amphitrite (1894, p. 467 ; 1897, p. 247) and by Holmes in Planorbis (1897, p. 101). Lillie has found a pair of corresponding but slightly larger cells in Unio (1895, p. 27), while in Clymenedda they are as large as the pri- mary mesoblasts (Mead, 1897, p. 264). The corresponding cells in Umbrella (Heymons), Crepidula (Conklin), and Physa (Wierzejski) will be referred to be- yond (see pp. 6, 11-12). CELL-LINEAGE. 3 I. THE RELATIONS BETWEEN MESOBLAST AND ENTOBLAST IN | ANNELIDS AND MOLLUSKS. In .Verezs, as in the typical development of other annelids and of gasteropods and lamellibranchs, the mesoblast-bands are de- rived from the posterior cell of the fourth quartet of “ micro- meres.”* This cell, now generally known as the second somato- blast, divides into two symmetrical halves which have been usu- ally designated as the ‘‘ primary mesoblasts ;” and from them, by a series of slightly unequal successive divisions, arise the meso- blast-bands which extend forward in the cleavage-cavity at the sides of the embryo. Before giving rise to the mesoblast-bands, however, the ‘primary mesoblasts’’ bud forth the small cells already referred to, at or near the surface directly behind the two posterior macromeres “C” and “D.’ At least six, and probably not less than ten, of these cells are formed, the primary mesoblasts meanwhile sinking below the surface and becoming quite covered by ectoblast-cells which advance from the sides and from behind. The small cells first formed lie at the surface, wedged in between the “ primary mesoblasts’”’ and the macro- moe (his. 1, J), ¢; Fig. 2, B;). Those formed later lie below the surface, owing to a change in the plane of division (Fig. 3, 4). The small cells, which are very conspicuous in sections by reason of their intensely chromatic, closely reticu- lated nuclei, thus become arranged in a thin plate extending inwards from the surface between the primary mesoblasts and the two posterior macromeres (Fig. 3, £). After the formation of the small cells the divisions of the primary mesoblasts sud- denly change both in form and direction, the plane of division being now nearly or quite at right angles to the former (7. ¢., approximately parallel to the sagittal plane of the embryo) and the cells thus produced being nearly as large as the primary 1 Nereis is somewhat exceptional in the fact that the other three cells of the fourth quartet are suppressed. In Aricia, Polymnia, Spio, Pysgmobranchus, Hy- droides, Polygordius (all of which I have examined), and in some others, the fourth quartet, is complete, and in the first two forms named, a fifth quartet of (entoblastic ) micromeres is formed before the invagination (Cf. Fig. 2, 4). 4 WILSON. Fic. 1.1 Early embryos of Avicza (A, C) and Nere’s (B, D) in sagittal section (A, B, C, optical, D, actual). Showing the formation of small posterior entoblasts (¢) between 4/ and D. A, L, D, 64, cells of the entoblast-plate (cf. Fig. 2); JZ, the ‘‘ primary mesoblast ;’’ mt, mesoblast-band ; X, the first somatoblast or its derivatives, forming the soma- tic plate. mesoblasts. Thus are formed the mesoblast-bands which form together a V-shaped mass of cells lying between the macromeres and the overlying ectoblast. Near the middle line the two halves of the V are often slightly separated ; and into the space 1 All the figures are from camera drawings, made from preparations unless other- wise stated. Optical sections have been fully confirmed by actual. ee ey ee eee ee CELL-LINEAGE. 5 thus formed some of the small cells usually extend, appearing in sections in the sharpest contrast both to the large rounded mésoblast-cells and to those of the lateral ectoblast (Fig. 3, C). From this point the mesoblast-bands extend towards the sides and ultimately curve upwards (forwards with respect to the adult long axis) at the sides of the embryo.’ Fic. 2. Corresponding surface views, from the lower pole, of early embryos of Avicéa (A) and Nerezs (B) ; the limit of the ectoblast, z. e., the lip of the blastospore, is shown by the heavy line. A shows the single pair of vestigial entoblasts (e, e) of Avicia lying in front of the primary mesoblasts which are dividing to form the mesoblast-bands (cf. Fig. 1, C, which shows the same specimen in sagittal section). B shows two pairs of superficial entoblasts, lying behind the macro- mere J, and the spindles of a deeper budding of the ‘‘ primary mesoblasts’’ (cf. Fig. 3, A, for section of this stage). A, B, C, D, the four basal entoblasts or macromeres; a4—c!, the fourth quartet of ““micromeres ’’ (entomeres); a5-d°, the fifth quartet (entomeres) ; c-d, deriva- tives of the third quartet (ectomeres) ; J/, J/, the primary mesoblasts (shaded in B). Up to this point the account here given is substantially the same as that contained in my earlier paper on JVerezs. Regard- 1In Aricia the mesoblast-bands are formed much earlier, while the primary meso- blasts still lie at the surface (Fig. 1, C); and they lie at first side by side, nearly parallel to each other, extending upwards behind the entoblast-plate (Fig. 7). In both these respects Avicia is somewhat similar to Lawmébricus (Cf. Wilson, Embry- ology of the Earthworm, Fig. 30: Journ. Morph., 1889). 6 WILSON. ing the fate of the small cells, however, my first account was wide of the mark; for I believed that they migrated into the interior and spread out upon the walls of the archenteron to form a part of the splanchnic mesoblast.' I accordingly called the small cells ‘“‘secondary mesoblast’’ and applied the same term to the rudimentary cells of Avzczaand Spiro. Later studies by several observers seemed to confirm this conclusion. Lillie found in Umo a single pair of small superficial cells, budded forth from the “primary mesoblasts”’ exactly as in Avicia or Nereis, but relatively larger, which he likewise believed to wander into the cleavage-cavity to forma part of the mesoblast.? - Heymons found in Umbrella two pairs of corresponding but still larger cells, which he, too, apparently traced into the meso- blast.’ Mead found that a corresponding pair of minute cells, in Amphitrite are carried in at the tips of the mesoblast-bands ;* while Holmes still more recently states that in Vanorbis they enter the segmentation cavity.” Wierzejski’s recent observations on Physa,® though differing from the foregoing in some impor- tant details, agree in referring the small cells, of which several pairs are formed, to the mesoblast. With such an array of confirmatory evidence my original conclusion seemed to be strongly supported. Conklin, however, in his remarkable paper on Crepidula, reached a wholly different result, finding in that gasteropod that cells which probably correspond with the small cells of Nereis, give rise to the posterior part of the archenteron." In regard to Nereis, ] have long suspected that my original ' account of the fate of the small cells was erroneous. a } , ] , j 4 » a } CELL-LINEAGE. 11 Nereis. They must, therefore, be regarded as vestiges of func- tional entoblast-cells such as those of Nereis, and morphologically they represent the posterior part of the entoblast-plate' (Cf. Fig. 1, i> Pig. 2, A). The foregoing interpretation is entirely in harmony with Conklin’s important discoveries in the gasteropod Crepiduda. Conklin here definitely showed, for the first time in any animal,” that the so-called “ primary mesoblasts ’’ give rise to a group of entoblast-cells before dividing to form the mesoblast-bands. But more than this, Crefidu/a represents a step in the series which may be regarded as anterior to the condition found in Nereis ; for here each mesentoblast divides off two entoblast- cells, the bulk of which taken together is actually greater than that of the mesoblastic material remaining, “less than half the cell (4d) being destined to form mesoblast.’’* The three forms Crepidula, Nereis, Aricia, thus form a progressive series in which the entoblastic part of the mesentoblast cell is reduced from more than half the bulk of the cell to an insignificant vestige. It- is probable that two intermediate steps besides /Verezs have been observed by Lillie and Mead respectively. The two cells found by the first named observer, in Uno, are somewhat larger than those of Wereis;* while in Clymenella as described by Mead, they are equal in size to the mesoblastic moiety.’ 1Jt would be interesting to determine whether the vestigial cells of Avicza may not be taken into the archenteric wall and thus still retain their functional signifi- cance, I have not thus far been able to determine this point; but Mead’s obser- vations on Amphitrite seem to show that in this form such is not the case, for the vestigial cells are here formed so far from the surface that they pass into the cleavage- cavity and are carried forwards at the tips of the mesoblast-bands. Mead himself concludes that their position in Amphitrite is secondary, being a ‘“‘ reminiscence of a surface division which still persists in many forms’’ (1897, p. 295) I would sug- gest that their position in Amphitrite may be due to the early inwandering of the ‘¢ pri- mary mesoblasts.’’ It is not surprising that a vestigial cell of this kind should vary somewhat in position ; and it should be recalled that in .Vereds the later-formed cells lie at some distance below the surface. In Aricia, too, the vestigial cells do not always reach the surface. 2 Compare, however, the somewhat similar earlier accounts of Patten for Patel/a (1896) and Stauffacher for Cyc/as (1893). See Conklin, p. 71. 3 Crepidula, p. 69. : 4 Unio, Fig. 60. 51897, Fig. 88. 12 WILSON. Neither of these observers, it is true, suggests the interpretation given above, Lillie somewhat doubtfully assigning to the super- ficial cells the same fate as I originally did in JVerezs, while Mead leaves the matter undetermined. It seems probable, however, that we may look for the same fate for these cells as in Crepidula or Nereis,‘ indeed I venture to think that Lillie’s observations are themselves open to such an interpretation.’ These facts, I believe, support the view which has been held by many embryologists from the time of Kowalevsky onwards * that the primary mesoblasts, or mesoblastic pole-cells of an- nelids and mollusks must be regarded as derivatives of the archenteron. In both these groups the primary mesoblasts are derived from the posterior cell of the fourth quartet of ‘‘ micro- meres,’ the lateral and anterior cells of which are, so far as we know, strictly and always entoblastic. The facts indicate, fur- ther, that a progressive process of differentiation in cleavage has been going forward, through which the posterior cell of this quartet has become more and more strictly given over to the formation of mesoblast. The vestigial cells of Avicia, Spio, Amphitrite and Planorbis would seem to represent the last traces of such archenteric origin of the teloblasts ; and it is possible, indeed probable, that there are cases in which even these traces have disappeared, the posterior cell of the fourth quartet being strictly mesoblastic from the first.* 1Conklin has fully considered (Crepidula, p. 72) the apparently contradictory case of Umbrella, as described by Heymons (1893), where cells exactly corre- sponding to the ‘‘ posterior enteroblasts’’ of Cvepzdu/a are described as giving rise to mesoblast. Despite Heymon’s careful account, I venture to think that the case de- mands re-investigation in the light of Conklin’s work. Ina recent account of the mesoblast in Physa (1897), Wierzejski finds that small cells (‘‘ mesoderm-micro- meres’’ ) are budded forth not only from the ‘‘ primary mesoblasts’’ but also from the larger lateral cells derived from them. All these cells are assumed to be meso- blastic, though their fate was not followed out (1897, p. 391). 2 Unio, Fig. 67. 8 Cf. Kowalevsky, 1871, p. 30; O. and R. Hertwig, 1881, p. 47. Hatschek, 1888, p. 76; Rabl, 1889, p. 207, and earlier literature there cited: 4This point must remain doubtful until renewed investigation shall show whether ‘the superficial budding is ever entirely suppressed ; for we cannot safely infer its absence from existing accounts, and I am not convinced that my own state- ment of their apparent absence in Polymnia (WVereis, p. 458) may not have rested upon an oversight. CELL-LINEAGE. 13 The bearing of this conclusion on the possible relation be- tween the teloblastic and enteroccelic modes of mesoblast-for- mation is obvious. This question will, however, appear in a clearer light after a consideration of the polyclade cell-lineage in relation to the foregoing results. i. THE MICROMERE-QUARTETS IN ANNELIDS, MOLLUSKS AND POLYCLADES. The marvelously close resemblance in cell-lineage between the annelids, gasteropods and lamellibranchs which recent re- search, more especially within the last five years, has brought to light, leaves no doubt not only that the general forms of cleavage in these groups are reducible to a common type, but also that a considerable number of more or less definite cell- homologies can be established between them, even in the early cleavage-stages. The attempt to extend the comparison beyond the limits of these groups has, however, thus far encountered a very serious stumbling-block in the cell-lineage of the poly- clades. If we accept Lang’s view, which is supported by a large amount of evidence, that the platodes are not very far removed from the ancestral prototype of annelids and mollusks, we should expect to find in the polyclade a mode of cleavage to which that of the higher forms can in its main features be reduced. In point of fact, however, this seems to be the case only in the form of cleavage and not, so to speak, in its substance ; ‘for, although the general type of cleavage and the arrangement of the blastomeres in the polyclade shows an extraordinary re- semblance to that of the annelid or gasteropod, the cells seem not to have the same morphological value. I have elsewhere sufficiently indicated the nature of this difficulty,’ which has also been remarked by a number of other writers; but for the sake of clearness I will again direct attention to its leading. features. 1Nereis, p. 441; The Cell, pp. 314, 315. 14 WILSON. In the typical development! of all the forms in question— polyclades, annelids, gasteropods, lamellibranchs—the egg first divides into four quadrants. From these at least three, and sometimes four or five regular quartets of cells—usually smaller, and hence designated as ‘‘ micromeres ’’—are successively pro- duced by more or less unequal and oblique cleavages toward Fic. 5. Diagram showing the typical arrangement of the micromere-quartets in polyclades, annelids and mollusks (their secondary divisions being omitted). A, from the upper pole. JB, diagram of the typical history of the posterior quad- rant of an annelid or gasteropod embryo ; ectoblast is derived from the unshaded cells (1, 2, 3), the mesoblast-bands from the dotted cell (4), ectoblast from the lined cells (5, D). the upper pole (diagram, Fig. 5). These quartets are dis- placed according to a definite law, the first being rotated, as it were, towards the right (clockwise), the second towards the left (anti-clockwise), the third to the right, and so on in regular alternation.” The secondary divisions of these micromeres also 1 There are some well-determined exceptions to this mode of cleavage, and at least one of these—the case of Polychwrus, as described by Gardiner, 1895—is apparently irreducible to it. 2 The reversal of the direction of displacement in the sinistral gasteropods, dis- covered by Crampton, is an exception which emphasizes the rule. —_— Se. CELL-LINEAGE. bys show a remarkable similarity, in all the forms, up to a certain point. In morphological value, however, the micromere-quartets of the polyclade appear to differ radically from those of the annelid- mollusk type. Inthe former the first quartet is described as giving rise to the entire ectoblast, while the second and third quartets are mesoblastic.' In the latter, on the other hand, these same three quartets give rise to ectoblast, while, as stated above, the main mass of the mesoblast is derived from a single cell (the posterior) of a fourth quartet of which the other three cells form entoblast (Fig. 5, 4). Ifa fifth quartet is formed it is invariably entoblastic (Fig. 2, A). At the time attention was first called to these differences it seemed hopeless to reconcile them. Later researches showed, however, that the discrepancy was not so great as it seemed. -Lillie first discovered in 1895 that in the lamellibranch U7zz0 one cell (the left) of the second quartet give rise to mesoblastic ele- ments (the “larval mesenchyme’’)* and more recently Conklin has found a similar derivation of mesoblast-cells from three cells (right, left and anterior) of this quartet in the gasteropod Cre- pidula.’ It is clear that these interesting discoveries partially bridge the gap between the polyclade and the other forms; though how great it still remains may be judged from the fact that Conklin still regarded the differences as “very great, perhaps irreconcilable,” * while Mead, in a still more recent work on the cell-lineage of annelids, is forced into a position of skepticism regarding Lang’s whole account of the origin of mesoblast in the polyclade.’ For these and other reasons a re-examination of the early de- velopment of polyclades has become in the highest degree de- sirable. After a search extending through several years, I have at length succeeded in finding a form very favorable for this purpose—a species of Leptoplana® having eggs that are large 1Lang, 1884. 4 Crepidula, p. 196. 2 Unto, p. 24. 51897, p. 289. 8 Crepidula, p. 150. 6 An undetermined species found in great profusion at Port Townsend, Washing- ton, on Puget Sound. 16 WILSON. and transparent, are easily procurable in large numbers, and de- velop so slowly that the successive stages may be very accu- rately followed in life, while every point may be repeatedly verified in a large number of specimens. The results of a study of these eggs not only help still further to set aside the ap- parent contradiction between the polyclade and the annelid- mollusk type, but, when taken in connection with the foregoing observations on annelids and gasteropods, also raise some highly interesting questions regarding the relation of cell-lineage to an- cestral reminiscence. I shall not here describe the cleavage of Lepfoplana in detail, but will only indicate its leading features. Up to the thirty- two-cell stage, and for some distance beyond, the cleavage is a most beautiful example of the symmetrical spiral type, agree- ing very exactly with Descocelis as described by Lang, except- ing in the fact that in the four-cell stage the cross-furrow is. inconstant and often wanting. The first three quartets of mi- cromeres are formed exactly as in an annelid, and have the same position and relative size as in Discocelis (Fig. 5, A), while the four large cells remaining give rise to the archenteron. Regarding the morphological value of these three quartets, however, my results differ very considerably from Lang’s and are such as to bring the polyclade cell-lineage into direct rela- tion with that of the annelid, gasteropod and lamellibranch. As in these groups all three of the quartets give rise to ectoblast, the first and third apparently to ectoblast alone, though I am not certain that the third quartet may not give rise also to a small modicum of mesoblast-cells. The principal interest centers in the second quartet, from which, as Hallez, Gotte and Lang have shown, the principal mass of the mesoblast is formed. What these observers have failed to observe is the fact that each cell of this quartet gives rise to several ectoblast-cells—at least three, and probably four—before sinking into the interior to form mesoblast. These divisions are of constant form, as fol- lows: During the fifth cleavage each cell divides unequally towards the left as viewed from the side (z. ¢., clockwise, as seen from above) to form an ectoblast-cell (‘ 2'’’) that abuts against a Fic. 6, LEPTOPLANA. (Camera drawings from the transparent living embryos. ) A, 32-cell stage, from the upper pole; B, 36-cell stage, from the side, showing second division of 2;. C, side view, approximately 60 cells, showing the third ectoblast cell (2%) derived from 2, the fourth quartet (4) and the basal entoblasts (D, C). D, delamination of mesoblast in the fourth division of 2 (shaded), from the lower pole, showing the basal quartet of entomeres (4-—D, and the two somewhat unequal cells (4d@1, 4d?) formed by the vertical division of the poster- ior cell “of the fourth quartet. FE, posterior view of ensuing stage, showing the two posterior mesoblast cells (shaded) lying in the interior, and a marked in- equality between (4d! and 4d@?). FF, later stage; multiplication of the meso- blast-cells (shaded) equality of 471 and 4@2, as in Descocelis. 2 18 WILSON. cell of the third quartet formed about the same time (Fig. 6, A)." The second division is nearly or quite horizontal, separat- ing a second ectoblast-cell (“« 2?”’) directly above the original or stem-cell (Fig. 6, B). The third ectoblast cell (‘‘ 2*’’), which is very small, is budded forth at the lower tip in the angle be- tween the macromeres (Fig. 6, C, DY). The three cells thus formed (2', 2°, 2°, Fig. 6) enter, as I believe, into the general ectoblast. At the fourth division the stem-cell divides unequally in a direction parallel to the surface, a large inner cell being de- laminated off from a smaller superficial cell (2*, Fig. 6, D). The inner cell is forced into the angle between the two adjoining “ macromeres,’ and forms one guadrant of the mesoblast; the outer cell flattens out at the surface and ts, [ beheve, an ectoblast- cell, though Iam not entirely sure that it may not ultimately migrate into the interior to form mesoblast. The four primary mesoblast-cells thus formed rapidly multiply to form four groups of rounded granular cells (Fig. 6, /) which may easily be seen for a long time through the transparent ectoblast and from which the greater part, if not all, of the adult mesoblast is derived. It is clear from these facts that the cells of the second quartet in the polyclade (7. ¢., in Leptoplana) are not purely mesoblastic, but are sesectoblasts. It seems equally clear that the formation of ‘larval mesenchyme’”’ from certain cells of the second quartet in Unio and Crepfidula must be regarded as an ancestral remi- niscence or survival of the process that occurs in all four of the cells in the polyclade, and it is an interesting question whether such a survival may not also occur in the embryos of annelids. A careful re-examination of /Verezs with respect to this point has thus far yielded a negative result. In Avicza, on the other hand, it is probable that two mesoblast-cells arise from either the second or third quartet, though the material at my command has not enabled me to reach a decisive result. Atthe stage shown in Figs. 1, C, and 2, A, two large and very conspicuous rounded cells are found lying, one on either side, in the cleavage-cavity between the lateral ectoblast and the mesoblast-band (y, 7, Fig. 1 Lang figures this division—PI. 35, Fig. 5. CELL-LINEAGE. in 7) and slightly anterior to the latter. Sections show that these cells are budding forth smaller cells into the cleavage-cavity. I am nearly certain that these cells are not derived from the ento- blast ; and their position is such that an origin from the primary mesoblasts is improbable. They are often closely wedged in between the overlying ectoblast-cells, and all the appearances indicate that they have been derived from the latter. From their position I believe it probable that these cells have been de- rived from the two lateral cells of either the third or the second Fic. 7, ARICcIA. Frontal optical section! of early embryo of Aricza, showing the parallel mesoblast-bands (7, mz) extending upwards from the primary mesoblasts, MM, M, behind the entoblast-plate (cf. Figs. 1, € and 2, A, which show the same individual in different positions). At the sides of, and slightly anterior to, the mesoblast-bands are the two mesoblast-cells (1, y) of probable ectoblastic origin. quartet—~. ¢., from derivation of c* and @’, or of c* and a? (¢¢- Fig. 2, d)—and that they accordingly are comparable to the “larval mesenchyme’”’ or “‘ secondary mesoblast”’ (z. ¢., the ecto- mesoblast) of Unzo and Crepidula. Future investigation must ’ determine whether this surmise be correct, and what is the ulti- mate fate of these cells, but the facts give, I think, good reason 1 Confirmed by actual sections. 20 WILSON. to expect that the annelids will ultimately be shown to agree with the mollusks in showing reminiscences of the ancestral mode of development in the double origin of the mesoblast. Returning now to the mollusks, Wierzejski, in a recent pre- liminary paper (1897) states very explicitly that in Physa a part of the mesoblast is derived from two cells of the third quartet." This result, if well founded, gives good reason to suspect that the third quartet may give rise to mesoblast in some of the polyclades, as Lang has maintained for Drscocalis. In Leptoplana I have sought carefully for evidence of such a process, but thus far without success. This negative result is, however, inconclusive owing to the difficulty of tracing the later history of the individual cells. The first division of the third quartet is vertical to the surface (Fig. 6, C) and in later stages I have thus far found no evidence that a delamination of meso- blast occurs. Soon after the delamination of mesoblast in the second quartet, all of the ectoblast-cells forming the lips of the blastopore become much flattened (Fig. 6, /), while the ecto- blast-cap rapidly extends downward, the blastopore finally clos- ing at or near the lower pole. In these stages the outlines of the thin ecoblast-cells are very difficult to see, either in life or in preparations, owing to the confusion produced by the underlying deutoplasm-spheres, now much increased in size, on which they are moulded. The mesoblast now forms four groups of rounded granular cells conspicuously seen through the trans- parent outer cells. A study of the successive stages proves that the greater number of these are derivatives of the second quartet ; but the possibility remains that some additions may have been made from the third quartet. From the foregoing account it appears that the ‘‘ mesoblast ”’ of the polyclade is derived from the ectoblast; and it may, I think, be taken as a fair working hypothesis that this ‘‘ meso- blast’? is represented in the mollusks, and probably also in some annelids by cells (‘‘ larval mesenchyme,” etc.) derived from the second quartet (U0, Crepidula, Aricia(?)) or perhaps in 1Confirmed by Holmes in the case of PVanordis since the above was written. See Science, VI, No. 154. CELL-LINEAGE. 21 some cases from the third quartet (Physa, Aricia (?) ).' Assum- ing this to be the case, what shall we say of the mesoblast- bands, which are in annelids and mollusks derived from the fourth quartet and which, as we have seen reason to conclude (p. 12), are probably to be regarded as derivatives of the primi- tive archenteron? The development of the polyclade suggests an answer to this question which is in harmony with the facts discussed in the first part of this paper. As earlier observers have shown, the fourth division of the ‘‘macromeres’’ in the polyclade is unequal, giving rise to four smaller cells at the lower pole of the embryo (4—J, Fig. 6, C—Z), and to four much larger cells lying above them. From these eight cells, which are heavily laden with deutoplasm and differ entirely in appear- ance from the ectomeres and mesomeres, the archenteron is formed. With this Leptop/ana exactly agrees, and I can find no evidence that mesoblast-cells are formed from any of these eight cells. If now we judge solely by relative position without respect to size, the four larger cells or ‘‘macromeres’’ (4—4) correspond exactly with the fourth quartet of annelids and mol- lusks—in fact, they are relatively not very much larger than in some of the mollusks (e¢. g., Flanorbis, t. Rabl, 1880). Lang discovered the remarkable fact that in Descocewlis, as in so many of the latter animals, the posterior cell of these four di- vides long before the others; and further, that this division is equal, giving rise to two symmetrically placed cells at the pos- terior end of the embryo, while the ensuing divisions of the other three cells of the quartet are unequal and irregular.’ - Mead? has pointed out the very remarkable resemblance of these two cells in Descocwhs to the “primary mesoblasts’”’ of annelids and gasteropods and even goes so far as to suggest that they may give rise to mesoblast-bands in the polyclade. My observations on Leptoplana lend no support to this sugges- tion, agreeing nearly with those of Lang on Dscocwls save in 1Edouard Meyer (1890, p. 299) has definitely compared the ‘‘ parenchyma’’ (mesoblast) of the Turbellaria with the ‘‘larval mesenchyme’’ of the annelids, which he believes to have a different origin from the mesoblast-bands. 2Cf. Lang, 1884, Figs. 17-20. 31897, p. 289. 22 WILSON. one noteworthy respect, namely, that the division of the pos- terior ‘‘macromere”’ is variable, only rarely dividing equally (Fig. 6, #) and as a rule dividing unequally, giving rise to a smaller cell (4d’, Fig. 6, £) that is typically formed obliquely towards the right as seen from the side (z. ¢., in a leiotropic or anti-clockwise spiral.' From this it appears that the form of cleavage in the fourth quartet of Dezscocawlis, which agrees so exactly with that of the annelids and mollusks, appears as only an occasional variation in Leptoplana, though even here the posterior ‘“‘macromere”’ is always the first to divide. As regards the fate of these cells, the inequality of 4d and 4a” (often very marked) is itself indirect evidence that they do not give rise to symmetrical mesoblast-bands as in the higher types and I find no evidence that either of them gives rise to mesoblast-cells. Both seem to have the same fate as the other entoblast-cells, with which they exactly agree in deutoplasmic structure, and enter into the formation of the archenteron as Lang has shown in the case of Discocwlis. Can we neverthe- less regard them as homologous to, or rather as the prototypes of, the primary mesentoblasts of the annelids and mollusks ? When we reflect on the facts, reviewed in the first part of this paper, we may hesitate to answer this question in the negative. For we have seen reason for the conclusion that the primary mesoblasts of annelids and gasteropods have arisen historically, as they arise ontogenetically, from the posterior part of the arch- enteron ; and we have traced the entoblastic elements of the posterior cell of the fourth quartet from a minute and apparently functionless vestige (Avicia) back to a group of large and im- portant cells (C7vepidula). 1 think we should consider the pos- sibility, if only as a working hypothesis, that in ancestral types the entoblastic elements of the posterior cell of the fourth quartet 1 Typically—z. e., in probably ninety per cent. of the cases observed, the division is markedly unequal—often much more so than in Fig. 5, &. In a few cases the direction of division is reversed, the smaller cell, 4@2 being found towards the left (dexiotropic spiral). Sometimes the division is equal and vertical as in Descocedles ; more rarely it is horizontal and either equal or unequal. I believe all these varia- tions occur in normal embryos. A considerable time after the formation of 4@? the other macromeres begin to divide unequally and irregularly, and all the macromeres ultimately break up into smaller rounded cells, heavily laden with deutoplasm. a CELL-LINEAGE. 23 may have preponderated as greatly over the mesoblastic as the latter now preponderates over the entoblastic in Avicza ; and that the beginning of the series may have been such a mode of develop- ment as still occurs in the polyclade where the entire quartet is entoblastic. Thus we are brought anew to the view which has been advocated by a number of morphologists, prominent among them Edouard Meyer,’ that the mesoblast-bands (ento- mesoblast) of the higher forms may have been of different origin phylogenetically from the ‘larval mesenchyme’”” More specifically I would suggest that in the ancestral type the fourth quartet was strictly entoblastic ; that at a later period in the phylogeny the trunk-mesoblast (mesoblast-bands of higher types) took its origin from the posterior part of the archenteron, perhaps in connection with the development of a new body-region from the posterior part of the ancestral body ; and that as the cleavage became progressively specialized (7. ¢., assumed more of what Conklin has termed a “ determinate type’’) the seat of this mesoblast-formation became more and more definitely localized in the posterior member of the fourth quartet. The symmet- rical division of this cell in the polyclade might accordingly be regarded as the prototype of that which occurs in the annelid or mollusk, though the resulting cells have in the latter forms acquired a different morphological significance. In other words the old building-pattern, still persisting more or less definitely in the polyclade, has been adapted to a new use” precisely as in the evolution of adult structures. I would distinctly repeat that these suggestions are offered only as a speculative working hypothesis ; yet, despite their hypothe- tical character, it seems to me that they may give a new point of attack upon some of the puzzling phylogenetic problems with which the study of cell-lineage has to grapple. 11890, p. 299. 2+ Cf. Conklin, p. 151. 3<«Tmagine that in any species a new organ is added, or rather, that a diffuse series of structures gains great importance and compactness in the course of evolu- tion. Then this new structure may de represented in ontogeny by acell. But the form of cleavage is already defined. * * * The manufacture of a new cell be- ing an impossibility, an old cell must be modified to represent the new organ.’’ (Lillie, 1895, p. 37.) 24 WILSON. ike On CELL—LINEAGE AND ANCESTRAL REMINISCENCE.! The phenomena shown in the history of the micromere-quar- tets in platodes, annelids and mollusks are, I think, of general in- terest in two directions. In the first place they render it highly probable, if they do not actually demonstrate, that development may exhibit ancestral reminiscence as clearly in the cleavage of the ovum as in the later formation of tissues and organs. That the rudimentary entoblasts of Avicia, Spio, or Amphitrite are such ancestral rem- iniscences seems almost as clear as that the yolk-sac of the mammalian embryo or the primitive streak of a bird-embryo are such; and the same may be said of the formation of mesen- chyme-cells from the second quartet in Uno or Crepidula These facts, among many others, may well give us hope that, when the comparative study of cell-lineage has been carried further, the study of the cleavage-stages may prove as valuable a means for the investigation of homologies and of animal rela- tionships as that of the embryonic and larval stages. The re- sults of experimental embryology have no doubt seemed ad- verse to such a conclusion, by showing how easily the cleav- age-stages may be altered by changes in the conditions of development. But I cannot see that the embryonic and larval stages are 1n much better case. Certainly the modification of cleavage-forms which Driesch has effected in the echinoderm egg by pressure, temperature and the like, are hardly greater than those which Herbst has brought to pass in the gas- trular and larval stages of the same eggs through modification of the chemical environment. It is true that nearly related forms—for example the gasteropods and the cephalopods—may differ very widely in the form of cleavage; but so they may in the embryonic and larval stages, and it may fairly be questioned whether “secondary modification”’ or ‘‘ caenogenetic change ’”’ has gone further in one case than in the other. 1The term ‘‘ ancestral reminiscence’’ is here used to denote any feature of de- velopment, the meaning of which is only apparent in the light of earlier historical conditions, whether of the adult or of the embryo. CELL-LINEAGE. PAS Recent advances in the study of cell-lineage have, it is true, raised some new apparent difficulties in the attempt to establish ‘precise cell-homologies, even between nearly related forms' though I suspect that some of these will be found less serious than they now appear. Against these difficulties, however, may fairly be placed an increasing body of affirmative evi- ° dence,” and on this side may be ranged the observations re- corded in the present paper. We should, moreover, remember that just as the homologies of adult parts may be complete or incomplete in various degrees (as Gegenbaur long since urged), so cell-homologies may be more or less definite. Furthermore, just as we cannot always find exact equivalents, in related forms, of the several sub-divisions of homologous nerves or blood- vessels or sense-organs, so we need not expect to find exact homologues for all the individual cells throughout ontogeny, The wonder is, indeed, that so many definite cell-homologies have been established. I believe the facts now known demon- strate the inadequacy of Hertwig’s too simple conclusion that the definite values of the blastomeres, and hence of the cell-homol- ogies based upon them, are merely an incidental result of the continuity of development,’ and that they do not leave without support the plea made five years ago in my paper on JVerevs, for the study of cell-lineage as a guide to relationship.* In the second place, these facts seem on the whole to em- phasize the importance of cell-formation in development. The inadequacy of the cell-theory as applied to development has been very ably urged, especially by Whitman and by Adam Sedgwick ; and their conclusions, fortified by the epoch-making discoveries of Roux, Driesch and others on the development of isolated blastomeres, are of an importance that we are only be- ginning fully to realize. But the time has not yet come fora just estimate of the cell-theory in this aspect ; and it may well be questioned whether in the reaction against the cell-mosaic theory, as originated by Schwann, and developed with so much 1Cf. Mead, 1897, and Child, 1897. 2Cf. Conklin, 1897. 3Cf. the very effective criticism of Conklin, 1897, p. I9I. £13892, pp. 367, 455- 26 WILSON. ingenuity by Roux and Weismann, the pendulum of opinion may not have swung too far towards the opposite extreme. The persistence in cleavage of vestigial cells (such as the rudi- mentary enteroblasts of Avicza), or of vestigial processes in the formation of the germ-layers (as in the origin of the ‘‘mesen- chyme”’ in Uo or Crepidula) adds to the evidence that the number and character of the cell-divisions stand in some direct and important relation to the differentiation-process ; and it would be difficult to explain such ancestral reminiscence in cell- lineage under any view which does not recognize in cell-out- lines the definite boundaries of differentiation-areas in the de- veloping embryo.' The history of the posterior cell of the fourth quartet in annelids and gasteropods gives a clue to the process through which teloblasts and other determinate proto- blasts have arisen by progressive specialization ; and I think it lends support to the distinction drawn by Conklin’ between ‘determinate ’’ and “indeterminate ’”’ types of cleavage by show- ing some of the steps by which the former may have been acquired, _From a physiological standpoint the persistence of rudimen- tary cells in cleavage is a problem of high interest which merges into the larger problem of ancestral reminiscence in general. When one considers the analogous case of the polar bodies, one is almost tempted to suspect that the formation of the rudimentary enteroblasts may be in some way connected with a definite transformation of the nuclear substance. It is, however, equally possible that the removal of the cytoplastmic substance of these cells may be a necessary condition of the differentiation of the mesoblastic material. ZOOLOGICAL LABORATORY OF COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY, December 4, 1897. Cf. Wilson, £893, :p. ¥4. “E607, p- EGO: CELL-LINEAGE. 27 LITERATURE. Child, C. M., 1897. ) [AnnaLts N. Y. A. S., XI., No. 2, pp. 29 to 38, March 30, 1898. ] “X-RAY DETECTOR,” FOR RESEARCH PURPOSES. C. C. TROWBRIDGE. (Read November 2, 1896.) ) THE “ X-ray Detector”’ is an instrument which has been de- signed and constructed for the study of fluorescence caused by Rontgen rays. It is a new form of the “ fluoroscope,’’ that ap- paratus which has been so generally used for the observation of the shadow images cast by these rays. In its construction several devices were used to make it par- ticularly suitable for research purposes, and a name has been given it, in order that it might not be confused with the types of the instrument previously constructed. A description of the ‘‘ X-ray Detector”’ will be more clearly understood, if a brief reference is first made to the original forms of the “ fluoroscope.”’ Shortly after the discovery of the X-rays, several investiga- tors independently perfected the method of using the fluores- cent screen, employed by Professor Rontgen in his first experi- ments with these rays, and devised an instrument for the study of the shadow pictures of this recently discovered form of en- ergy. Professor E. Salvioni, of Perugia University, Italy, and Pro- fessor William F. Magie, of Princeton College, in this country, appear to have been the first to construct and use such appara- tus. Both were apparently working on similar lines of research and developed the same idea independently of each other. In apaper read before the Perugia Medico-Chirurgical Society on February 5, 1896, Professor Salvioni gave an account of an instrument, devised by himself, for the observation of X-ray shadow effects, in which he made use of the fluorescent screen. (29 ) ) 30 TROWBRIDGE. A short article by Professor Magie, describing a similar con- trivance, appeared in 7he Medical News, of February 15th. It ran thus: ‘A sheet of black paper coated with platinum-bari- cyanide, is placed with the coated side inward across the end of a tube or box, into which the observer looks, and which is so fitted to the face or shielded by cloths that the phosphorescent substance and the eyes are protected from all extraneous light.” “Tf the tube be then directed towards the Rontgen rays, the phosphorescent paper in the tube glows and the shadows of objects interposed between it and the Crookes tube appear upon it.”’ Professor Magie subsequently suggested that the name of ‘‘skiascope’’ (an instrument to show shadows) be given to the apparatus. : About March 2oth, or a little over a month after the publica- tion of Professor Magie’s article in Zhe Medical News, the Edi- son fluoroscope appeared. It was essentially the same instru- ment as that described in Zhe Medical News, except, that the fluorescent substance, used by Mr. Edison to coat the screen, was tungstate of calcium, which had been adopted because it was believed by him to have greater fluorescent properties than the barium platino-cyanide, and that it was provided with a bi- nocular eye-protector, made to fit close to the face and shut out all light from entering the apparatus at that end; thus allow- ing both eyes to be used to observe the screen. The instrument was furthermore made in a convenient form, and one which was considered desirable for commercial uses. The ‘fluoroscope’’ or ‘‘skiascope’’ 1s very valuable for the observation of Rontgen ray shadows, and has already been of considerable assistance in a number of surgical operations, but it can only be used for ap- proximate tests in scientific research, and is entirely unfitted for certain investigations, for reasons which will be demonstrated below. Although in the greater number of investigations with Ront- gen rays the photographic negative should be used in order to obtain the most satisfactory results, there are a number of important experiments relating to the various phenomena of Crookes tubes which must be conducted by other methods. Ana DETECTOR. 31 From these facts was evident the need of a scientific instru- ment ‘suitable for studying the phenomena of Rontgen rays, and one that could be perfectly relied upon. An apparatus de- signed for such purposes was constructed by the writer in May, 1896, under the supervision of Professor Rood, of Columbia University, who suggested some of its important devices. Sev- eral forms of the instrument were exhibited'before the New York Academy of Sciences at the meeting of November 2, 1896. The “‘ X-ray Detector”’ is shown in outline in figures 8 and g. In these cuts the main casing of the instrument is repre- Fic. 8. Side view of the ‘‘ X-Ray Detector.’’ sented by A. It is made of thin wood, that is perfectly im- pervious to ordinary light, and is 30 centimeters in length. The ends of the casing, A, are rectangular, but differ somewhat in dimensions ; at the extreme end, next to 4, the outside mieas- a2, TROWBRIDGE. urements are II centimeters in width by 7.5 centimeters in depth, while at the opposite end, at C, the casing is square, being 7.5 x 7-5: centimeters: Just back of the end C, the lower portion of the casing is en- larged by a half-cylinder or half-drum extension of 6 cms. radius, which was added so as to conform the shape of the casing to certain devices which comprise a part of the interior con- struction of the apparatus. ‘The entire inside of the instrument, including all the brass parts, is painted a dead black. B, in figs. 8 and 9, is a binocular eye-protector of patent leather, which is shaped to fit above the eyes, and has a black velvet cushion on the edge, marked 4’. This cushion is added so as to prevent, as far as possible, all light from entering the instrument from around the edge of the eye-protector. It is made soft and elastic, in order that it may readily be made to follow the contour and set close to the face of the person using the instrument. At the opposite end from #4 is a brass screen holder, C, which measures 7.5 X 7.5 centimeters, and is constructed to fit exactly into the end of the casing A. In this screen holder there is a circular aperture 5.5 cms. in diameter, which is encircled by a thin ring of brass that extends .5 cms. outward from the main portion of the screen holder. A screen of black paper is placed over this opening, having on its inner side crystals of barium-plat- ino-cyanide (BaPtCy, + 4Aq), tungate of calcium (CaWO,), or ) Fic. 9. Top View of the ‘*X-Ray Detector.’: A-RAY DETECTOR. 33 some other strongly fluorescent substance. These crystals are uniformly distributed over the area of a circle 5.5 centimeters in _ diameter. The black paper screen is held securely in place by a cap, D, which is circular in form, and which fastens over the ring on the screen holder, C, in such a manner that it is impossible for light to enter the instrument from that portion. The construction of these parts is such, however, that the cap, D, can be very easily removed and the screen taken out and another substituted in its place. A device which is used by the X-ray Detector for purposes which will be presently explained is shown in fig. 10. Its position in the apparatus can be seen in figs. 8 and g. ‘In these figures fis a disk of brass 7.5 cms. in diameter and .15 cms. in thick- ness, fitted on a small shaft .5 cms. in diameter, that. passes through the casing of the instrument from one side to the other, 6 centimeters back of the screen holder C, but below a line join- ing the aperture in C and the eye-protector 4 (Fig. 8); so that a view of the screen from the eye end is not crossed by the shaft. On this shaft, but inside the instrument, is fastened a metal shield, as shown by JZ, in fig. 10, which measures approximately 6.0 x 6.0 centimeters, and extends radially outward from the shaft. Diametrically opposite to the shield Z, two metal posts sup- port a cross-bar /, fig. 10, 6.0 cms. long, and 1.6 cms. in thick- ness, parallel to the shaft, and such a distance from it that when the shaft is turned to one position, this bar will cross the center of the field of the fluorescent screen. The entire device can be made to revolve by turning a milled- head £’, fig. 10, attached to the brass disk 4, and is so con- structed, that if the shaft be turned to certain positions by means of this milled-head, the view of the screen, as seen from the eye-protector, may be partly or entirely shut off by the metal shield Z, fig. 10, or it may be bisected by the cross-bar J, fig. 10. Thus the view of the fluorescent screen may be changed, in the different positions of the shaft, from a full toa half-moon effect, to perfect occultation, and to the field of a cir- cular screen crossed by a bar. 8 34 TROWBRIDGE. The exact setting of the shield and cross-bar can be deter- mined in the following manner: Outside of the box on the brass disk /, and near its edge several short rods, 6 cms. long, , are placed. These are pointed at the ends and project outward from the face of the disk. They are indicated by /, figs. 8 and 10. One rod indicates the position of the cross-bar inside, a PSS ~ Fic. 10. Revolving device used in the ‘‘ X-Ray Detector.’’ and two rods the position of brass shield. Just beyond the edge of the disk Z, figs. 8 and 9, and projecting from the cas- ing of the instrument is a rod similar to those on the disk. The pointed rods on the disk £ are so arranged, that if one of them coincides with the stationary rod on the casing of the apparatus, it shows that the cross-bar inside is bisecting the X-RAY DETECTOR. 36 field of the fluorescent screen. If the two on the disk are in coincidence with the stationary rod, it indicates that the view of the screen inside has been completely shut off. There is alsoa rod one centimeter long on the disk in that position which cor- responds to the half-moon effect referred to in the last para- graph. The device for changing the view of the screen of the instru- ment is for the purpose of giving the experimenter a means of determining whether the screen, which is supposed to be under the influence of X-rays, is really fluorescing or not. For, although the screen may appear to be luminous, the effect of vision may be only an optical delusion. The contrivance shown in fig. 10 is used to test observations as follows: If there seems to be a fluorescence of the screen, the experimenter can attempt to set the cross-bar, J, fig. Io, over the center of the luminous field. Then, afterwards, the real position of the bar can be deter- mined with absolute certainty by means of the indicating disk on the outside of the instrument. If the luminous effect was caused by light coming from the screen, and the setting of the cross-bar made correctly, a coincidence must be found between a certain one of the rods on the disk and the stationary rod on the casing of the instrument, as previously explained. The relative position of these rods is determined by the sense of touch with the forefinger of: the right hand. When the right coincidence is found to exist, the conclusion must be that the screen is fluorescing. Thus we have a checking device on the observations of the fluorescence, which is perfectly free from any personal equation. As it is often desirable to work with Rontgen rays completely in the dark, Professor Rood suggested the use of the small pointed rods on the brass indicating disk instead of marks, in order that the investigator might remain in darkness during experiments and determine the position of the revolving check- ing device (shown in figure 10) by the sense of touch. The means of eliminating the personal equations just de- scribed, is important, because a conscientious observer may be 36 TROWBRIDGE. led by the imagination to believe that a fluoroscopic screen is fluorescing when it is really not. There are certain phenomena pertaining to human sight and recognized in physiological optics, giving the effect of a vision of dim grayish light, which occur when the eyes are closed or in the dark. Such effects, together with after-images, might often be a cause of deception when an instrument is used which is unprovided with a means for verifying observations of faint luminosity. These phenomena are sometimes so vivid that they may readily cause a person to believe that a pale light is coming to the eyes from without, when the effect is really subjective and in the eyes of the individual who is experimenting. The name ‘‘ X-ray Detector ’’ was considered suitable for the instrument and was adopted, because the apparatus was designed particularly for the study of the fluorescence which is caused by Rontgen rays, and for the reason that it is possible to de- termine with it whether a screen of fluorescent material, which is supposed to be under the influence of the X-rays, is actually giving forth a perceptible amount of light, or whether the effect which is apparently observed is due only to an optical delusion. For most experiments of a scientific nature, a decided con- trast between a luminous screen and the dark boundary sur- rounding it is always desirable. A good contrast is obtained by _ the employment of a comparatively small screen, such as-is used in ‘‘ X-ray Detector.’’ This is the case fortwo reasons : In the first place, that portion of a Crookes tube which is the main source of Rontgen rays is generally quite small, seldom being of greater extent than a few square centimeters. If, therefore, a large screen is placed close to the source or these rays, it will exhibit uneven fluorescence, one part showing intense luminosity while the other portions appear faded out. Such an effect tends to give little contrast between the fluoresc- ing screen and the dark border surrounding it. On the other hand, a small screen is fairly evenly fluoresced, its entire border has equal definition, and all the contrast which is possible is obtained. Secondly : When a flat surface is observed at a short distance di) MERA ODETECTOR. we from the eyes (20-30 centimeters), only a small portion of it is distinctly seen at one time. Thus it follows, that a small screen will be more clear than one that is large, because it lies more nearly within the area of distinct vision, and its border has better definition than that of the large screen. ‘a seen tila = 7 WE = TPN ITT IIIT TIiliiTItitil iii CAP OFF CAP ON Fic. 11. Device for holding fluorescent screen in place, showing the cap off and the cap on. C—Screen holder. H—Black paper screen. O—Fluorescent crystals. D—Cap. P—Screws for securely fastening the cap. By the construction of the screen holder of the ‘‘ X-ray De- tector,’ C, fig. 8, so that screens can be easily changed, a means is obtained by which comparative tests and examinations of dif- ferent fluorescent substances can be made. One method is as follows: If it is desired that two fluorescent materials be com- pared ; screens of these substances are prepared, and then the farthest distance from an active Crookes tube at which each screen 38 X-RAVODETECTOR: appears to be luminous is measured. The ratio of the squares of the two distances will show the relative fluorescent values of the substances, at least from an optical standpoint. In this test, the checking device which is shown in fig. 10 is used to deter- mine the correct distances. The screen holder, screen and screen cover are drawn in detail in fig. 11. The ‘‘ X-ray Detector” is provided with a base, A, fig. 8, which is an advantage, because it is desirable that experiments should be conducted under steady conditions. This stand has been made very firm, and has a device by which motion in three planes is possible, when observations are required with the ‘‘ X- ray Detector’ in different positions with respect to the source of the Rontgen rays. The instrument is also so constructed that it can be easily freed from the base and held by a handle (GC, fig. 8) in the hand of the experimenter. The particular apparatus, described and shown in the accom- panying illustrations, was made by J. Grunow, instrument maker, New York, N. Y., from a model constructed by the writer. ee 6 : ; ANNALS N. Y. A. S., XI., No. 3, pp 39. to 43, March 30, 1898. Sr PP 3 3 3 9 afk USE OF THE FLUOROSCOPIC SCREEN IN CONNECTION WITH RONTGEN RAYS. €. C.. TROWBRIDGE: (Read November 2, 1896.) IN a previous paper by the writer entitled “An ‘ X-ray De- tector’ for Research Purposes,” containing a description of an instrument designed and constructed for use in the study of Rontgen rays, a reference was made to those investigators who had improved the methods of using the fluorescent screen in connection with the Rontgen rays. Mention was made of Pro- fessor E. Salvioni, of Perugia University, Italy, and Professor William F. Magie, of Princeton College, as being two investi- gators who, working independently, were the first to construct and describe an instrument which greatly simplified the manner of using the fluorescent screen in experiments with these rays. Professor Salvioni gave an account of his apparatus in a paper which he read before a meeting of the Perugia Medico-Chirug- ical Society on February 5, 1896. A translation of the same appeared in ature, March 5, 1896, page 425 (No. 1375, Vol. 53). The original manuscript having been published in the Proceedings of the Academia Medico-chirugica di Perugia ot February 6, 1896, Vol. VIII, No. 1-2. The instrument was called a “‘ cryptoscope,”’ and was described in the article as a cardboard tube 8 centimeters high, having at one end a screen of black paper, on which had been spread a layer of calcium sulphide, a substance that is fluorescent under the influence of X-rays. At the other end, where the eye was placed, a lens was fixed, which gave an image of the screen. The priority of publication in this country of a description of a piece of apparatus similar to that described above, belongs to Professor Magie, who wrote a letter concerning it to Zhe MZed- (39 ) 40 TROWBRIDGE. wcal News under the date of February 5, 1896, which appeared in the issue of February 15th of that weekly (Vol. LX XIII, No. 7, page 192). The paper was entitled ‘‘ A Convenient In- strument for Visual Use in Diagnosis with the Rontgen Rays.”’ Another article, “ Application of Rontgen Rays, the Appara- tus and its Use,” by the same writer, was published in the American Journal of the Medical Sciences for March, 1896, Vol. CXI, page 251. In the second paper Professor Magie referred to the instrument which he had devised, and called it the ‘““skiascope,”’ as being a name appropriate to its uses. Fic. 12. Cryptoscope devised by Professor Salvioni. The first two illustrations which accompany this article are in- tended to show the instruments which have just been described. In fig. 12, the “cryptoscope,”’ which was devised by Professor Salvioni, is shown. The letters which represent the parts in the cut are as follows: A, a tube 8 centimeters long, 4, a lens used to obtain an image of the screen, and C, a screen of fluorescent material. Fig. 13, shows the ‘‘skiascope’”’ as first devised by Professor Magie. In the figure, A represents a tube about four centi- meters ‘in diameter: and "C,the fuorescent sciecma 21h ene tube was pressed tight against the face about the eye. JT is meant to indicate a Crookes tube. The third cut, fig. 14, which shows the Edison fluoroscope, has been drawn for the purpose of comparison. Although this apparatus is quite familiar to’ many, it is described, and its uses are outlined, because it is the form of “ fluoroscope’”’ which has been most generally used since the discovery of Rontgen rays. FLUOROSCOPIC SCREENS. 41 The Edison fluoroscope has been used mainly to obtain an actual vision of the silhouette shadows cast by objects which the Rontgen rays do not readily penetrate, such as the bones of the human skeleton and metallic objects. In Figure 14, A rep- resents a wooden box about 28 centimeters long, shaped as in Fic. 13. Skiascope devised by Professor W. F. Magie. the cut, and open at the small end at B, where there is a binoc- ular eye-protector of patent leather, which is made to fit closely about the eyes, so as to exclude all light from the sides, but al- lowing the observer to look into the box. At C, in the large end of the box 4, is a screen of cardboard coated on the in- side with a fluorescent substance. The screens were at first made of tungstate of calcium, but now barium platino-cyanide is the material generally used. The apparatus is also provided with a handle. If it is desired that the shadow of the bones of the human hand shall be seen, the instrument is used as fol- lows: The fluoroscope is held to the eyes with the screen end placed before a Crookes tube emitting strong Rontgen rays. The screen immediately becomes luminous, because the fluor- escent substance thereon converts the energy falling on it in the form of X-rays, into the rays of ordinary light. The hand is then interposed between the fluoroscope and the 42 TROWBRIDGE. source of Rontgen rays, and its shadow appears on the screen, but as the bones absorb the rays to a much greater extent than the flesh, they are projected as dark shadows, while the shadow of the flesh is so faint that it can hardly be seen. Thus, the bones of the hand appear distinctly in outline ; the effect being’ somewhat similar to the silhouettes of ordinary light. Fic. 14. Edison Fluoroscope. Most of the appliances for obtaining visual effect of Rontgen rays by the use of the fluorescent screen are based on the dis- coveries of Professor Rontgen, for it was he who first discovered that fluorescent substances became luminous under the effects of the X-rays. He studied both this phenomenon and the effect of the rays upon the photographic negative in his famous research, and obtained shadows of the bones of the hand by the use of the fluorescent screen, as well as the more perma- nent shadow-pictures by the photographic process. The fluorescent effect of certain materials when subjected to the influence of Rontgen rays was, however, partly anticipated by certain observations of Dr. Lenard, of Bonn. This investi- ts! FPECORCSL OFFIC SCREENS. 43 gator found that, if a small aluminum window was fitted into the end of a Crookes tube opposite to.the kathode, and if the tube was excited in the usual manner by means of an induction coil, certain materials would show fluorescence when they were placed within a distance of six centimeters from the aluminum window. Although this effect may not have been due to Rontgen rays—which had not then been discovered—yet the experiment showed that certain phenomena relating to. Crookes tubes could be advantageously studied by the use of screens of fluorescent material. The ‘‘ X-rays”? which were discovered by Professor Rontgen, . and which were emitted from an ordinary Crookes tube, were observed to effect fluorescent substances as far distant as two meters. The room in which Professor Rontgen conducted the experiments was darkened, and the Crookes tube which was used was covered with black paper. Then, when the fluores- cent substances were brought near to the tube and in the path of the X-rays, the fluorescence mentioned above was observed. It will be seen, therefore, that the appliances which are used now to observe X-ray shadowgraphs and fluorescence are simply improvements of the methods used by Professor Rontgen. DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS, COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY. [Annars N.Y. A. S., XI., No. 4, pp. 45 to 54, March 30, 1898.] mae HYPERTROPHIED SCALE-LEAVES IN PINUS PONDEROSA. Francis E. Lioyp. (Read January 10, 1898.) [ PLATE I.] EarLy in 1896 the writer was engaged in the study of pollen development and, in order to supply himself with materials, broke off a number of young staminate shoots from a specimen of Pinus ponderosa, the Bull Pine or Yellow Pine of the West. An examination of the same tree in the autumn discovered that the pruning of these large, rapidly growing shoots had resulted in the growth of one to three lateral shoots, a little distance be- low the break. These lateral shoots which were developed from the axils of scales on the upper portion of the shoot of the pre- vious year were sterile, but differed in a remarkable degree from the normal foliage shoots. In the latter the leaves are borne in groups of threes (fascicles) upon very short branches which spring from the axils of small triangular scales which are to be regarded as reduced leaves. Inthe shoots induced by pruning, however, these scales have been greatly developed, so much so, indeed, as to have become leaves, both in structure and function, while the fascicles, so called, were in most cases not developed at all. When they were developed, however, there was pro- duced the phenomenon of a twig with foliage leaves of two dis- tinct kinds. The same operation was carried on in the spring of the following year (1897) which resulted similarly. In one case, however, a staminate shoot was produced. It has been commonly observed, and was pointed out by Masters‘ in 1880, that upon the Juniper, especially upon young 1 Nature, XXIII: 267. 1880. (45 ) 46 LLOYD: specimens, there are found two kinds of leaves. Masters called these two kinds the juvenile and adult forms, anc suggested that the former, which are much the longer and sharply pointed, represent an ancestral condition. In this way, also, he com- pared Retinospora to an immature stage of 7wya inasmuch as plants of the former genus suddenly assume the foliage charac- teristics of the latter. It will be seen, however, that these two cases, /inus and Juniperus are not quite parallel, for the ordi- nary foliage or secondary leaves of the former are produced upon the reduced twigs in groups or fascicles, in which the number of leaves is practically constant for a particular species, while this arrangement is not found in the junipers. The struc- tures in /¢xus which should be compared directly with the leaves of Juniperus are the primary leaves, and later the scales which subtend the fascicles. Dimorphism in the leaves of the seedlings of Finus is a constant feature. The cotyledons are followed immediately by the primary leaves, so called by Engelmann, ' and it is only later that the fascicles are produced. The same writer also drew attention to the fact that these primary leaves, or similar ones, are also found upon sprouts of certain species (P. mops, rigida, Canariensis, etc.), and are frequently upon young shoots of Lavix. The structure of the cotyledons, pri- mary and secondary leaves were studied comparatively by Da- guillon* in 1890. He included in his studies five genera, Adzes, Ficea, Pinus, Larix, and Cedrus, and showed that the ontoge- netic series of leaves from the cotyledons to the adult, present a series of gradations, gradual in Ades, but more pronounced in /inus. Of the species of Pimus, Daguillon studied four (P. strobus, pinea, maritima and sylvestris). The primordial leaves which are produced in the seedling on the stem above the cotyledons are in all cases elliptic in trans- verse section, and have two resin ducts in contact with, or very near the lower epidermis. In P. maritima, they are very near the lateral angles. The supporting tissues are less strongly de- veloped and the vascular bundle is single. In one species only 1 Engelmann, ‘‘ Revision of the genus Pizus,’’ Trans. St. L. Acad. IV, 1880. 2« Recherches sur les fuilles des Coniferes.’’ Rev. Gen. d. Bot. IL: 154. 1890. — HVPERTROPIED LEAVES. AT of those studied is the vascular bundle single in the adult leaf, P. strobus, while in the others, the bundles, which are two, are widely separated. It appears that the structures of the primary leaves produced upon shoots, already mentioned, has not been studied, but it has been assumed to be the same as that of the true primary (primordial of Daguillon) leaves of the seedling. There can be no doubt that the bud scales, and the scales which subtend the fascicles of Pimus are reduced leaves. In view of this fact it is of peculiar interest that we are able to cause their return to the foliage condition, in that we have clearly a case of atavism. Furthermore, the structure of an hypertrophied scale-leaf, if we are right in regarding this as a case of atavism, ought to furnish some clue as to the phylo- geny of the genus. It is assumed in such an argument that leaf characters are to be depended upon as a guide, and of this, I believe, there can be little doubt, for it has been abundantly shown that these characters are quite constant. This is espe- cially true, I believe, as regards the position of the resin ducts concerning which Engelmann wrote that it is ‘‘so constant and seems to be so intimately connected with the essential character of the plant, that I venture to adopt it as one of the principal characters for the subdivision of the genus.’ Let us turn to the consideration of the facts and see whether we may gather any conclusions from them. The staminate shoots have normally small, scarious scales, in the axils of which in the upper part of the shoot, are pro- duced the staminate cones. If these shoots are cut off, one, two or perhaps three axillary buds on the upper end of last year’s shoot will develop. So far I have been able to get no more than three buds to develop. These buds, when developed into shoots, have leaves which are narrowly triangular in outline, broader at the base, and tapering gradually from the base to the apex, and are of various lengths. The longest leaf observed measures 6 cm. From the axils of some of these leaves were developed normal fascicles. The transverse section shows them to be flattened above and ridged along the middle line below. 48 LLOYD: The margins are finely serrate, as is also a low ridge which runs along the middle line on the upper surface. The surface is markedly glaucous, and stomata are found on the upper surface arranged in ten longitudinal rows and on the lower surface in four rows, one row on each side of the two resin ducts. A transverse section shows that the epidermal layer, one cell in thickness, is underlaid by a layer of hypoderm, consisting of strengthening cells, which, as a rule, does not exceed one cell in thickness except at the angle of the lower side where an in- complete second layer is found. The resin ducts are two and are in contact with the lower epidermis. The parenchyma is of cells of the infolded kind which is characteristic of the group. A fibro-vasal sheath is rather weakly developed enclosing two bundles, which are slightly separated, consist of the usual ele- ments and are surrounded by pitted vessels. The vascular bundles are weaker than in the normal leaves, and are closer together. The stomata are in nine to twelve rows on the upper, and in four rows on the lower surface, and the latter are so dis- posed as to be one on either side of the two resin ducts. The normal leaves are about 20 cm. long, and, springing as they do in threes from the fascicles, are in transverse section the shape of a sector:of 120°:> Such Jone, slender “needles? sce- quire and possess much stiffening tissue which occurs as hypo- derm of several cells in thickness. The resin ducts, two in number, are here found deep in the parenchyma, opposite the lateral angles. The endodermic sheath is relatively larger and contains two strongly developed vascular bundles which are more widely separated than in the hypertrophied scales. Without and surrounding the bundles is a mass of tissues com- posed of pitted vessels. The stomata occur in twelve rows on the upper and in thirteen to fifteen rows on the lower surface. It will be seen then that the abnormal leaves in question differ in the arrangement of tissues quite markedly from the normal. They approach, in fact, very closely to the early or primordial leaves in the species of Pzzus described by Daguillon. These latter, however, are in their plan of structure very simi- AVPERTROPEGIED LEAVES, 49 lar to the type of leaf seen in Pseudotsuga, and in many species of Adies, and to this extent we would seem to be warranted in saying that the Pines have been derived from a generalized form having a leaf and other characters midway between the firs and spruces. The nearest living representative of such a form is Pseudotsuga. As regards the strobile, while pendant and spruce-like in certain characters, especially when young, in its large scales it is fir-like. As regards the leaves, it is decidedly fir-like. As to general habit, it is spruce-like. There is another value to be attached to this comparison be- tween abnormal leaf and true primary leaf. Their close corre- spondence in structure supports Celakovsky’s view that abnor- malities in the Conifers are of very great value as a basis for morphological study. It has been said earlier in this paper that we have in these abnormal leaves a retrogression to ancestral types. If this be so we should look for a condition in the more immediate an- cestral forms of the pines in which the primary leaves are nor- mal, and later, intermediate forms should show a gradual sub- stitution of fasciculated leaves for scattered ones. Now there have been found in the Jura of eastern Siberia certain forms which were described by Heer’ under the generic name of Lefptostrobus. The description was originally based upon the cones only. Further material was afterwards obtained which showed the leaves to be pine-like and apparently fascicu- lated at the ends of the short twigs. The material was, how- ever, meagre, and nothing further was made out in regard to the arrangement of the leaves. Later Fontaine found in the Potomac of the Eastern United States forms evidently closely allied to Heer’s Leftostrobus. These he described? under Leftostrobus, taking the precaution, however, of extending the original description by the addition of the following remark bearing on the position of leaves “leaves . . . scattered on the larger or principal stems and grouped in bundles on the ends of short twigs.” This was a ! Flor. Foss. Arctica, VI : 23. 2U. S. Geol. Survey, Monograf XV. ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, April 20, 1898—4. 50 TAS OVD. very wise procedure, inasmuch as Heer’s material, judging from his plates, does not offer any evidence in regard to the body of the twigs, but only as regards the ends, and even as to this the material is meagre. In all probability more extended search would discover that Heer’s Leptostrobus possessed the two arrangements of leaves, scattered and fasciculated, since this is true of Fontaine’s forms described under this genus. It may be further remarked that with Lepfostrobus Fontaine found other fossils which referred to a new genus, Laricopsis. These in general are larch-like, but like Leftostrobus, possess two kinds of leaves—fasciculate and scattered. Fontaine draws attention to the fact that the young shoots of Larzr occasionally produce the scattered or primarily leaves and compares them to the permanent scattered leaves in Laricopsis, the probable an- cestral form from which the Larch has been derived. ~ It is reasonably certain, therefore, that in Leftostrobus and Laricopsis we have closely allied forms which lived together and were the forerunners of the Pines on the one hand and the Larches on the other: As to the causes which bring about the hypertrophy of the scale-leaves in Pinus ponderosa it may be said that the increase in nutrition plays no small part in the matter. Fujii’ ascribes certain changes produced in the cones of a Japanese /yxus after pollarding to over nutrition. Those species of /zxus, already noted, which produce sprouts, do so from the stump after the tree has been cut down, and these sprouts have dimorphic leaves. The same result can be produced in Pinus ponderosa by cutting off the staminate shoots to which, normally, a large amount of food would pass. This food is diverted by pruning. It is, however, not enough to say this, for there must be some other factors at work. What they are we are not in a position now to Say. SUMMARY. Abnormal leaves are produced upon shoots induced by prun- ing the staminate shoots of /2zus ponderosa by the hyper- 1Fujii, K. Bot. Mag., Tokyo, IX, 275-271. 1895. ee AIVPERTROPHIED LEAVES. 51 trophy of the scales. The latter are thus shown to be reduced leaves. They are to be compared to similar structures found on shoots of certain other species of which Pinus rigida is an ex- ample. These species are those which readily produce sprouts from the stump. They may further be compared to the scat- tered leaves occurring occasionally upon Larix. The structure of these abnormal leaves is not identical with — that of the true primary leaves—those produced on the seed- ling on the stem immediately above the cotyledons. While not SO primitive as these primary leaves they may be compared more properly to the Pseudotsuga type. . -The abnormal leaves described are atavistic, and the twigs bearing them may be compared to a permanent condition such ‘as obtained in the Lefpéostrobi of the Potomac, a condition which probably obtained also in those forms from the Jura of eastern Siberia described by Heer. Lepéostrobus may safely be regarded as in the ancestral line of the Pines. Laricopsis probably stands in the same relation to Larix. Little can be said in regard to the causes beyond that over nutrition plays no small part in the change. This suggests, at least, that reduced nutrition may have been one of the more important causes resulting in the evolution of the fasciculated condition in Pixus and Larix. I wish here to acknowledge the kindness of Dr. Arthur Hollick in indicating to me literature bearing on the fossil conifers. BEA esd, PLATES: EXPLANATION OF LETTERS USED. e—Epidermis. h—Hypoderm. r—Resin duct. tr—Tracheary tissue. 1—Hypertrophied scales. 2—Secondary leaves. Fig. 1. Transverse section of normal or secondary leaf. (Sche- matized ). Fig. 2. Transverse section of hypertrophied scale. (Schematized). Fig. 3. A shoot bearing both abnormal and normal leaves. Figs. 1 and 2 are from camera lucida drawings. (54 ) ET PLAT \ CY La, Ss, ex s <7 OTE TLE ele oe SSS XI. BNNALS N.Y. ACAD. SCT, [ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI. No. 5, pp. 55 to 88, April 20, 1808. ] NOdiee,ON BEOCK ISLAND. (Investigation prosecuted with the aid ofa grant from tle John Strong Newberry Fund of the Council of the Scientif.c Alliance of New York.) ARTHUR HOLLICK. (Read January 17, 1898.) Plates Iie ise PP GEOLOGY : PAG”. Mt PLEGELOI 9.5) ois Pals Suleehad wea eds a Spies eee eMA haat 5. Se EMS C2 oio555.5 Lava vg Ste aa Uw one bee nate ete ere 50 tem VAD |: 22500) 6 anna ¥tagepaven's RENAL olga ane a Arr eae 6: II. Borany: RememMRTMMICIE Vor DCTINUE G3 2 Soe vw 3, igo) see ure Oh acd wsdl yo Ae De 6° Pre ANS TO TNS ALOE... 0.5 cea cles vos doe acee tulaw's sacua vee teawe ee 6.1 OS CIC-SEv 6 TSO O08 OI all FG a Ia gs i ae 66 Causes which have determined and modified the Flora....... 6 Il]. MisceLLAngeous NOoTEs: SRNR ORNS aha eet delet Ue oo gb iGov sens va Satenoevbere eee 70 MNO RC Se ch Meta egrets 2 da ea va vuivisisl ald bv lg aatiwroat te walle obs 71 L GEOLOGY. INTRODUCTION. At the meeting of the Academy on October 19, 1896, I gave an account of the geology of Block Island, prepared from in- vestigations personally made during the summer of that year, together with all references to the subject on the part of others which I had been able to gather.’ To this account I would respectfully refer, in order to avoid reiteration, for information regarding the general geologic conditions which prevail and the opinions which have been expressed in relation to them. — Last summer I again visited the island, for the special purpose c. 1Geological Notes. Long Island and Block Island. Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci., XVI (Dec. 15, 1896), 9-18. 56 HOLLIGCK. collecting, if possible, further material representing the Creta- ceous (Amboy clay) formation, of which I had obtained indica- tions at the time of my previous visit. Three weeks were spent there, during which period the en- tire coast line and most of the interior was subjected to critical examination, with the result that several facts not before recorded were noted, and a considerable amount of interesting material was collected. During part of the time I was accompanied by Dr. Lester F. Ward, of the United States Geological Survey. In order that the general configuration of the island and the several localities mentioned may be understood, I have included a map of the island, prepared from that issued by the United States Geological Survey’ (see plate II). PALAZOBOTANY. One of the most important problems which it was necessary to solve was whether the Amboy Clay Series was represented on the island. Theoretically these clays, which had been pre- viously traced from New Jersey, through Staten Island and Long Island, to Martha’s Vineyard, ought ‘to occur also on Block Island and previous observations strongly indicated that such was the fact. Definite evidence, however, was lacking and it was recognized that if a few well-defined and typical species of fossil leaves could be found the question would be settled. Careful and systematic search was therefore made for such evi- dence, and the result was entirely satisfactory. The material collected was identical in its character and occurrence with that from the other islands mentioned, consisting of ferruginous clay nodules or fragments, containing organic remains, scattered through the Drift, mostly in close proximity to two of the clay- exposures, at Clay Head and Black Rock Point. About twenty-five specimens of fossil leaves and fruit capable of identification were found, representing fifteen species, all of them Cretaceous in age, and at least nine of them typical of the Amboy clay flora. Following is the list : 1 Rhode Island, Block Island Sheet, 1889. BLOCK ISLAND. On —~| I. GLEICHENIA GRACILIS Heer (?). PPLE er rig..g. ) Gleichenia gracilis Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. iti (Kreidefl.), eso pl. x hos IIs pros, pk xxvi.-figs.,13. b;.c, d. Our specimen is almost certainly a Glezchenza, but the pinnules are more acute and runcinate than in Heer’s figures of G. gra- cits. I prefer, however, to refer it provisionally to this species rather than to found a new one upon such a small fragment. Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island. 2. DAMMARA MICROLEPIS Heer (?). (PL TE, Figseorge.b;,) Dammara muicrolepis Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. vi, Abth. II, fess, pl. xi, fig. 5. The specimens figured on our plate are undoubtedly referable to the organisms which have been called Dammara and Euca- lyptus, from the Cretaceous of America and the Old World. The ones under consideration are, however, smaller than any which have been previously figured and might perhaps be re- ferred to a new species, but, in view of the limited amount of material and its fragmentary condition, I have thought it best to refer the specimens provisionally to Heer’s species. Locality : Ball’s Point, Clay Head, Block Island. 3. MorIconia CYCLOTOXON Deb. and Ett. Crleiiesiita.. 100) Moriconia cyclotoxon Deb. and Ett., Urwelt. Acrob. Kreidegeb. Aachen und Maestricht, p. 59 [239], pl. vii, figs. 23-27. In regard to this specimen there can be no doubt. It is one of the most abundant species found in the Amboy clays, at South Amboy, N. J., and is also known from Staten Island and the Arctic regions. Specimens figured by Herr (Fl. Foss. Arct. Vol. vi, Abth II, pl. xxxiii, figs. 1-9) and by Newberry (Fl. Amboy Clays Monog. U. S. Geol. Surv., xxvi, pl. x, figs. 11-21) are far bet- ter for comparison than are the original figures of Debey and Ettinghausen. Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island. 58 FOLEIEGK. 4. WIDDRINGTONITES REIcuHu (Ett.) Heer (?). (Pl = Pigs 3o) Widdringtonites Reichu (Ett.) Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. vi, Abth, 1f) p. sa¢%pl xxvii, fre. 5 5. Vol vi pers) pl mes: 4, 5. Frenelites Reichii Ett. Kreidefl. Niederschoena, p. 246, pl. i, figs. 10 a-IO €. This little fragment of a conifer is referred provisionally to the above species, partly on account of its close similarity and partly because the species associated with it seem to warrant such reference. It is one of the commonest species in the Am- boy clays of New Jersey at several localities, and has also been found on Staten Island and Martha’s Vineyard. Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island. 5. THINNFELDIA LESQUEREUXIANA Heer. (PLU, aie sa ae) Thinnfeldia Lesquereuxiana Heer, Fl. Foss, Arct., Vol. vi, Abth: I) px 37; pl: -xliv) fies. 9, ec ela daa eer tion, [2ea 2: This is another well defined and typical Amboy clay species of wide geographical distribution, which, when found with Moriconia would, without any further evidence, be sufficient to determine the horizon in which is occurs. Found also on Staten Island and Martha’s Vineyard. Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island. 6. JuGLANS arctica Heer (?). (Pi eBih cy etter 7a) Juglans arctica Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. vi, Abth. II, p. 71, pl: xlit, figs= 1b, 2): The fragment figured is apparently the upper part of an ament similar, if not identical, with those described by Heer un- der the above name. Inasmuch, however, as he also describes and figures aments which can hardly be distinguished from these, under the name of Myrica longa (Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. vi, BLOCK ISLAND. 59 Abth. II, p. 65, pl. xli, fig. 4b) I have been in doubt under which species to place our specimen. Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island, 7. SALIX PROTEEFOLIA LANCEOLATA Lesq. (Pre PVE Fie.) Salix proteefolia var. lanceolata Lesq. Fl. Dakota Group, p. 50, pl. Ixiv, figs. 6-8. A large number of varieties and forms have been classed under this species. Our specimen is almost identical with Lesquereux’ fig. 8, above quoted. Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island. 8. SALIX PROTEEFOLIA FLEXUOSA Lesq. SEE TNs Big. Ga.) Salix protecfolia var. flexuosa Lesq. F1. Dakota Group, p. 50, piuxiv, figs. 4, 5. Recognized also from Long Island and Martha’s Vineyard. Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island. g. Ficus Krausiana Heer. (Ein Fie.’ T.) Ficus Krausiana Heer, Fl. Moletein, p. 15, pl. v, figs. 3-6. In naming our specimen I have been somewhat influenced by the fact that this species is recognized by Lesquereux in the Dakota group of the West (Fl. Dakota Group, p. 81, pl. L., fig. 5), although it might equally well be compared with Vele- novsky’s Ficus suspecta (Fl. Boehm, Kreidef, part iv, p. 10 [71], pl..v [xxviii], figs. 6, 9). The two species, indeed, I am inclined to consider as identical and the comparison of the two is made especially significant when Velenovsky’s figure 9 is examined. It has also been recognized in the Martha’s Vineyard Cretaceous flora. Locality: Near South East Point, Block Island. 60 TIO TAACK. 10. MAGNOLIA WooDBRIDGENSIS Hollick. (CED an ie isae2: Magnoha Woodbridgensis Hollick, in Newb. Fl. Amboy Clays, Dp. 374; pl xxxvihe wit pl: lvity tips 57. There can be little doubt of the identity of our specimen with the above species, especially when compared with figure 7, above quoted. Locality : Ball’s Point, Clay Head, Block Island. II. LAuRUS PLUTONIA Heer. (PL IV. Figs; 7.) Laurus plutonta Fleer, Fl. Foss. Arcts, Voli vi, bth: i, p75, pl. xix; figs. 1d) 2—4 ; plixx, figs? 34,°.4=0" ploxxiv ie. Ope pl exvin, fes?to, 04 pl sd, sneelo: Under this specific name different authorities have placed a large number of forms from America and the Old World, and several which have received different specific names might equally well be included under it. It is abundantly represented in New Jersey, and has been found on Staten Island, Long Is- land and Martha’s Vineyard. Locality: Near Black. Rock Point, Block island: 12. CELASTRUS ARCTICN [cer CPN. Bier aoe) Calastyus arctita Heer, Fl, Foss: Arct., Vol, viii p. 4o;plaisd, fiSS. Gd Fe: For purposes of comparison the figures by Heer, above quoted, are not as satisfactory as those by Newberry. (FI. Amboy Clays, pl. xiii, figs. 8-18). It is a common species in the clays of South Amboy, N. J. Locality : Near Black Rock Point, Block Island. 13. MyrropHy_ium (Eucatyprus ?) Geinitzi Heer (?) (PLA: “Figs 133°) Myrtophyllum (Eucalyptus ?) Geinitst Heer, Fl. Moletein, p. 22 plist, hosts a BLOCK. ISLAND. 61 In referring our specimens to this protean and widely distributed species I have done so provisionally, as the nervation is sparse or wanting in those which exhibit the best outline, while the one in which the characteristic nervation is shown is merely a frag- ment. Specimens which are entirely satisfactory have, however, been found in New Jersey and on Staten Island, Long Island and Martha’s Vineyard. Mocality: Fig. 1, near South East Point; figs. 2, 3, near Black Rock Point, Block Island. 14. EUCALYPTUS ? NERVOSA Newb. CEs ieee a) Fucalypius? nervosa Newb. Fl. Amboy Clays, p. 112, pl. Xxxil, figs. 3-5, 8. In the Flora of the Amboy Clays, onthe plate above quoted, Dr. Newberry figures two allied species—the one to which I have referred our specimen and another which he calls Auca- lyptus ? angustifolia, Our specimen lacks the tip by which it could be definitely identified, but I have little hesitation in re- ferring it to £. wervosa. The same species has also been identified from Long Island. Locality : near Black Rock Point, Block Island. 15. TRICALYCITES PAPYRACEUS Newb. Geigy: igs’ 6.) Trnicalycites papyraceus Newb. -Fl. Amboy Clays, p. 132, pl. xlvi, figs. 30-38. Our specimen apparently represents a central lobe of the organism named as above by Dr. Newberry, from Woodbridge, “i a The same species has also been been found on Staten Island and Long Island. ~ Locality: Ball’s Point, Clay Head, Block Island. The evidence afforded by these species is of the highest im- portance, as it serves to definitely correlate the basal clays of 62 PT OMETCR. Block Island with those of Martha’s Vineyard to the east, and Long Island, Staten Island and New Jersey to the west, and shows them all to belong to the same Cretaceous horizon. Inasmuch as a prominent authority has published his opinion that these clays are probably Jurassic in age, I perhaps can not do better than to quote the words of Dr. Lester F. Ward, ex- pressed after an examination of the material now in our posses- sion from the region: ‘Those who are capable of supposing that such a flora as this could have flourished in Jurassic time are certainly at lib- erty to do so, and the geological world will doubtless duly ap- preciate their courage.” STRATIGRAPHY. While engaged in collecting the material previously described other matters of geologic interest were also incidentally noted. The lithologic characteristics of the basal (Cretaceous) clays always served to distinguish them from the superficial (bowlder) clays above. The latter are best represented on the south shore, at Mohegan Bluffs (see plates V. and VI.) and consist of contorted grayish sandy clay, in which gravel and occasioned bowlders occur, but no organic remains. The Cretaceous clays are exposed at Clay Head (see plate VII), Grace Point, and near Black Rock Point and Old Harbor Point (see plate VIII.). They are plastic and either black from the presence of lignite or else pure white, yellow, red or bluish. Beds of white sand accom- pany them at the two localities first mentioned. Observations on dip and strike are of but little stratigraphic importance, on account of the contortion to which the beds have been subjected by glacial action, and such observations as were made merely tended to emphasize this fact, the dip in all cases being toward the north, indicating that the strata had been pushed southward in a series of overthrust folds by the advanc- ing ice front. This was found to be uniformly the case with the basal clays and largely so with the superficial ones, apparently indicating that the latter as well as the former were laid down previous to the advent of the ice. 1Science, IV (Nov. 20, 1896), 760. peek ISLAND. 63 Photographic views of four of the most interesting localities mentioned were taken from which the accompanying plates were reproduced : PLATE V. Contorted bowlder clay, south shore, Mohegan Bluffs, looking west, about three-quarters of a mile east of Black Rock Point. Variegated (Cretaceous ) plastic clay beneath, in the distance, at extreme left. Dip of the latter, 60 N. W.; Strike, N. 38 E. and 50N. W.; N. Io E. PLATE VI. View of a portion of the latter exposure, looking east, showing con- tortions of the bowlder clay. PLATE VII. White (Cretaceous) plastic clay and sand, overlain with Drift, east shore, Ball’s Point, Clay Head. ip, 35 N.; Strike, E. and :W. PLATE VIII. Lignitic and white (Cretaceous) plastic clay, overlain with Drift, east shore, near Mineral Spring, about half a mile north of Old Harbor Point. Dip, 44. N. E.;. Strike, E. 20 8. iy BOTANY: PRELIMINARY REMARKS. Although engaged primarily in geological investigations, many notes on the vegetation of the island were incidentally gathered and its connection with the geological features noted. In fact, the study of the flora of any region, particularly that of a restricted one such as an island, is now recognized as being often of the highest importance when considered in connection with the geology, the facts in one often leading to an interpre- tation of otherwise puzzling problems in the other. The first essential in such an investigation is to obtain a broad general idea of the vegetation, and for this purpose as complete a list of the plants as possible is necessary, with notes on the relative abundance or scarcity of each species, so that not only may the extent of the existing flora be seen at a glance, but any striking lacune be at once noted. Mr. W. W. Bailey’s ‘‘ Notes on the Flora of Block Island’’* was made my basis for determining what had been previously recorded on the subject, and with his list constantly by me it was an easy matter, while wandering over the island, to refer to it and ascertain whether any species in question had been noted 1 Bull. Torrey. Bot. Club, xx. (June, 1893), 227-239. 64 HOLLICK. by him. If found upon the list it was checked off, and if not a memorandum was made and specimens collected. Physiographically the flora may be divided into that of hills, the peat bogs and pond holes, the salt marshes, the sand dunes and the salt water, the latter being exclusively algal, except for Zostera. The island is practically treeless and hence also de- void of such vegetation as is dependent upon forestal conditions. The bulk of the surface is that of a typical morainal region, with rounded hills and corresponding depressions, many of the latter being occupied by swamps or ponds, often without any visible outlet. Running streams are few and insignificant, and permanent springs occur only in a limited number of localities, mostly close to tide-water. Great Salt Pond, now connected with the ocean by means of an artificial channel, but formerly said to have been fresh water, occupies the center of the island and almost divides it into two parts, while between the eastern and western borders of this pond and the ocean are low nar- row strips of dunes and sand beaches. The remainder of the coast line is more or less precipitous and is strewn with boul- ders, washed out from the adjoining land. ‘The soil, except that of the limited dune and sand beach areas, consists of the boulder till and gravel. There are no rock outcrops anywhere exposed, and the geological conditions preclude the probability of any being within hundreds of feet of the surface. Probably all the land capable of it is, or has been at some time, either under cultivation or used for pasturage. Such, in brief, are the conditions under which the vegetation exists to-day on an iso- lated island about eleven square miles in area. ADDITIONS £0. THE) PRORA: Mr. Bailey enumerates in his list 285 species of Spermato- phyta and g Pteridophyta, to which I was able to make the fol- lowing additions, collected between July 8th and July 30th. 1. Zostera marina L. Abundant in salt water. 2. Panicum spherocarpon Ell. 3. Panicum pubescens Lam. \ Abundant on the dry hills. Probably included by Mr. Bailey under P. dichotomum L. BLOCK ISLAND. 65 4. Juncus acuminatus Michx. Abundant in the peat bogs. Commonly proliferous. 5. Smilax rotundifolia L. Rare. Only a few scattered plants, in widely separated localities on the south end of the island. 6. Sesyrinchium Atlanticum Bicknell. Common. Probably included by Mr. Bailey under S. anceps Cav. 7. Populus balsamifera candicans (Ait.) A. Gray. Sparingly established in certain swamps. Common in cultivation. 8. Salix cordata Muhl. Common in many swamps and along roadsides. Occasionally planted. 9. Salix cordata angustata (Pursh) Anders. Abundant in one swamp near the south side of Great Salt Pond. 10. Salix purpurea L. Abundant and thoroughly natural- ized along roadsides. 11. Rumex obtusifolus L. Sparingly, in a ditch along south side of Main St. 12. Glaucium Glaucium (L) Karst. A few plants, on the sand hills near Grace Point. 13. Roripa palustris (L.) Bess. Sparingly, in a ditch along south side of Main St. 14. Trifolium incarnatum L. One plant, in a field at the south end ofthe island. Probably introduced with other clover and hardly naturalized. 15. Lrifolium procumbens L. Not common. 16. Acalypha gracilens A. Gray. Common in dry open fields. Usually stunted. Probably included by Mr. Bailey under A. Virginica L. 17. Vicia sativa L. Common. 18. Hudsonia tomentosa Nutt. Abundant on the sand hills near Grace point. 19. Onagra Oakesiana (A. Gray) Britton. Not rare near the shore. Probably included by Mr. Bailey under 4:nxothera biennis L. 20. Lysimachia quadrifoha L. Common. 21. Trtentahs Americana Pursh. Common. 22. Asclepias pulchra Ehrh. Common. 23. Sericocarpus asteroides (L.) B.S. P. Abundant in a lim. ited locality at the south end of the island. ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Scr., XI, April 20,,1898—5. 66 ITOLLICK. 24. Gnaphahum purpureum L. Not common. Found with G. uliginosum \.. in the vicinity of Clay Head. With the above additions the list now comprises 309 Sper- matophyta and g Pteridophyta, but there is no doubt that it could be largely increased if collections were made in the spring and autumn. I was-unfortunate in having explored the same region as did Mr. Bailey, at the same time of year, so that I was able to accomplish but little more than to pick up a few spe- cies which he had somehow missed. ; DISCUSSION OF THE FLORA. If the flora be now examined as a whole several significant facts may be noted. Many curious lacune will at once attract attention, as remarked by Mr. Bailey, and not only are species wanting which one might reasonably expect to find, but so also are whole genera and even families. For example, the Liliaceze are not represented, and of the Smi- lace only two species (Swlax rotundifoha L. and S. glauca Walt.) were found in very limited numbers. The Boraginacez are wanting and, except for a few scattered trees of Vyssa aquatica L., the Cornaceze would be likewise. The genera Cornus, Vac- cinium (excluding the cranberry), Veronica, Metbomia, Lespedeza and Lapiisia are entirely absent. Only four species of Carex were found, one Pycnanthemum and one Viburnum, while many other species are represented by only a few individuals. Among the species which might be reasonably expected to occur, but which were not seen, may be noted Solanum Dulcamara L. and Verbascum Blattaria L., which usually follow in the wake of civilization; //zdescus Moscheutos L., Vernonia Noveboracensis (L.) Willd., /va frutescens L., Kr pane linearis (Michx.) Spach., K. pumila (L.) Spach. and Eee: tuberosum L. The ab- sence of the latter would perhaps not be remarkable except for the fact that its usual companion, Pogonta opluoglossoides (E.) Ker. is quite abundant. This list of lacunae could be readily extended by a careful analysis of the flora, but it should also be borne in mind that more thorough search might and probably would reveal the existence of species which have thus far escaped notice. BLOCK ISLAND. 67 The flora is morainal in its general character, except in the peat bogs and on the limited sand-dune and sea-beach areas, and has its nearest analogue in that of Montauk Point'. In fact, if we could imagine Montank Point to be despoiled of its few remain- ing trees and converted into an island it would bear a striking resemblance, geologically and botanically, to Block Island. CausES WHICH HAVE DETERMINED AND MOCIFIED THE FLORA. In discussing the causes which have determined the location of any flora and subsequently modified its characters, two prominent factors nearly always have to be considered—the geological and the human. Each of these may have been in- strumental in both introducing and eliminating certain species, and the discussion of a flora cannot be considered as complete unless they are taken into consideration. The influence of man is usually so obvious as to appeal at once to any observer or else it is a matter of more or less definite record. The geo- logical influence however is often so obscure and has its begin- ning at such a remote period that it usually escapes attention. In its widest application this includes atmospheric and ocean currents, soil, climatic changes, changes of level, etc. From a study of the existing geological and floral conditions, as I have elsewhere attempted to demonstrate,’ the indications are that at the close of the Ice Age there was a continuous strip of land, except for certain river outlets, extending from what is now New Jersey to the southeastern New England coast, with a large body of fresh water occupying the deepest parts of what is now the basin of Long Island Sound. This strip consisted of an elevated portion along the northern border, formed by the terminal moraine, left behind on the final retreat of the ice, and a plain region to the south, of varying width, representing what remained of the old Tertiary coastal plain, which formerly ex- tended out to what is now the 100-fathom contour. The flora which had been driven southward by the invasion of the ice re- 1See ‘*A trip to Montauk Point.’’ Arthur Hollick, Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xviii. (August, 1891), 255, 256. 2 See ‘‘ Plant Distribution as a Factor in the Interpretation of Geological Phenom- ena,” etc. Trans. N. Y.-Acad. Sci., xii (1893), 189-202. 68 HIOLEICK. turned when the ice receded, only such species becoming estab- lished, however, as could exist under the changed conditions. Fluctuations of level occurred; the final epoch, extending to the present time, being one of depression, during which the strip of land was gradually disintegrated and separated into a series of islands, some of which exist to-day as Long Island, Block Island, Martha’s Vineyard and Nantucket, while the basin of Long Island Sound became filled with salt water. If we consider the geological features of these islands and compare their floras, we may note that all except Block Island still have a greater or less area of the plain region remaining with them, upon which a characteristic flora finds a home. Block Island has lost all of its plain region and accompanying flora and is now merely an isolated portion of the terminal moraine, with small areas of modern sand-beach and dune for- mations, affording a home only for such species as can exist under those conditions. We may thus understand one of the causes which has determined the location and character of the flora and one of the reasons why it is so limited in the number of its species. Further than this, if the submarine contours of the vicinity are studied it will at once be seen that a deep channel extends almost entirely around Block Island. This fact is especially emphasized if the twenty-fathom contour is traced out and con- tinued around our coast line from Cape Ann to Staten Island. (See accompanying chart, plate IX.) From such a tracing the fact is evident that if we could imagine the coast to be subjected to elevation, until the twenty-fathom contour became the coast line, Block Island would yet remain an island, or perhaps a peninsula-like projection connected with the eastern end of Long Island by a narrow isthmus, while Martha’s Vineyard and Nan- tucket would be part of the mainland of New England. The indications therefore are that Block Island was the first portion of the strip of land to be isolated and converted into an island. The flora of the plain region, coming largely from the south and possibly always having existed close to the ice front, * 1 Tt is well known that the floras of many regions where glaciers occur, exist and flourish, not only up to the ice front, but even upon the débris covering the ice. BLOCK ISLAND. 69 would be the first to advance and occupy the ground, while that of the moraine, being more of a northern type, could not be- come established until the conditions due to glaciation north- ward had become modifled so that it could exist there and be- come distributed and Block Island, on account of its morainal character, would only be favorable for the flora which was the last to return. These geological changes then were probably what determined the general character of the flora in the first instance, and the next question for us to answer is what subse- quent causes served to modify it into its present condition. In the accounts of the earlier explorers and settlers the trees of the island are frequently mentioned and there is no doubt that it was extensively wooded at that time, but with what spe- cies there does not seem to be any record, except vague reference to pine, oak, beech, hickory, etc. In many of the peat bogs may yet be found large stumps, together with roots and branches, providing us with evidence that these early accounts were true. I saw one stump, about three feet in diameter, which had been dug out of a swamp at Clay Head, while at Old Harbor Point, in a swamp which had become exposed by the action of the waves, were found numerous stumps, roots and branches. As before stated, the island is now practically treeless, except for the few wind-lashed and stunted individuals in the vicinity of dwell- ings or in sheltered swamps and hollows. The extinction of the arboreal flora was undoubtedly due directly to the necessi- ties of civilization, not only for the purposes of land cultivation and pasturage, but also for lumber and fire wood. On account of their isolated position, the population, in its early days, had to depend almost entirely for subsistence upon what could be gathered from or cultivated on the island. The disappearance of the trees is, therefore, readily accounted for by the direct in- fluence of man, and to this influence was, of course, indirectly due the extinction of such herbaceous plants as could only exist under forestal conditions. Subsequent cultivation and pas- turage destroyed many more, and the complete isolation of the island rendered the re-establishing of species by natural agencies a matter of time or fortuitious circumstances. 70 FIOLLTCK. A limited number of species have, of course, also been intro- duced, purposely or accidentally, by human agency and are now part of the wild flora, and further additions will doubtless be made in the same way in the future, but as a study of plant dis- tribution Block Island will always be of interest chiefly on ac- count of the geological causes which determined the character of its flora long before the advent of man. Ill, MISCELLANBOUSENO TES: ARCHEOLOGY. Around the shores of Great Salt Pond and on the sand dunes which border the western shore of the island evidences of former occupation by the Indians are numerous. Kitchen middens are exposed in several street cuttings ; implements are often found scattered over the surface of the ground in certain localities and skeletons have been unearthed from time to time. In many places the kitchen midden accumulations were so obvious that it was impossible for me to ignore them entirely. They were found to consist of the customary collection of oyster and other shells, bones, pottery fragments, fire-cracked stones, charcoal, finished implements, rejects, flakes, chips, etc. An attempt was made to calculate the relative abundance of the several kinds of molluscs represented, with the following result : I. Oysters; 2. hard clams (Venus) ; 3. soft clams; 4. mus- sels; 5. pectens; “6. longeclams)\(Wac7a) +7. simmpersr) eo. land snails ; 9. occasional conch and razor shells. The finished implements found were two axes, of a plagioclase igneous rock and three arrow points, all of quartzite. The flakes and chips were found to. be mostly of white quartz and quartzite, with chert and jasper sparingly represented. In the sand dunes are many old fire places, mostly buried by the sand which has drifted over them. They could generally be located, however, by the thrifty nature of the turf on the surface immediately above. Indeed, my atttention was first called to their presence by noticing the patches of short green BLOCK ISLAND. T1 turf, scattered at intervals through the tall grass of the dunes. Upon digging down to a depth of from two to ten inches I in- variably found accumulations of charcoal, cobble stones, shells and the bones and teeth of animals. A number of the latter were collected and subsequently submitted to Dr. Bashford Dean, of Columbia University, for examination, to whom I am indebted for the following list : Sturgeon, numerous plates. Bluefish, jaws and teeth. . Swordfish, fragments of a skull and premaxille. Fish vertebra, not identified. Porpoise (?), fragments of ribs. Seal, fragment of a rib. Vertebre and tibia of a bird, possibly a swan. The indications are that the island would prove a rich field for investigation by anyone interested in archeology, as a fair amount of material may be obtained by mere surface scratch- ing, and systematic search would doubtless reveal much more. Aside, however, from the value of the material which might be collected, an insight would be obtained into the fauna which formerly inhabited the island and its surrounding waters—in- formation which would be of great interest to the zoologist. Notre.—After having made the few archzological observa- tions above recorded I learned by accident that explorations were being made by others specially interested in the subject. This information caused me to abandon any further investiga- tions in that direction, in order not to anticipate any of the work under way, the results of which will doubtless be published in due time through other channels. ZOOLOGY. As might be expected, the existing fauna is comparatively sparse and is evidently very meagre compared to what once ex- isted on the island. In fact, the scarcity of animal life is sure to at once attract the attention of the observer from the main- land. Tree-loving birds are conspicuous by their absence, and I was 42, FIOELICR: curious to know how the robins, which were more or less abundant, were in the habit of nesting. Bank swallows, red- winged blackbirds and meadow larks were the birds most in evidence, and I found a nest of the latter, with four eggs, on July 20th. A bird that I identified with reasonable certainty as the bay-winged sparrow was seen in considerable numbers, evi- dently breeding freely, as I found two nests, one with three eggs on July 13th, the other with two on July 25th. Unless my previous experience is at*fault, all these nests represent very late broods, and this feature seemed to me to be a fact of suffi- cient interest for record. An interesting feature of the molluscan fauna is the immense numbers of L2¢torina littoria, the “ periwinkle”’ of the Old World, which is now by far the most abundant shell-fish on the shores. In places the rocks were found completely covered by them, to the exclusion of all native species. So far as I have been. able to ascertain, the first record of the occurrence of this species in America was in 1857, at Halifax, Nova Scotia. In 1873 it was reported from Prince Edwards’ Island, and in 1875 from Pro- vincetown, Cape Cod. It was next found at Wood’s Holl and Newport, and on Loyd’s Neck, L. I., and on Staten Island in 1888. I do not know of its previous record from Block Island, and am not informed as to its occurrence south of Staten Island. As it lives upon rocks, the sandy shores of New Jersey would probably not be a congenial habitat for it, and might limit its farther southward migration. Frogs and spotted turtles are plentiful, and I occasionally came across a few small striped snakes, but, except for those mentioned, the faunal elements were not obvious and would have to be searched for in order to be observed. | — ‘ ; . = = = my J * 3 =r t - ‘ oe as A + - » é : és] ‘ ‘ sod ‘ a A, a ae 205 _ a - ; a - P : Zz (73 ) jg oa BS Se 9 PEATE 711: Map of Block Island, reproduced, with alterations, from the Rhode Island, Block Island Sheet, U. S. Geological Survey (1889). : (74) MmNNALS N.Y. ACAD. SCI XI. PLATE Ii, Sandy Point \\ \ Grove Point \4Balls Point o Ly, BeaconHull9 Weg fe. aaw> Ao =pivt § $ Mn its “ae = ylk Mohegan . Wy wy ppeuwl/)/\wy9 1 z \\ Aly U Liy ny ‘ Lay SMPoint we Rocke Point a ° ys z ‘* bd fe igs Py ° me woe 4 é he 4 4 pe” ie 7 . mn ’ il 8 ee AD < PLATE Ti: Hig. t.< 2icus Krausiane Heer southeast omit... ae a9 Fig. 2. Magnolia Woodbridgensis Hollick. Ball’s Point. . . 60 Fig. 3. Gileichenta gracis Weer @). Black Rock Pomt. 2) 159 Figs. 4, 5. Zhinnfeldia Lesquereuxiana Heer. Black Rock Point. 58 Fig. 6. 7ricalycites papyraceus. Newb. Balls Poimt.. a0. amon Figs 7: Juclans arctica Heer,(?). Black) Rock Point. fa) see Fig. 8. Widdringtonites Retchit (Ett.) Heer (?). Black Rock POUL. Le oe Me Figs. 9a, 9b. Dammara microlepis Heer (?). Ball’s Point. . . 57 Fig. 10. Moriconia cyclotoxon Deb. and Ett. Black Rock Point. 57 (76 ) PLATE III. XI. ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. Cy PLATE. IV. €77) PLATE WY: PAGE. Figs. 1-3. Myrtophyllum (Eucalyptus ?) Geinitsi Heer (?). Black Rock SE oimt.. a) : « 160 Fig: 4. Sa0x Grovnerehe lence ae anes Rock Bolte 59 Fig. 5a. Salix proteefolia flexuosa Lesq. Black Rock Point. . 59 Fig. 5b. Eucalyptus ? nervosa Newb. Black Rock Point. . . 61 Figs. 6, 7. Laurus plutona Heer. Black Rock Pomt.=:.)7 9 010e Fig. 8. Celastrus arctica Heer. “BiackwRock Point. |.) eos (78 ) DEA Ev i o> i os PLATE. V. General view of Mohegan Bluffs, east of Black Rock Point, Block Island. View is to the west. (80 ) XI. PLATE V. ANNALS N; Y, ACAD. SCI; WS = wt X\ ‘ Sa _ Sa MS 73 - Bey EN Sy a mw a ; ai hi Ml bye, ys Sy i lat AN wy Ae . J a n Re : \ ae = Ay SS Wa ————— = —— vith ‘ a ee a ie | yi Ke if. ae VN RNY \S Ss ee AORN! oa CA, ws aN “ ‘ a \ a NS \ iV RACED ip hs UA Mai. ‘1 Ce iy (AY oo, Q (a Ws it i Ay PKs @ / eX > i a ' . . 7 om ax E ese wi 7 ey a ¢ 7 : 7 - Mb | ; are, ras . : op arb ri TY ; ; te ' "Wu Gil aaeae eet 1s So 2 Os A é< eA ¢ 1 4. 7 ‘$73 a id “ ie ae ae. by at — Cea? a af Neatgets alan J - Wal - ae ; / cen t . > Ais in ele eee (81) ae Ms ‘AN NALS N, Y. Acap. Scr., XI, April 20, 1898—6. y _ . , aes ae a - ps4 . _s . ? » : * at al aS aie > bee) Me Pe ng rs : br 7 5 pe TAY “ “ne el + Ts - g —. Py a? 4 s ee eye . 4 ic oy f 1 PLATE. WF* View of portion of Mohegan Bluffs, Block Island, shown in 4 _ Plate V., looking eastward. } 82> as q Pa STI e ae ore Nees Paw ne Lh'® PLATE VI. = —s 3 5 ~- S > ?, hes x as 5 ; . SS ‘5 25 > = i=¢ = ee ey 3 &> as - » ‘ Sarats 5K a . . ‘7 = Z ath) ry i > >, TEE * : z — NU \ \e —= A ZA SF Zz cS : Z A Zi S S 3) e, vou OO we ay) x mel; S ae as ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. ‘PLATE VIL Exposure of white plastic exci ean clay and sand. at Ball’s Point, Clay Head, Block Island. “(sty es is van we . PLATE VII, ANNALS N. Y. ACAD, SCI, ‘ ' i a We) 4, [i Ii iy Mt, ihe Uf x HATE Tits eae Uae nie Ate * sade ay Haenst ext = a 1 / Lf, Wg l Gs : EW Bay isda Al ; a} Ay Lise a Z E a Ds.) A fy it ‘ ia a Aa trish iy By ae \ | * : as ‘ ane ‘" AN ae < ASE PLATE VIif- ( 85 ) PLATE VIII. = Exposure of lignitic and white plastic (Cretaceous) clay, Mineral ui Spring, north of Old Harbor Point, Block Island. (86) PLATE VIII. XI. ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. rit pies a ae 2a “ihe Roe ; oa} Cw ' Al 7 = ie oP al - , =A ee pe nn Ss ae eee - - > a ot - ‘ a a # PLATE IX. (87 ) ‘PLATE IX. | Chart of the Atlantic Coast, from Cape Ann to Staten Island, te showing the location of the twenty-fathom contour. is | | (88) ae ee ) PLATS AMEE PLATE XVEti, Canis familiaris—Dog. Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view. Columbia University Museum, No. 1256. (156 ) PLATE XVIII. ANNALS N.Y. ACAD: SCI. XI SS Tht ~ PLATE XIX, PLATE XIX. Dicotyles torquatus—Collared Peccary. Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view. Columbia University Museum, No. 1258. (158 ) ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI.. XI. PLATE, XIX. . ul Ss. J BO MAU eu ct ueuigesctcer, PEATE, Xe Myrmecophaga jubata—Great Ant-Eater. Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view. Columbia University Museum, No. 479. ( 160 ) ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. Al. ~ PLATE XA. PLATE XXI. Auchenia glama-pacos—Llama-Alpaca. Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view. Columbia University Museum, No. 585. (162 ) BNNALS WN. ¥. ACAD. Scr. XI. PLATE XXI. PEALE RAL. ( 163 ) PLATE XXIL Cebus capucinus—Capuchin monkey. Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view. Columbia University Museum, No. 488. ( 164 ) ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. XI. PLATE XXII. N.Y. Acap. Scr., XI, July 29, 1898—r12. oT ic a A a . . PLATE -XXi0. Cebus capucinus—Capuchin monkey. Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Dorsal view. Columbia University Museum, No. 488. ( 166 ) ENNAUS Ne YrACAD: SCI. XI. RATE: OE Tf, aS tat) a 4) may : % PLATE: XXIV: Cebus niger—Capuchin monkey. Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Dorsal view. Columbia University Museum, No. 484. (168 ) AINNALS N.Y. ACAD: SCI. x1. PLATE XXIV. = ri t Pru tT <9 \ r Persil) PLATE XXV. ( 169 ) PLATE XXV., Cebus niger—Capuchin monkey. Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view. Columbia University Museum, No. 484. (170) ANNALS’N. Y. ACAD. SCI. XI. PLATE XXV. pile by AOC VE. (171 ) PLATE XAViE Phoca vitulina—Harbor Seal. Corrosion of bronchial system and pulmonary artery. Ventral view. Columbia University Museum, No. 584. (172 ) ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. XI. PLATE XXVI. AB «yh a 2 & a | ST yyy PLATE AX VIL. Gee PLATE XOOV ie Schematic series, based on preparations described, showing types of mammalian bronchial tree and pulmonary artery. (174) ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. XI. PLATE XXVII. Phoca vitulina. Myrmecophaga jubata. eer te pi eae? Tel Pear AV LUI. ee | * PEATE) Xoo ii Schema showing development of mammalian arterial system. Guay ANNALS NYS ACAIN SCI. -XT. PLATE XXVIII. [ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Scr., XI, No. 9, tp. 177 to 192, July 29, 1898. ] THE DEBT OF THE WORLD TO PURE SCIENCE. ANNUAL ADDRESS OF THE RETIRING PRESIDENT, J. J. STEVENSON. (Read February 28, 1898.) Tue fundamental importance of abstruse research receives too little consideration in our time. The practical side of life is all-absorbent; the results of research are utilized promptly and full recognition is awarded to the one who utilizes, while the investigator is ignored. The student himself is liable to be regarded as arelic of medieval times, and his unconcern respect- ing ordinary matters is serviceable to the dramatist and news- paper witlet in their times of need. Yet every thoughtful man, far away as his calling may be from scientific investigation, hesitates to accept such judgment as accurate. Nota few, engrossed in the strife of the market- place, are convinced that even from the selfish standpoint of mere enjoyment less gain is found in amassing fortunes or in acquiring power over one’s fellows than in the effort to solve Nature’s problems. Men scoff at philosophical dreamers, but the scoffing is not according to knowledge. The exigencies of subjective philosophy brought about the objective philosophy. Error has led to the right. Alchemy prepared the way for Chemistry, Astrology for Astronomy, Cosmogony for Geology. The birth of inductive science was due to the necessities of de- ductive science, and the greatest development of the former has come from the trial of hypotheses belonging in the border land between science and philosophy. | My effort this evening is to show that discoveries which have proved all-important in secondary results did not burst forth full-grown ; that in each case they were, so to say, the crown of (177) 178 STE RENSOW. a structure reared painfully and noiselessly by men indifferent to this world’s affairs, caring little for fame, and even less for wealth. Facts were gathered, principles were discovered, each falling into its own place until at last the brilliant crown shone out and the world thought it saw a miracle. This done, I shall endeavor to draw a moral which it is hoped will be found worthy of consideration. The heavenly bodies were objects of adoration from the earliest antiquity ; they were guides to caravans on the desert as well as to mariners far from land ; they marked the beginning of seasons or, as in Egypt, the limits of vast periods embracing many hun- dreds of years. Maps were made thousands of years ago showing their positions, the path of the sun was determined rudely, the influence of the sun and moon upon the earth was recognized in some degree and their influence upon man was in- ferred. Beyond these matters man with unaided vision and with knowledge only of elementary mathematics could not go. Mathematical investigations by Arabian students prepared the means by which, after Europe’s revival of learning, one without wealth gave a new life to astronomy. Copernicus, early trained in mathematics, during the last thirty years of his life spent the hours stolen from his work us a clerk and charity physician in mathematical and astronomical studies, which led him to reject the complex Ptolemaic system and to accept in modified form that bearing the name of Pythagoras. Tycho Brahe followed. A mere star-gazer at first, he became an earnest student, im- proved the instruments employed, and finally secured recogni- tion from his sovereign. For twenty-five years he sought facts, disregarding none, but seldom recognizing economic importance in any. His associate, Kepler, profiting by his training under Brahe, carried the work far beyond that of his predecessors— and this in spite of disease, domestic sorrows and only too fre- quent experience of abject poverty. He divested the Coper- nicus hypothethis of many crudities and discovered the laws which have been utilized by astronomers in all phases of their work. He ascertained the causes of the tides; with the aid of the newly invented telescope made studies of eclipses and oc- ANNUAL ADDRESS. 179 cultations, and just missed discovering the law of gravitation. He laid the foundation for practical application of astronomy to every-day life. In the eighteenth century astronomy was recognized by gov- ernments as no longer of merely curious interest and its students received abundant aid. The improvement of the telescope, the discovery of the law of gravitation and the invention of logarithms had made possible the notable advance marking the close of the seventeenth century. The increasing requirements of accuracy led to exactness in the manufacture of instruments, to calculation and recalculation of tables, to long expeditions for testing methods as well as conclusions, until finally the suggestions of Coperni- cus, the physician, and of Kepler, the ill-fed invalid, became fact, and astronomical results were utilized to the advantage of man- kind. The voyager onthe ocean, the agriculturist on land, reap benefits from the accumulated observations of three centuries, though they know nothing of the principles or of the laborers by whom the principles were discovered. The regulation of chronometers as well as the fixing of boundary lines between great nations are determined by methods due to slow accumu- lation of facts, slower development in analysis and calculation, and even slower improvement in instruments. Galvani’s observation that frogs’ legs twitch when near a friction machine in operation led him to test the effect of atmos- pheric electricity upon them. The instant action brought about the discovery that it was due, not to atmospheric influence, but to a current produced by contact of a copper hook with an iron rail. Volta pursued the investigation and constructed the pile which bears his name. With this, modified, Davy, in 1807, decomposed potash and soda, thereby isolating potassium and sodium. This experiment, repeated successfully by other chemists, was the precursor of many independent investigations which directed to many lines of research, each increasing in in- terest as it was followed. , Volta’s crown of cups expanded into the clumsy trough bat- teries which were finally displaced in 1836 by Daniel’s constant battery, using two fluids, one of which was cupric sulphate. De 180 STEVENSON. la Rue observed that as the sulphate was reduced, the copper was deposited on the surface of the outer vessel and copied ac- curately all markings on that surface. Within two or three years Jacobi and Spencer made the practical application of this observation by reproducing engravings and medals. Thus was born the science of electro-metallurgy. At first mere curiosities were made, then electro-plating in a wider way, the electrotype, the utilization of copper to protect more easily destructible metals, the preparation of articles for ornament and utility by covering baser metals with copper or silver or gold; while now the development of electro-generators has led to wide applica- tions in the reduction of metals and to the saving of materials which otherwise would go to waste. Oersted in 1819-20, puzzling over the possible relations of voltaic electricity to magnetism, noticed that a conductor carry- ing an electrical current becomes itself a magnet and deflects the needle. Sturgeon, working along these lines, found that soft iron enclosed in a coil, through which a current passes be- comes magnetic, but loses the power when the current ceases. This opened the way for our own Henry’s all-important dis- covery of the reciprocating electro-magnets and the vibrating armature—the essential parts of the magnetic telegraph. Henry actually constructed a telegraph in 1832, winding the wires around his class-room in Albany and using a bell to record the making and breaking signals. Here, as he fully recognized, was everything but a simple device for receiving signals. Several years later, Professor Morse, dreaming night and day of the telegraph, was experimenting with Moll’s electro-magnet and finding only discouragement. His colleague, Professor Gale, advised him to discard the even then antiquated apparatus and to utilize the results given in Henry’s discussion. At once the condition was changed and soon the ingenious recording instru- ment bearing Morse’s name was constructed. Henry’s scien- tific discoveries were transmuted by the inventor’s ingenuity into substantial glory for Morse, and proved a source of inconceiv- able advantage to the whole civilized world. Steinhal’s dis- covery that the earth can be utilized for the return current com- ANNUAL ADDRESS. 181 pleted the series of fundamental discoveries, and since that time everything has been elaboration. Oersted’s discovery respecting the influence of an electric cur- rent closely followed by that of Arago in the same direction opened the way for Faraday’s complete discovery of induction, which underlies the construction of the dynamo. This ascer- tained, the province of the inventor was well defined, to con- jure some mechanical appliance whereby the principle might be utilized. But here, as elsewhere, the work of discovery and that of invention went on almost pari passu ; the results of each in- creased those of the other. The distance from the Clark and Page machines of the middle ’30’s, with their cumbrous horse- shoe magnets and disproportionate expenditure of power, to the Siemens machine of the ’50’s was long, but it was no leap. In like manner, slow steps marked progress thence to the Gramme machine, in which one finds the outgrowth of many years of labor by many men, both investigators and inventors. In 1870, forty years after Faraday’s announcement of the basal principle, the stage was reached whence progress could be rapid. Since that time the dynamo has been brought to such stage of efficiency that the electro-motor seems likely to displace not merely the steam engine, but also other agencies in direct application of force. The horse is passing away and the trolley road runs along the country highway ; the longer railways are considering the wis- dom of changing their power ; cities are lighted brilliantly where formerly the gloom invited highwaymen to ply their trade ; and even the kitchen is invaded by new methods of heating. Long ago it was known that if the refining of pig iron be stopped just before the tendency to solidify became pronounced the wrought ironis more durable than that obtained in the com- pleted process. This imperfectly refined metal was made frequently, though unintentionally and ignorantly. A short railroad in southwest Pennsylvania was laid in the middle 60's with iron rails of light weight. A rail’s life in those days rarely exceeded five years; yet some of those light rails were in ex- cellent condition almost fifteen years afterwards, though they had carried a heavy coke traffic for several years. But this process ANNALS N, Y. Acap. Scr., XI, July 29, 1898—13. 182 STEVENSON. was uncertain, and the best puddlers could never tell when to stop the process in order to obtain the desired grade. When a modification of this refining process was attempted on a grand scale almost contemporaneously by Martien, in this country, and Bessemer, in England, the same uncertainty of product was encountered—sometimes the process was checked too soon, at others pushed too far. Here the inventor came to a halt. He could use only what was known and endeavor to im- prove methods of application. Under such conditions the Besse- mer process was apparently a hopeless failure. Another, however, utilized the hitherto ignored work of the closet investigator. The influence of manganese in counteracting the effects of cer- tain injurious substances and its relation to carbon when pres- ent in pig iron were understood as matters of scientific interest. Mushet recognized the bearing of these facts and utilized them in changing the process. His method proved successful, but with thorough scientific forgetfulness of the main chance, he neg- lected to pay some petty fees at the Patent Office and so reaped neither profit nor popular glory for his work. The Mushet process having proved the possibility of immedi- ate and certain conversion, the genius of the inventor found full scope. The change in form and size of the converter, the re- movable base, the use of trunnions and other details, largely due to the American, Holley, so increased the output and re- duced the cost that Bessemer steel soon displaced iron and the world passed from the age of iron into the age of steel. Architectural methods have been revolutionized. Buildings, ten stories high, are commonplace ; those of twenty no longer excite comment, and one of thirty arouses no more than a pass- ing pleasantry respecting possibilities at the top. Such build- ings were almost impossible a score of years ago, and the weight made the cost prohibitive. The increased use of steel in con- struction seems likely to preserve our forests from disappear- ance. In other directions the gain through this process has been more important. The costly, short-lived iron rail has disap- peared and the durable steel rail has taken its place. Under the ANNUAL ADDRESS. 183 moderate conditions of twenty-five years ago iron rails scarcely lasted more than five years ; in addition the metal was soft, the limit of load was reached quickly, and freight rates, though high, were none too profitable. But all changed with the advent of steel rails as made by the American process. Application of abstruse laws discovered by men unknown to popular fame enabled inventors to improve methods and to cheapen manufacture until the first cost of steel rails was less than that of iron. The durability of the new rails and their resistance to load justified increased expenditure in other directions to secure permanently good condition of the road bed. Just here, our fellow member, Mr. P. H. Dudley, made his contribution, whose importance can hardly be over- estimated. With his ingenious recording apparatus it is easy to discover defects in the roadway and to ascertain their nature, thus making it possible to devise means for their correction and for preventing their recurrence. The information obtained by use of this apparatus has led him to change the shape and weight of rails, to modify the type of joints and the methods of ballasting, so that now a roadbed should remain in good con- dition and even improve during years of hard use. But the advantages have not inured wholly to the railroad companies. It is true that the cost of maintenance has been re- duced greatly ; that locomotives have been made heavier and more powerful ; that freight cars carry three to four times as much as they did twenty-five years ago, so that the whole cost of opera- tion is very much less than formerly. But where the carrier has gained one dollar the consumer and shipper have gained hun- dreds of dollars. Grain and flour can be brought from Chicago to the seaboard as cheaply by rail as by water; the farmer in Dakota raises wheat for shipment to Europe; coal mined in West Virginia can be sold on the docks of New York ata profit for less than half the freight rate of twenty-five years ago. Our internal commercial relations have been changed and the revo- lution is still incomplete. The influence of the Holley-Mushet- Bessemer process upon civilization is hardly inferior to that of the electric telegraph. 184 STEVENSON. Sixty years ago an obscure German chemist obtained an oily liquid from coal-tar oil, which gave a beautiful tint with calcium chloride ; five years later another separated a similar liquid from a derivative of coal-tar oil. Still later, Hofmann, then a stu- dent in Liebig’s laboratory, investigated these substances and proved their identity with an oil obtained long before by Zinin,. from indigo, and applied to them all Zinin’s term, Anilin. The substance was curiously interesting and Hofmann worked. out its reactions, discovering that with many materials it gives. brilliant colors. The practical application of these discoveries. was not long delayed, for Perkins made it in 1856. The mar- velous dyes, beginning with Magenta and Solferino, have be- come familiar to all. The anilin colors, especially the reds, greens and blues, are among the most beautiful known. They have given rise to new industries and have expanded old ones. Their usefulness has led to deeper studies of coal-tar products,. to which is due the discovery of such substances as antipyrin,. phenacetin, ichthyol and saccharin, which have proved so im- portant in medicine. One is tempted to dwell for a little upon Meteorology, that border land where physics, chemistry and geology meet, and to speak of the Signal Service system, the outgrowth of studies by an obscure school teacher in Philadelphia, but the danger of trespassing too far upon your endurance makes proper only this passing reference. While men of wealth and leisure wasted their energies in lit- erary and philosophical discussions respecting the nature and origin of things, William Smith, earning a living as a land sur- veyor, plodded over England, anxious only to learn, in no haste to explain. His work was done honestly and slowly; when finished as far as was possible with his means, it had been done so well that its publication checked theorizing and brought men back to study. His geological map of England was the basis: upon which the British Survey began preparation of the detailed sheets, showing Britain’s mineral resources. In our country Vanuxem and Morton early studied the New Jersey Cretaceous and Eocene, containing vast beds of marl. ANNUAL ADDRESS. 185 Scientific interest was aroused, and eventually a geological sur- vey of the State was ordered by the Legislature. The appro- priation was insignificant, and many of the legislators voted for it, hoping that some economic discovery might be made to jus- tify their course in squandering the people’s money. Yet there were lingering doubts in their minds and some found more than lingering doubts in the minds of their constituents. But when the marls were proved to contain materials which the chemist, Liebig, had shown to be all-important for plants, the conditions were changed and criticism ceased. The dismal sands of eastern New Jersey, affording only a scanty living for pines and grasses, were converted by application of the marl into gardens of un- surpassed fertility. Vanuxem’s study of the stratigraphy and Morton’s study of the fossils had made clear the distribution of marls and the survey scattered the information broadcast. Morton and Conrad, with others scarcely less devoted, labored in season and out of season to systematize the study of fossil animals. There were not wanting educated men who wondered why students of such undoubted ability wasted themselves in trifling employment instead of doing something worthy of them- selves so as to acquire money and fame. Much nearer to our own time, there were wise legislators who questioned the wis- dom of ‘‘ wasting money on pictures of clams and salamanders,” though the same men appreciated the geologist who could tell them the depth of a coal bed below the surface. But the lead diggers of Illinois and Iowa long ago learned the use of pale- ontology, forthe “lead fossil’? was their guide in prospecting. The importance and practical application of this science, so largely the outgrowth of unappreciated toil in this country as well as in Europe, is told best in Professor Hall’s reply to a pat- ronizing politician’s query, “ And what are your old fossils good for?” ‘Forthis. Take me blindfolded in a balloon; drop me where you will ; if I can find some fossils, I'll tell you in ten minutes for what mineral you may look and for what mineral you need not look.”’ Many regard Botany as a pleasing study, well fitted for women and dilletanti, but hardly deserving attention by strong men. 186 SLEVENSOL. Those who speak thus only exercise the prerogative of igno- rance, which is to despise that which one is too old or too lazy to learn. The botanist’s work is not complete when the care- fully gathered specimen has been placed in the herbarium with. its proper label. That is but the beginning, for he seeks the relation of plantsinall phases. In seeking these he discovers facts which often prove to be of cardinal importance. The rust which destroys wheat in the last stage of ripening, the disgusting fun- gus which blasts Indian corn, the poisonous ergot in rye, the blight of the pear and other fruits fall as much within the bot- anist’s study as do the flowers of the garden or the sequoias of the Sierra. Not a few of the plant diseases which have threat- ened famine or disaster have been studied by botanists, unknown to the world, whose explanations have led to palliation or cure. The ichthyologist, studying the habit of fishes, discovered characteristics which promptly commended themselves to men of practical bent. The important industry of artificial fertiliza- tion and the transportation of fish eggs, which has enabled man. to restock exhausted localities and to stock new ones, is but the outgrowth of closet studies which have shown how to utilize Nature’s superabundant supply. The entomologist has always been an interesting phenomenon to a large part of our population. Insects of beauty are attrac- tive, those of large size are curious, while many of the minuter forms are efficient in gaining attention. But that men should devote their lives to the study of unattractive forms is to many a riddle. Yet entomology yields to no branch of science inthe importance of its economic bearings. The study of the life habits of insects, their development, their food, their enemies, a study involving such minute details as to shut men off from many of the pleasures of life and to convert them into typical students, has come to be so fraught with relations to the public weal that the State Entomologist’s mail has more anxious letters. than that of any other officer. Insects are no longer regarded as visitations from an angry Deity, to be borne in silence and with penitential awe. The in- timate study of individual groups has taught in many cases how ANNUAL ADDRESS. 187 to antagonize them. The scale threatened to destroy orange culture in California ; the Colorado beetle seemed likely to ruin one of our important food crops ; minute aphides terrified raisers of fruit and cane in the Sandwich Islands. But the scale is no longer a frightful burden in Califarnia; the potato bug is now only an annoyance, and the introduction of lady birds swept aphides from the Sandwich Islands. The gypsy moth, be- lieved for more than a hundred years to be a special judg- ment, is no longer thought of as more than a very expensive nuisance. The curculio, the locust, the weevil, the chinch bug and others have been subjected to detailed investigation. In almost all cases methods have been devised whereby the ravages have been diminished. Even the borers which endangered some of the most important timber species are now understood and the possibility of their extermination has been changed into probability. Having begun with the ‘infinitely great,’’ we may close this summary with a reference to the “infinitely small.” The study of fermentation processes was attractive to chemists and natural- ists, each claiming ownership of the agencies. Pasteur, with a patience almost incredible, revised the work of his predecessors and supplemented it with original investigations, proving that a very great part of changesin organic substances exposed to the atmosphere are due primarily to the influence of low animals or plants whose germs exist in the atmosphere. One may doubt whether Pasteur had any conception of the possibilities hidden in his determination of the matters at issue. The canning of meats and vegetables is no longer attended with uncertainty, and scurvy is no longer the bane of explorers ; pork, which has supplied material for the building of railroads, the digging of canals, the construction of ships, can be eaten without fear. Flavorless butter can be rendered delicious by introduction of the proper bacteria ; sterilized milk saves the lives of many children; some of the most destructive plagues are understood and the antidotes are prepared by the culture of antagonistic germs ; antiseptic treatment has robbed surgery of half its terrors and has rendered almost commonplace opera- 188 STEVENSON. tions which less than two decades ago were regarded as _ justifi- able only as a last resort. The practice of medicine has been advanced by outgrowths of Pasteur’s work almost as much as it was by Liebig’s chemical investigations more than half a cen- tury ago. In this review, the familiar has been chosen for illustration in preference to the wonderful, that your attention might not be diverted from the main issue, that the foundation of industrial advance was laid by workers in pure science, for the most part ignorant of utility and caring little about it. There is here no disparagement of the inventor; without his perception of the practical and his powers of combination the world would have reaped little benefit from the student’s researches. But the in- vestigator takes the first step and makes the inventor possible. Thereafter the inventor’s work aids the investigator in making new discoveries to be utilized in their turn. Investigation, as such, rarely receives proper recognition. — It is usually regarded as quite a secondary affair in which scientific men find their recreation. If a geologist spends his summer vacation in an effort to solve some perplexing structural prob- lem he finds on his return congratulations because of his glori- ous outing; the astronomer, the physicist and the chemist are all objects of semi-envious regard because they are able to spend their leisure hours in congenial amusements ; while the natural- ist, enduring all kinds of privation, is not looked upon asa laborer because of the physical enjoyment which most good people think his work must bring. It is true that investigation, properly so-called, is made sec- ondary, but this because of necessity. Scientific men in gov- ernment service are hampered constantly by the demand for im- mediately useful results. Detailed investigation is interrupted because matters apparently more important must be considered. The conditions are even more unfavorable in most of our col- leges and none too favorable in our greater universities. The “literary leisure’? supposed to belong to college professors does not fall to the lot of teachers of science, and very little of it can be discovered by college instructors in any department. The ANNUAL ADDRESS. 189 intense competition among our institutions requires that profes- sors be magnetic teachers, thorough scholars, active in social work, and given to frequent publication, that being prominent they may be living advertisements of the institution. How much time, opportunity or energy remains for patient investiga- tion some may be able to imagine. The misconception respecting the relative importance of in- vestigation is increased by the failure of even well-educated men to appreciate the changed conditions in science. The ordinary notion of scientific ability is expressed in the popular saying that a competent surgeon can saw a bone with a butcher knife and carve a muscle with a handsaw. Once, indeed, the physicist needed little aside from a spirit lamp, test tubes and some plati- num wire or foil; low power microscopes, small reflecting tele- scopes, rude balances and home-made apparatus certainly did wonderful service in their day ; there was a time when the finder of a mineral or fossil felt justified in regarding it as new and in describing it as such, when a psychologist needed only his own great self as a basis for broad conclusions respecting all man- kind. All of that belonged to the infancy of science, when little was known and any observation was liable to be a discov- ery, when a Humboldt, an Arago or an Agassiz was possible. But all is changed ; workers are multiplied in every land ; study in every direction is specialized ; men have ceased the mere gath- ering of facts and have turned to the determination of relations. Long years of preparation are needed to fit one to begin investi- gation ; familiarity with several languages is demanded ; great libraries are necessary for constant reference, and costly apparatus is essential even for preliminary examination. Where tens of dollars once supplied the equipment in any branch of science, hundreds, yes thousands, of dollars are required now. Failure to appreciate the changed conditions induces neglect to render proper assistance. As matters now stand, even the wealthiest of our educational institutions cannot be expected to carry the whole burden, for endowments are insufficient to meet the too rapidly increasing demand for wider range of instruction. It is unjust to expect that men, weighted more and more by the 190 STEVENSON. duties of science teaching, involving too often much physical labor, from which teachers of other subjects are happily free, should conduct investigations at their own expense and in hours. devoted by others to relaxation. Even were the pecuniary cost comparatively small, to impose that would be unjust, for, with few exceptions, the results are given to the world without com- pensation. Scientific men are accustomed to regard patents. much as regular physicians regard advertising. America owes much to closet students as well as to educated inventors who have been trained in scientific modes of thought. The extraordinary development of our material resources—our manufacturing, mining and transporting interests—shows that the strengthening of our educational institutions on the scientific side brings actual profit to the community. But most of this. strengthening is due primarily to the unremunerated toil of men dependent on the meagre salary of college instructors or gov- ernment officials in subordinate positions. Their aptitude to fit others for usefulness, coming only from long training, was ac- quired in hours stolen from sleep or from time needed for re- cuperation. But the labors of such men have been so fruitful in results that we can no longer depend on the surplus energy of scientific men, unless we consent to remain stationary. If the rising generation is to make the most of our country’s op- portunities it must be educated by men who are not compelled. to acquire aptness at the cost of vitality. The proper relation of teaching labor to investigation labor should be recognized, and investigation, rather than social, religious or political activity, should be a part of the duty assigned to college instructors. Our universities and scientific societies ought to have en- dowments specifically for aid in research. ‘The fruits of investi- gations due to Smithson’s bequest have multiplied his estate hundreds of times over to the world’s advantage. He said well that his name would be remembered long after the names and memory of the Percy and Northumberland families had passed away. Hodgson’s bequest to the Smithsonian is still too re- cent to have borne much fruit, but men already wonder at the fruitfulness of a field supposed to be well explored. Nobel ANNUAL ADDRESS. 191 knew how to supply the results of science ; utilizing the chem- ist’s results, he applied nitro-glycerine to industrial uses ; simi- larly, he developed the petroleum industry of Russia, and, like that of our American petroleum manufacturers, his influence was felt in many other industries of his own land and of the Conti- nent. At his death he bequeathed millions of dollars to the Swedish Academy of Science, that the income might be ex- pended in encouraging pure research. Smithson, Hodgson and Nobel have marked out a path which should be crowded with Americans. The endowment of research is demanded now as never be- fore. The development of technical education, the intellectual training of men to fit them for positions formerly held by mere tyros, has changed the material conditions in America. The surveyor has disappeared ; none buta civil engineer is trusted to lay out even town lots ;the founder at an iron furnace is no longer merely a graduate of the casting-house—he must be a graduate in metallurgy ; the manufacturer of paints cannot en- trust his factory to any but a chemist of recognized standing ; no graduate from the pickis placed in charge of mines—a min- ing engineer alone can gain confidence ; and so everywhere. With the will to utilize the results of science there has come an intensity of competition in which victory belongs only to the best equipped. The profit awaiting successful inventors is greater than ever and the anxious readiness to supply scientific dis- coveries is shown by the daily records. The Roentgen rays were seized at once and efforts made to find profitable applica- tion ; the properties of zirconia and other earths interested in- ventors as soon as they were announced ; the possibility of tele- graphing without wire incited inventors everywhere as soon as the principle was announced. Nature’s secrets are still unknown and the field of investiga- tion is as broad as ever. We are only on the threshold of dis- covery, and the coming century will disclose wonders far be- yond any yet disclosed. The atmosphere, studied by hundreds of chemists and physicists for a full century, proved for Ray- leigh and Ramsay an unexplored field within this decade. We 192 STEVENSON. know nothing yet. We have gathered a few large pebbles from the shore, but the mass of sands is yet to be explored. And now the moral has been drawn. The pointing is simple. If America, which, more than other nations, has profited by science, is to retain her place Americans must encourage, even urge, research, must strengthen her scientific societies and her universities, that under the new and more complicated conditions her scientific men and her inventors may place and keep her in the front rank of nations. NEw YORK UNIVERSITY, February, 1898. fAnnats N. Y. Acap. Sct., XI, No. 10, pp. 193 to 217, July 29, 1898. ] DESCRIPTION OF SOME MARINE NEMERTEANS OF PUGET SOUND AND ALASKA. / B. B. GRIFFIN. (Read March 14, 18c8.) BRADNEY BEVERLEY GRIFFIN died of pneumonia on March 26th—less than a fortnight after the present paper was read be- fore the Academy. The editor of the ANNALS has now sent me the proof for revision and has arranged that a brief notice of his life and work should be inserted as its preface. Mr. Griffin came rightfully by his deep interest in science, for his forefathers on both sides had been prominent in the learned professions, that of medicine especially. His father, Dr. Bradney Griffin, although dying young, was a well-known practitioner in New York. Mr. Griffin's mother is of the Hollister family : his paternal grandmother was a du Barriere, one of whom together with other nobles emigrated to this country during the French Revolution. Mr. Griffin received his first degree in 1894, graduating with highest honors, at the College of the City of New York. He there evinced a remarkable bent for zoology. Continuing his studies in the graduate Department of Columbia University he would have taken the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy at the present Commencement. He had held the position of Uni- versity Fellow in Zoology and had taken part for two years in the summer expeditions to the northwest coast. (193 ) 194 GRIFFIN. His published writings appear, with one exception, in the ‘Transactions of the Academy. Their results are of permanent value and have already received marked attention both in this country and abroad. His mind was mature and none of us ‘knew before his death that he was but twenty-six. His work showed to all, as memorial notices in foreign journals testify, that he was an investigator of rare promise; but those who knew him well can alone understand how much he would have contributed to zoological knowledge had his life been spared. I have never known a more perfect example of sacrificing de- ‘votion to a lifes work. He gave his best energy—more than his health could spare—to zoology for zoology’s sake. Per- -sonally, he was retiring, asked for nothing and cared for noth- ing in the way of material advancement. His industry was in- cessant, and was rarely directed in vain; he was conscientious even to the least of things; he made it clear to us that his ideals were the highest and that he did as he believed. BASHFORD DEAN. CoLuMBIA UNIVERSITY, July 12, 1898. PUBLISHED WritTIncs BY MR. GRIFFIN. ’96. The History of the Achromatic Structures in the matu- ration and fertilization of Thalassema. Zvans. N. Y. Acad. Scz., Vol. XV, pp. 163-176, pls 1x1. | ’97 (1) A brief account of the work of collecting in Puget Sound and on the Pacific coast. (With others.) /dd., Vol. XVI, pp. 33-43, pl. L : (2) Notes on the distribution and habits of some Puget Sound Invertebrates. (With N. R. Harrington.) /dzd., pp. 152-165. (3) Adaptation of the shell of Placuanomia to that of Saxi- domus, with remarks on shell adaptation in general. /dzd., pp. 1172: ’98 (1) Description of some marine Nemerteans of Puget Sound and Alaska. (The present paper.) (2) The Maturation and Fertilization of Thalassema. A thesis for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. Journal of Mor- phology. (Shortly to appear.) PUGET SOUND NEMERTEANS. 195 I “INTRODUCTION. The forms here described were collected by the writer while a member of the Columbia University expeditions of 1896 and 1897 to Puget Soundand Alaska. During the first of the sum- mers spent on the Pacific coast about 10-15 different forms were collected, all from the region about Port Townsend, Wash- ington. The work of the second summer added about 15 Alas- kan forms to the collection, besides three additional species from Puget Sound. Upon the return the writer lost by shipwreck not only the Alaskan material, but all the previously prepared sections and much valuable literature, together with manuscripts including notes upon the color, form, habits and habitats of the living animals. The consequent necessity of replacing the literature and resectioning the entire set of forms has, as may be readily understood, greatly delayed the publication of the specific de- scriptions. The collections were made with the view of accumulating material for a monograph of the Nemerteans of the Pacific coast of the United States, and it is hoped that the present brief notice will be followed by a more extensive work with colored plates. The special interest attaching to certain of the forms (e. g., Cari- noma), as well as the general importance of the formal pecu- liarities of heretofore unexplored regions, will, it is hoped, prove a sufficient excuse for the publication of the present paper. The species here described do not represent the entire num- ber collected, since, in addition to those lost by shipwreck, sev- eral have been omitted in which the material was either too poorly preserved or too scanty for adequate determination. As regards terminology, Montgomery’s term (96) mesen- chyme will be used to designate that tissue formerly known as “parenchyme,” ‘“‘body-parenchyme”’ and “gelatinous tissue.”’ The four vascular trunks of the mesonemerteans will be distin- guished as dorso-lateral and ventro-lateral vessels (=respectively *‘ Rhynchocolomseitengefasse’’ and ‘“ Seitengefasse ’’ of Burger, ““supra-proboscidian-sheath-vessels’’ and ‘blood vessel’’ of Oudemans). 196 GRIFFIN. The writer wishes to express his grateful acknowledgements to Professor H. P. Johnson, of the University of California, for his very kind assistance in obtaining southern specimens of Limplectonema viride Stimpson. He also feels indebted to Mr. Mutty, of Port Townsend, for his permission to use one of his buildings as a laboratory, and to Mr. Shaffer for his kind loan ot collecting appliances. tL EIS vORIG Ads: During the years 1857—58 there appeared in the Proceedings of the Philadelphia Academy a series of preliminary papers by Dr. William Stimpson, in which he briefly described the inverte- brates collected upon the North Pacific Exploring Expedition (1853-56). The collections made by Dr. Stimpson include, among other groups, thirty-three species of Nemerteans, ob- tained at points along the coasts of North America and Asia, though principally from Japan and China. Stimpson arranged his thirty-three species under seventeen genera, of which the following ten were new: LDzplopleura, Teniosoma, Dichilus, Cephalonema, Emplectonema, Diplomma, Dicelis, Polina, Tatsnoskia and Cosmocephatia.’. One half of the new genera have now proved synonyms. Thus Dichilus and Cosmocephaha = Ampliporus (Verrill ’92); Tenosoma = Eupolia (Burger ’95 (2)); Polina, according to Birger = Eu- pola, but according to Verrill = Amphiporus. Those of the other half (viz. Cephalonema, Diplomma, Dicelis and Tatsnoskia) have not, tothe knowledge of the present writer, been identified with any of the valid genera of the present day. Their fate must await further work upon these Japanese and Chinese forms. Of the remaining seven genera, four (Lemeus, Cerebratulus, Valencinia and Tetrastemina) were well recognized at the time Stimpson wrote, and are still valid ; while three (A/eckeha, Poly- stemma and Serpentaria) are synonyms of Cerebratulus, Amplhi- porus and Cerebratulus respectively. Two of the ten new generic terms invented by Stimpson rep- 1 His classification throughout is superficial and based in the main upon trivial external characters. 4 PUGEL SGOND NEMERTEANS. 197 resent valid genera, and, as Verrill ('95) has urged, should, by virtue of priority, supersede those now generally accepted by European writers. Ayzplectonema is sufficiently well defined, so that ‘‘ Sicher ergiebt sich trotz der unvollkommenen Diagnosen dass 49 und 55 mit Aupolia und 52 (Emplectonema) mit Lune- mertes zusammenfallen.” (Burger ’952). As Lmplectonema long antedates Lunemertes (Vailant 90), it should stand for this genus. Similarly Dzplopleura is at once recognized as identical with Langia (Hubrecht ’79) and has priority. Owing to loss of plates and material in the great Chicago fire, Stimpson was unable to publish his detailed descriptions and colored drawings. The Prodromus, accordingly, together witha brief paper on Chinese and Japanese forms (1855), represents, to the knowledge of the present writer, all the published work upon North Pacific Nemerteans up to date. Of the species obtained by the present writer, one (£7zplecto- nema viride Stimpson) was described in the Prodromus ; the other (Emplectonema violaceum Burger) was described by Burger (96) from the Chilian Coast, while the remainder do not seem to have been noticed by either. Among the latter is one form of special interest in that its genus, which represents a transitional type, has _ heretofore been represented by two species only, both of which are very rare. This form wich occurs abundantly in the Puget Sound region, is a new species of Carinoma. In order, however, to make clear the relationships and significance of Carinoma, it will be necessary to briefly trace the historical development of Nemertean taxonomy. One of the most servicable taxonomic systems was that pro- posed by Max Schultze in 1852, which divided the Nemerteans into the well-known ENnopLa and ANopLa, based upon the re- respective presence or absence of calcareous stylets in the pro- boscis. Although this system was generally accepted and adopted in the older text-books, it finally became evident that the mere presence or absence of stylets is no certazm indication of affinity. Thus forms are known whose inner organization in other respects conforms to the Enoplous type, yet lack the stylets (¢. ¢., Malacobdella, Pelagonemertes). Moreover, the Anopla ANNALS N. Y. Acab. Sct., XI, July 30, 1898—14 198 GRIFFIN. proved a very heterogeneous assemblage, since under this term forms were included that differ as widely from each other as they do from the Enopla (e. ¢., Carinella, Cephalothrix, Cerebra- tulus). These faults were partially removed by Hubrecht (’79) in the following system : 1. PALZONEMERTINI. No deep lateral fissure on the side of the head. No stylet in the proboscis. Mouth behind ganglia. Carinella, Cephatlothrix, Pola, Valencinia. 2. SCHIZONEMERTINI. A deep longitudinal lateral fissure on each side of the head, from the bottom of which a ciliated duct leads into the posterior lobe of the ganglion. Lateral nerves between the longitudinal and inner circular muscular coat of the body wall. Nervous tissue deeply tinged with hemoglobin. Mouth behind the ganglia. Lincus, Borlasia, Cerebratulis, Langia. 3. HoOPLONEMERTINI. One or more stylets in the proboscis. Mouth generally sit- uated before the ganglia. Lateral nerves inside the muscular coats of the body-wall. No deep longitudinal fissures on each side of the head. Drepanophorus, Amphiporus, Tetrastemma, Prosorhochmus, Oerstedia, Nemertes. The above system, the result of a deeper study of the inner organization of these worms, marked an important advance in taxonomy. ie 1859. | (a) 1. Along shore, near Nassau, N. P, Feb. 20, ’go. (6) 23,59. Salt Cay, N. P. ocean side; Jan 5315000: (c)2¢,19. Under sponges, Nassau, N. P., Jan. ’go. Range: West Indies. Collected at St. Thomas, Barbadoes. PAGURIDEA. Family Cenobitide Dana. 44. Coenobita diogenes (Latreille). Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., II, p. 240, Pl. 22, 1837. (a) 2%. Nicolstown, Andros Island, March 23, ’go. (4) 2¢,,19." Nassau, N:P. Jan. 16, yee: (c) 2. On beach, Quarantine station, near Nassau, N. P., 1890. BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 239 (2) 1, juv. In pools and under stones, New Providence and neighboring cays. Range: Florida to Brazil, West Indies, Bermuda. Collected at Antilles, Cuba, Jamaica, Hayti, Turks Island, St. Thomas, Barbadoes. Family Paguride. 45. Petrochirus granulatus (Olivier). Pagurus granulatus Olivier, Encyc. Meth., VIII, p. 640, 1811. Henderson, in Challenger, Anomura, p. 58, 1888. (2) 3¢. (6)1%,19. Inshell of Strombus gigas, Nassau, N. P., Jan. 26, ’90. Range: West Indies, Gulf of Mexico to Brazil, Cape of Good Hope. Collected at Antilles, Cuba, Jamaica. The common large West Indian hermit crab. 46 (2?) Clibanarius vittatus (Bosc. ). Pagurus vittatus Bosc. Hist. des Crust., II, p. 8, pl. XII, 1802. Kingsley, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., p. 236, 1878. (a) 1¢ imperfect. In small shell of Strombus gigas, beach near Nassau, N. P., Jan. go. (6) 1 (?) fragmentary. Near Nassau, N. P., Febr. 1, ’9o. Range: Fort Macon to Florida, West Indies, Brazil. I refer these imperfect specimens doubtfully to this species. The chele are wanting in (a), and (0) is too much broken to be of any value in the determination. 47 (2) Clibanarius tricolor (Gibbs). Pagurus tricolor Gibbes, Proc. Amer. Assoc., p. 189, 1850. (a) several specimens. (6) 1¢. South side New Providence, in small shells of Strombus gigas. The determination is doubtful, as the specimens are very poor and have almost entirely lost their color. They are all with- drawn into the shells of various littoral mollusks. 240 RANKIN. Family Parapaguride Smith. 48. Parapagurus sp. (az) 29. Dredged, Jan. 22, ’90, Nassau, N. P: Length of thorax 3 and 5 mm. respectively. I refer these imperfect, colorless specimens doubtfully to some species of Parapagurus. LORICATA. Family Panuliride Bate. 49. Panulirus argus (Latr.). Palinurus argus Latr. Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., II, p: 3200,,.13837- (2) 13,19. New Providence, Jan. 27,’90. Holes im sand between tides, about 5—6 in. deep, “very shy.” (4) 19... Nassau, N-P., Jans, 1890: (Diy) Range: West Indies to Brazil. Collected at Antilles, Cuba, Jamaica. STENOPIDEA. ‘ Family Stenopide Bate. 50. Stenopus hispidus (Latreille). (Pl. xxix, Fig. 1.) Palemon hispidus Olivier, Encyclop., VII, p. 666, 1811. Stenopus hispidus Latreille, Regne animal de Cuvier, ed 2, TV 5.p292: Bate; Challenger, Macrura, p. 211, PE Xxx, Herrick, The Life History of Stenopus, Nat. Acad. of scietices; Vol. V,p: 330: (2) 16. Nassau, N. P., Jan. 22,’90. In life the antenne are carried in front, not bent back. I note the characters of special importance in order to com- 1 This label is marked as doubtfully belonging to this specimen. BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 241 pare this already described species of Szenxopus with the two species following. Rostrum with a median dorsal row of 6 spines bifurcated at extremity, a lateral row of 3 or 4 spines on each side of rostrum; no ventral spines. Back of the sixth dorsal spine a double row. Rostrum does not reach to end of peduncle of inner antenne. Carapace of thorax very rough, with firm, sharp spines which are longer on the dorsal than on the lateral regions. Abdomen thickly armed with outwardly projecting spines. Third pereiopod long, abundantly armed with spines. The propodos with six rows above and below and two on each lateral surface. Measurements: Total length 50.5 mm., length of cephalo- thorax 16.5 mm., of abdomen 34 mm., of rostrum 6 mm., of telson 9.5 mm. Unless the Eastern form should prove distinct from the West Indian, we have a widely distributed species occurring in the warm waters of both hemispheres. It has been reported from: Indian ocean (Olivier), Australia (Peron and Lesneur), Borneo and Philippines (Adams and White), South Pacific (Dana), Amboina (DeMan), Fiji Islands and Bermuda (Bate), Cuba (Von Martens), Bahama Islands (Herrick). I introduce a figure of this specimen (PI. xxix, Fig. 1), al- though not a new species, in order to compare it with the two following species, figures of which have not yet appeared. 51. Stenopus semilzvis Von Martens (Pl. xxix, Fig. 2). Von Martens, Ueber Cubanische Crustaceen, Arch. f. Natur- eesch., Bd. 38, p: 144, 1872. (2) 16,1 Q with ova. Under large sponge. New Provi- dence, Jan., ’9o. My specimens correspond very closely, except in certain minor particulars noted below, with the description given by Von Martens of a species ‘probably from the West Indies,” which he found undescribed in the Berlin Museum and which he called S. semilevis. | Von Martens’ description (I. c., supra) I reproduce: ‘Cephalo- thorax spiny; abdomen smooth; rostrum short, not longer 242 RANKIN, than the peduncle of the inner antennz, compressed laterally and prolonged as a ridge nearly to the sharply marked cervical furrow, above with four teeth, below teeth wanting. Carpus of third pair of pereiopods quadrangular asin S. /uspidus, but the chelz compressed, with smooth sides and not so long; chele, including the dactyl, twice as long as broad; the upper margin sharper than the under and smooth, the under serrated. The dactyl halfas long as the palma; the back of the dactyl keeled, serrated. Length from tip of rostrum to tip of telson 12 mm. Length of third pereilopod 13 mm. Breadth of chela 3 mm. The fourth pereiopod shorter than third.” I note the following peculiarities in my specimens: Dorsal surface of rostrum with six teeth ; the fourth and sixth have each a minute subsidiary tooth. ‘Ventral surface with a single, not very prominent tooth. Both margins of the chele of the third pereiopods very finely serrated, a rather prominent keel on the upper margin. The third pereiopod of the right and left sides similar. Telson spiny. The large specimen (¢) is 15 mm. long, the ¢ slightly smaller ‘Length of ‘chelz in jo, "6 mm: breadth, 2.5 mm. Not having the opportunity of comparing the Bahama speci- mens with Von Martens’ type I prefer to consider these slight variations as possibly due to imperfect description, and to place my specimens, provisionally, at least, with Von Martens’ species. S. semilevis differs from S. /aspidus mainly in the teeth of rostrum, the shorter rostrum, the proportionately shorter and thicker hand, the less spiny carapace of cephalo-thorax and the smooth abdomen. 52. stenopus scutellatus n: sp, (PE xa Mig. 3): (z) 1(?) &. Under coral, near low water, Silver Cay, N. P. Total length from tip of rostrum to tip of thorax 18 mm. Length of rostrum 3 mm., of cephalo-thorax 7 mm. Rostrum has a single row of ten spines on median dorsal line; back of the tenth a double row of three spines extend to the cervical furrow. On median ventral line of rostrum are six spines ; 20 lateral spines on rostrum. Rostrum longer than in BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 243 S. juspidus, extending beyond the peduncle of inner antenne. Whole surface of carapace covered with delicate spines obscurely arranged in rows; usually curved forward, with a somewhat re- flexed tip. Spines on dorsal surface of first two abdominal seg- ments short and straight in a double row pointing forwards ; on third segment several rows, stouter, pointing outwards ; on the fourth, fifth and sixth segments spines are longer, pointing back- wards. In the middle of the posterior portion of the tergum of the third abdominal segment there is a polished, slightly ele- vated, shield-shaped area, with crenulated margins, about I mm. in length. The median tergal region of fourth segment is smooth and polished, surrounded by a row of appressed spines, the same being true to a less extent of the fifth segment. I have taken the specific name from this peculiar scutellar area on the third abdominal segment. This feature seems to corre- spond to a triangular but less prominent area on the similar segment in S. /zspzdus which is prolonged into a smooth dorsal ridge on the next segment. Telson lance-shaped, with a double row of spines between which is a longitudinal groove about as long as the uropodal lamellz, which are finely serrated on their margins, and, as the telson, fringed with stiff hairs. Eyes on short peduncles which are armed above with three short spines projecting over the cornea, and with a few spines at the anterior margin. Cornea (in alcoholic specimen) bluish- black. Inner antennz ; peduncle with a few weak spines at distal end of segments. Outer antennz ; peduncles with strong, forwardly projecting spines. Scale lined on inner margin with long, closely set hairs and prolonged into a ciliated bristle. Flagella more than twice the length of body. Third maxillipedes when extended reach a little further than extremity of rostrum ; the three distal segments about equal in length. First pair pereiopods wanting in my specimen. Second pair slender, chelate, segments of equallength. Third pair of similar proportions to those in S. szspidus; chele 7 mm. long; pro- podos laterally compressed and somewhat triangular in cross section, broad above; on the dorsal margin a double row of 244 RANKIN. eleven spines each, on the ventral margin a single row of nine spines ; two or three rows of minute spines on lateral surfaces. A number of long, soft hairs over the fingers, especially at the tips. Hands of the two chelapods similar in size. Carpus and ischium together about equal to propodos, each armed with rows of spines. Fourth pair long and slender ; dactylus bifid ; propodos slightly spiny, one-half length of carpus. Carpus and propodos obscurely articulated. Fifth pair pereiopods un- developed: Pleopods biramous, except first, with two or three spines each on the protopodite. From the single specimen at my disposal I would compare this species with S. “zspidus as follows: Rostrum proportion- ately longer (nearly % length of cephalothorax, in x. sp. (¥% in hispidus), longer than peduncle of inner antenne. Six ventral teeth (/zspidus none), no lateral teeth, single dorsal row of ten teeth (Azspidus six). Flagella of outer antenne fully twice the length of body; proportion 2:1 for x. sp., 7:5 for sespidus. Tergum of third abdominal segment with shield-shaped area. Third maxillipedes proportionately shorter than in /zspidus. Spines on cephalothorax equally long, but less rigid than in hispidus, giving in general a less thorny character to the new species. EUCIPHIDEA. Family Palemonide Bate. 53. Palemon savignyi (Bate). Brachycarpus savignyt Bate, Challenger, Macrura, p. 795, PI. ZO, LOSS, Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb., Bd. V, p. 727. (2) 1 specimen. Near Nassau, N. P., Febr., ’go. (6) 1 specimen. Nassau, N. P., 1890. (c) 5 @ with ova. Nassau, N. P., 1890. Bate’s specimen was from Bermuda, ‘in shallow water.” “This is the most northern limit of genus Palemon,” Ort- mann. The species has not been described from any other localities. BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 245 54. Leander northropi n. sp. (Pl. xxx, Fig. 4). (2) I specimen. Nassau, N. P., Jan., 1890. A single specimen with a total length of 30 mm. Length of cephalothorax to tip of rostrum I1I.5 mm. Cephalothorax with small tooth below orbit and a very minute tooth below this and a little back from the anterior margin on the lateral surface. Length of rostrum to posterior end of orbit 7 mm., slightly curved upwards toward apex. Jez teeth above, four below ; the first dorsal tooth forms with the tip of rostrum a bifid extremity. A long interval between first and second tooth ; interval between second and third one-third the length of that between first and second ; fourth, fifth and sixth teeth follow at slightly diminish- ing intervals, the sixth being over the posterior part of orbit of eye. Seventh, erghth and ninth teeth close together, posterior to orbit of eye. The first ventral tooth is a little in front of second dorsal, second ventral below second dorsal ; third and fourth at equal intervals between second ventral and orbit of eye. Inner antenne: Peduncle reaches beyond second ventral tooth of rostrum ; proximal segment about equal to the two distal. Upper flagellum bifid; united proximal portion of 14 segments ; the shorter branch has 12 segments; united there- fore for more than half its length. The longer branch reaches beyond the undivided flagellum. Outer antenne: Scaphocerite with lamellar portion slightly longer than spinose, reaches beyond first ventral tooth of ros- trum; flagellum exceeds the length of the body. Third pair maxillipedes reach to end of peduncle of inner an- tenne. First and second pereiopods: Long, slender and chelate ; second longer than first ; chela in second as long as carpus. Third and fourth pereiopods terminate in claws. Pleopods, biramous, setose. Telson, lanceolate, 4 mm. long, noticeably shorter than uropods, distal extremity with two sharp spines. Outer uropod imperfectly divided trans- versely, the proximal division ending in a lateral spine. ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XI, August 13, 1898—17. 246 RANKIN. This species is allied to L. petttinga F. Muller, from Brazil (see Ortmann, Revista do Museu Paulista, I, p. 191, 1897) and to L. maculatus Thallwitz (Abh. Mus. Dresd., III, p. 19, 1891) from West Africa. I am indebted to Dr. Ortmann for the preparation of the fol- lowing table, which exhibits the relationship : L. maculatus. L. northropi. | L. petitinga. { 12-13 segments united 14 segments united | ( 9 segments united {| 8 segments free. I2 segments free. | { 20 segments free. Bet tse Par ag fia posterior ory apostenior 61+1(1 pestenioy 3 |: «to orbit: Ae ale, to,orbit: 5—6 to orbit. Inner antennze Family Hippolytide Ortmann. 55. Tozeuma carolinense Kingsley. Kingsley : Proc. Acad. Nat. Se Phila; p. 90,713 76: (2) 19. with ova. Dredged in about 16 ft. Near Quaran- tine station, Jan. 90. Kingsley’s specimens are from Fort Macon and Beaufort, N. C., and Charlotte Harbor Fla. Measurements of Bahama specimen: total length 41 mm., rostrum 12 mm., cephalothorax (without rostrum) 7 mm., abdomen 22 mm. Family Alpheide Bate. 56. Alpheus edwardsii (Audouin). Athanas edwardsii Audouin; Planches de la descrip. de Egypte par, M. Savigny, Crust. El xeefis) fon io.£0: Bate, Challenger, Macrura, p. 542, 1888. (2) 4 specimens. Near Nassau, N. P., along shore, Febr. 20, "QO. | (2) 1 specimen. Nassau, N. P., Jan., 90. (c) 3 specimens. Under coral and in pools between tides, New Providence. BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 247 (2) 1 specimen. Under coral and in pools between tides, Nassau, N. P., Jan., ’9o. (e) 2 broken. Near Nassau, N. P., Febr., ’go. The distribution of this species is circumtropical. 57. Alpheus hippothoe, De Man. var. bahamensis, n. var. (Pl. xxx, Fig. 5). (a) 24 specimens. Under coral and in pools between tides, New Providence. (6) 3 specimens, one with ova. Nassau, N. P., Jan., ’go. (c) 2 specimens, one with ova. This species is most closely allied to the variety edamensis of Alpheus hippothoé De Man, from the Bay of Bengal and Indian Archipelago (Arch. de Naturg., Bd. 53, p. 518, 1887). Iam indebted to Dr. Ortmann for a communication from Prof. De Man comparing specimens from my material with his own /zp- pothoé. As there are certain differences between the West and East Indian specimens I propose to make a new variety for the West Indian. Total length from rostrum to telson, largest 24 mm., smallest 15 mm. _ Rostrum reaches nearly to end of first segment of in- ner antenna, sharp, laterally compressed, prolonged backwards as a distinct keel. Between keel and the prominent eyes a rounded depression. No ocular spines. Inner antenne: First joint of peduncle with small spine on outer surface ; second joint nearly twice the length of proximal ; terminal joint one-half the length of second. Shorter flagellum about the length of peduncle. Longer flagellum slender, about thrice the length of shorter. Outer antennze: Peduncle a little longer than that of inner, small spine on basal joint. Flagellum one third longer than long ramus of inner antenna, spinose portion of scaphocerite a little longer than the peduncle. Flabellar portion (scale) a trifle shorter ; not quite so long as the peduncle. Third pair of maxillipedes do not reach beyond end of peduncle of the outer antenne. First pair pereiopods: Large chela of largest specimen has a 248 RA NKIN. length of 18 mm., of smallest specimen 8 mm. The large chela has a somewhat quadrangular depression on the outer surface, the distal end of which is continued upwards into a well-marked depression on the dorsal margin and extends backward as a groove along the inside of the dorsal surface. A distinct, but less marked depression on the ventral margin. Inner surface of the hand slightly hairy, outer surface nearly smooth. Fingers contorted, color in alcoholic material pale blue. Movable finger slightly longer than thumb. In the small chelapod, which may be on the right or left side, the finger is one-third the length of palm. Carpus of chelapods short. Meros triangular in section ; ends distally in a sharp spine on the outer and inner angle. Distal end of meros reaches to end of peduncle of outer an- tenne. Second pair of pereiopods very long. Distal end of meros reaches beyond antennal peduncle. First and second joints of carpus sub-equal, each a little longer than third and fourth together. Third and fourth sub-equal. Fifth about two-thirds length of first; equal in length to fourth and fifth together. Finger about one-half length of thumb. (Fifth joint a little too short in figure.) Third and fourth pereiopods short and stout, not quite reach- ing to distal end of meros of second. Length of meros less than three times its breadth. Carpus one half length of meros. Loth carpus and meros with spines on lower margin of distal end. Propodos serrated on posterior surface. Fifth pair of pereiopods shorter and more slender. Telson with median furrow. Twosmall spines on either side of furrow. Outer plate of uropod minutely serrated on end. A sharp spine on its outer distal angle. Principal variations from A. ippothoé— In new variety: Peduncle of outer antennz longer than that of inner. Lamellar portion does not reach end of peduncle. Third maxillipedes do not reach beyond antennal peduncle. Relative lengths of carpal joints of seeond pereiopods differ. Variations from var. edamensis— Finger of small hand shorter than palm (longer in eda- BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 249 mensis). A quadrangular rather than a triangular depression on side of large hand. First joint of carpus of second pereiopod is equal in length to second (shorter in edamensis). Third and fourth pereiopods less broad than in edamenszs. 58. Alpheus websteri Kingsley. Kingsley, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., p. 416, 1879. (2) 3 specimens, one with ova. Along shore, near Nassau, eet acs) Pet. 20;,'9O. (0) 2 specimens, one with ova. Nassau, N. E.,: jan, » 56% "GO, (c) 3 specimens, fragmentary. Nassau, N. P., Jan. Io, ’go. Kingsley’s type specimens were from Key West; it has been reported by Herrick from Nassau, N. P. A. websteri is very probably the same as A. formosus Gibbs (Proc. Amer. Ass. Ad. Sci., p. 196, 1850). The descriptions apparently tally, though Gibbs makes no mention of the small black spine on the uropod which is mentioned as a character- istic feature by Kingsley and which is very evident in my speci- mens. 59. Alpheus nigro-spinatus n. sp. (Pl. xxx, Fig. 6). (2) Two specimens. Under coral and in pools between tides, New Providence. Carapace compressed. Rostrum short, acuminate, no longer than spines of ocular hoods; extended backwards as a ridge between the eyes, from each of which it is separated by a rounded depression. Spines of ocular hoods short, acuminate. The front of carapace is thus marked by three, nearly equal, small spines. Inner antenne: Basal segment of peduncle with small spine (stylocerite) ; second and third segments, no spines but scattered hairs ; second segment a little more than twice as long as the terminal ; outer flagellum stouter and shorter than the inner. Outer antenne: Outer angle of the basal joint of peduncle with a sharp, short spine ; scaphocerite broad at base, outer margin produced into a strong spine which is longer than the inner, lamellar portion ; distal end of terminal segment of 250 RANKIN. peduncle reaches to tip of scaphocerite. Third pair of maxilli- pedes reach about to the end of shorter flagellum of inner an- tennz ; strongly tufted with hair. First pair of pereiopods: Larger hand much inflated, a slight, but distinct constriction on the upper margin near the articulation of the dactylus, and a deep constriction on the lower margin. Thumb contorted; a groove on the outer margin, the inner surface thickly covered with hairs and punc- tate. Dactylus contorted; extends slightly beyond thumb ; inner surface with tufts of hair. Small hand (which on the one specimen is left, the other right) has a longer and more slender dactylus and thumb. Length of large hand 16 mm. ; breadth 6.5mm. Length of small hand gmm.; breadth 4 mm. Second pair of pereiopods: Carpus five-jointed, proximal segment the longest, slightly longer than the second and third together; second and fifth segments each a little longer than one-half the length of first ; third and fourth the shortest, subequal. Posterior pereiopods; meros without spines. Tel- son broadly triangular; extremity truncate; two small spines on either side of median line of dorsal surface ; the outer ramus of uropod bears on its external distal angle a large, very black spine, which is distinguished from the similar black spine of A. webstert Kingsley (I. c., p. 416, 1879) by its much larger size and consequently more prominent appearance. Length of specimens 25 mm. and 22 mm. respectively. 60. Alpheus minor Say. Say,. Jour, Acad. Nat. Ser. *Philesbypeds moma: Kingsley, Bull. U: S. Geol.-Survey, PV; p90, 2375. Bate, Challenger, Macrura, p. 558, Pl. C, 1888. (a) numerous specimens, from brown sponges. (6) 1 9 with ova. | Along shore near Nassau, N. P., Febr. 20; 00. (c) 10 specimens, from brown sponges. Range :-- Prom/;Gape Hatteras: (U> Si eG re rees)) stoma Paul’s Rock (Bate, Challenger). Both shores of Central America. Collected at Jamaica, New Providence. BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 201 Lot (c) may possibly be a variety as the thumb is shorter than the typical szzzor, but otherwise there seems to be no difference. 61. Alpheus saulcyi Guerin. Guerin, in Hist. du Cuba, 1857. Herrick, Memoires Nat. Acad. Sci., Vol. V, p. 381. (2) 5 specimens, from green sponges. Febr. ’go. (0) I specimen, near Nassau, Febr. 5, 90. (c) I specimen, ¢, from green sponge. (2) 1 specimen, from sponge, Mar. 1, ’9o. (¢) I specimen, from sponge, Mar. 1, go. (/) 2 specimens, Nassau, N. P., Jan., ’9o. Range: West Indies. Found at Nassau, Martinique. 62. Athanas ortmanni n. sp. (PI. xxx, Fig. 7). (2) I specimen. Along shore, near Nassau, N. P., Febr. 20; "QO. Rostrum slender and pointed, reaching a little beyond the second joint of peduncle of inner antenne. Antero-lateral margin of carapace extends obliquely backward, prolonged in front of eye into minute spine. Eye-stalk short, not project- ing beyond carapace. The eye is seen through the somewhat transparent carapace as in A/pheus. Inner antenne, with stylo- cerite reaching to distal end of second segment of peduncle. From the peduncle arise two flagella of nearly equal length, the upper somewhat more slender than the lower, bearing on the fourth segment from base a minute, subsidiary flagellum. Outer antennz with scaphocerite nearly as long as the pedun- cles of inner antenne, broad and fringed with hairs. Third pair of maxillipedes reach slightly beyond the distal end of scaphocerite. First pair of pereiopods: That on the right side is robust with swollen chela, terminating in slender hooked fingers which are minutely serrated on the opposing edges. Mar- gin of chela entire, length 5 mm., breadth 2.5 mm. Carpus 252 RANKIN. short. Distal end of meros reaches to extremity of third pair maxillipedes. Left chelapod lacking. Second pair of pereiopods slender, with very small chele. Carpus five-jointed; proximal segment equal in length to the four distal segments. Remaining three pairs of perieopods similar to each other and equal in length to the second pair. Pleopods narrow and biramous. Telson narrow and compressed, with smooth margins. Uropods slightly longer than telson. Total length of specimen 16 mm. The species above described agrees generically with Athanas Leach (Edin. Ency., VIII, p. 432), with the exception that the eyes are entirely covered by the carapace. I propose, rather than found a new genus on the single specimen, to amend Leach’s definition of A¢thanas by changing the statement, ‘‘ Opthalmopoda short, scarcely reaching beyond frontal margin of carapace ”’ (Bate, Challenger, Macrura, p. 528), to ophthalmopoda short, covered by, or scarcely reaching beyond the frontal margin of Car apace. There are four hitherto described species of Athanas : A. nitiscens Leach. England and Norway, Mediterranean to Cape Verde Islands. A. veloculus Bate (1. c., p. 529). Cape Verde Islands. A. mascarenicus Richters (Beitrage zur Meeresfauna von Mauritius u. d. Seychellen, p. 164, 1880), Mauritius. A. dimorphus Ortmann, Crust. in Semon’s Forschungsreise (Jena. Denks., VIII, 1894, p.12). East Africa: Dar-es-Salaam. From all these species A. ortmanni may be distinguished at a glance by the form of the large chela. PENIDEA. Family Peneide Bate. 63. Penzeus constrictus Stimpson. Stimpson, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist: aaiay., p. 145, 1271: Miers, Notes on the Penzidz, Proc. Zool. Soc., London, p. 308, 1878. BAHAMA CRUSTACEA. 253 (2) 1%. Near Nassau, N. P., Febr. 1, 1890. (6) 29. Nessa NoPy Pebr..5,.’oe Range: East Coast U. S. Not before reported from West Indies. Collected by Stimpson at Beaufort, and Charleston, S. C. STOMATOPODA. Family Squillide Latreille. 64. Pseudosquilla ciliata Miers. hers, Ann: atid Map. Nat. Hist:"(5),7V, p: 108, Pit, 1880. ¢ Brooks, Challenger, Stomatopoda, p. 53, 1886. (2) 1% broken. Near Nassau, N. P., Febr., 1890. Range: Widely distributed over Atlantic and Pacific. Collected at Cuba, Bahamas, St. Thomas. 65. Gonodactylus oerstedii Hansen. Hansen, Isopoden, Cumaceen und Stomatopoden der Plankton expedition, 1895. (2) 1 9. Nassau, N. -Pigiiebr. 5, ’90. (6) 1 9, fragmentary. Quarantine station, near New Provi- dence, Jan. 25, ’90. (c) 1 @. Along shore near Nassau, N. P., Febr. 20, ’go. fe) 1 9. Nassau. N. -P., tape oo. (e)1 6,19, 1 fragmentary. Under coral and in pools between tides, near Nassau, N. P. by) ice. (label erased). (g) 2juv. Dredged in about 16 ft. near Quarantine station, Jan., ’90. Hansen, |. c. supra, p. 65 (and footnote), calls the West Indian Gonodactylus : G. oerstedi n. sp. and retains the name G. chiragra Fabr. for the East Indian form. He says (footnote): ‘‘This species (oerstediz) may be dis- tinguished from the East Indian form, G. chivagra Fabr., espe- cially by the character, that it possesses a small keel inside of 254 RANKIN. and ‘close to, the keel that ends in the sublateral process of the posterior margin, while such a secondary keel is wanting in the Indo-Australian species.”’ Collected at Bahamas, Cuba, Jamaica, St. Thomas. CIRRIPEDEA Family Lepadide Darwin. 66. Lithotrya dorsalis Sowerby. Sowerby, Genera of Shells, Apr., 1822. Darwin, A Monograph of the Cirripedia, p. 351, Pl. VIII, 1851. (az) 10 specimens. Salt Cay, N. P., in rocks in surf, Jan. 28, "90. . (6) 8 specimen. Salt Cay, Nassau, N. P., ocean side, Febr. 6, 1890. Range: West Indies, Venezuela, Honduras. Collected at Barbadoes. Family Balanide Darwin. 67. Acasta cyathus Darwin. Darwin, A Monograph of the Cirripedia-Balanide, p. 312, Pix 1854: (a) 4 specimens, in sponge, dredged Jan. 22, ’go. (7) 2 specimens, near Nassau; IN. P_ ebm, “ge: Range: Madeira, West Indies (Darwin). {SOPODA: Two species of Isopoda, one probably a Lygza of which there are several specimens. Another parasitic on a fish, probably one of the Czvolanide. AMPHIPODA. Several small amphipods undetermined. PRINCETON UNIVERSITY, April, 1898. PEATE ee PLATE XXX Fig. 1. Stenopus hispidus (Latrei.ie) Fig. 2. Stenopus semilevis, Von Martens Fig. 3. Stenopus scutellatus n. sp., Rankin (256 ) PAGE, 240 241 242 od; N. Y PLATE : pesssce syn We coos om Nios 4, fy iT i ua ey SX > aa yy Reber, cel. DMtadse oh er ane ol RWeber, del. ese SEE oooh peer se LE R.Weber, del. bel P< onl Fig. 6. hig. <7. PLATE XXX. Leander northropi n. sp., Rankin Alpheus hippothoe Dre Man var. bahamensis n. var., RANKIN Alpheus nigro-spinatus n. sp., RANKIN Athanas ortmanni n. sp., RANKIN ( 258 ) PAGE. 245 247 249 251 ANNALS, N. R. ACAD. SCI., XI. PLATE XXX. SS 1th ff a Seen Ge ; Cg Ue S- Ski ee pe i iets ue oy, 7 Wal ios . — mc = SEER SOUGHT ete (2) 0 tyr Meee fret ha i ay ae ’ j rs mp, 4 ak i? As an j . ma ; ans y ae ae : Ms in ~~: ed - ga ’ a aie * = . ; “ h 2 of Fi Re cpa 7 + ¥ , - wy ‘ ° Pome haben ante. 3 y a ry > . Ir, Oke ales Sein 3) uty yee oe eee %: , Mia hd eee cee YS Ree Eth ATTN. OF TPE esas ies wife eae The oa Jt galjatc gmhtte a , Pet Dakin epldee “Eo z anh ad » eS ae eae ea cds 30d at exe: ths tee > DEVE ay Mure xh asnwaines = “e- > ys jan t=, i Balatiehing @ ehh ray 4 high eteie, 3 oy aft ache! SxS oe * : valved ; Fi a eres BLnicees stor PA ops = oi ; sa A Je faut df Bens “at ers ee pat a $I moe! i o Q ; +s . 4 z . a a 2 fa Cre em ' . Gin oy Lamy 3 leone ve 33 0 tas rs , ; oe . x4 4 = Pes g is y Go he rvs AS by ores ap” Pie S pene Rcrlacae Loe a . } , - oe A ae ree ete teh ht west es tet ~ ae oa VA AUMLMT 2; =) dd eee to whi Tose 1 e cgay ye £¢ no oes ag LB VA . ~~ = ; ; > 2° iy er 2 7 > 7° * < ioe y ae : 2 x) IFO ae roe iy ye f . pas 2 ee ots Z., “XXX V5 6687 Pi SOC ear and reproduced by Giard and Bonnier (Bopyriens, pp. 77-8), we learn that that species agrees with our form in the presence of rudimentary maxillipeds in the male, though these rudiments are very much smaller in Kossmann’s species than in ours. Moreover, rudiments of the first maxillz, which we have not found, are figured as present in that species. In Pseudione Hyndmanni (Bate & Westwood), described in the British Sessile-eyed Crustacea (p. 243), as Phryxus Hyndmanut, from Lupagurus bernhardus (L.), the general features of the fe- male appear to approximate very closely to our species. The pleural lamellae of the abdomen, however, appear to be rounded instead of pointed, and those of the last segment are shorter and broader. The pleopods are smaller and less unsymmetrical. In Pseudione confusa (Norman), from Galathea dispersa Bate, described in the above mentioned work (p. 249) as Phryxus galathee, the brief description and imperfect figures of the fe- PUGET: SOUND .CRUSTACEA. 281 male offer no marked distinction from the present species. In the male, however, the abdomen tapers much less rapidly and the last segment is twice as broad as long. The thoracic seg- ments are somewhat more expanded laterally, and the last thoracic is considerably wider than the first abdominal segment. It is stated that ‘‘the small conical mouth appears to be pro- tected on each side by a minute 2-jointed foot jaw,” but it does not seem probable that the appendages figured are really the maxillipeds. While the few details available in the case of these species render it impossible to enumerate the characters which distin- guish Pseudione Giardi from the other members of the genus, it appears to be most closely allied to P. Hyndmanni, as was, indeed, to be expected from the nature of its host. Its precise specific delimitation can only be effected when we are in pos- session of fuller information with regard to the last named and other species. I have recently received by the kindness of the author a copy of Dr. Hansen’s beautiful’ memoir on the Isopoda of the ‘‘ Al- batross’”’ expedition (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., XX XI, 5, 1897), in which he describes and figures Pseudione galacanthe from the deep-sea galatheid Galacantha diomedee. In spite of the very different host and habitat the new species appears to differ only in trivial characters from our own. Dr. Hansen however recognizes a rudiment of the first maxilla in both sexes where we have only been able to see the membranous interspace be- tween the mandible and the labrum. Argeia sp. Two specimens on Crangon affinis, De Haan. Both speci- mens were in very bad condition, having been apparently al- lowed to dry, and nothing could be made out of their structure. Relying, however, on the principle of MM. Giard and Bonnier, that no species of the Aficaridea infests more than one species of host, we may conjecture that these represent a new species of Argeia in addition to the two already known from the west coast of America; A. pugettensis, Dana, on Sclerocrangon munitus and A. pauperata, Stimpson, on Crangon franciscorum. 282 CALMAN. Phyllodurus abdominalis Stimpson. P. abdommats Stimpson, Boston Jour’ Nat. Hist. 115 rr. 1857. Of this interesting and imperfectly known form a large series of both sexes and different stages of growth was obtained. These it is proposed to describe in detail in a later paper. It may be mentioned that the male of this species was recorded and briefly described by Lockington in 1876, in a paper whose title affords no clue to this part of its contents (‘‘ Descr. of a new gen. and sp. of Decapod Crustacean,” Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. (1876), 1877, p. 57). LIGIIDA. Ligia Pallasii Brandt. . Ligia FPatllasii Brandt, Conspectus Monogr. Crust. Oniscid. Bull. Soc. Inip: Nat:, WMescou; Wil 171) 1643: | Lygia dilatata Stimpson, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist., VI, 507, Pl. KM Or ve LOS 7. LTigia Sitmpsont: Miers, Proc: Zool. Soc: Lond, 18775. 672. Ligia Pallasn Budde-Lund, Isop. Terr., 261. | 1885. Of the species described in Budde-Lund’s Monograph our specimens approach most closely in the proportions of the uro- pods to ZL. fallasu Br., from which they difier only im the much narrower body. Stimpson, however, mentions that the relative width of the body is subject to great variation. The L. septentrionats of Lockington (Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. (1876), 1877, p. 46), a species not mentioned by Budde-Lund, agrees with our specimens so far as the short description goes, but its distinctness from L. Pallasit does not appear to be beyond doubt. The dimensions of our two specimens are as follows : Length. Breadth. Antenna. Uropods. 3u 16 16 4.5 mm. 21 fe) 12.5 4 mm. PUGET SOUND CRUSTACEA. 283 RHIZOCEPHALA. Sylon sp. A single specimen of a Rhizocephalan, probably referable to this genus, was in the collections sent me, and I understand that further specimens were obtained. In Messrs. Harrington and Griffin's paper on the Puget Sound Invertebrates (Trans. Puey. fecad. Sci., 1897, p. 164) a“ Saccuttna” is recorded as occurring on Sclerocrangon munitus (Dana). From a sketch kindly sent me by Mr. Harrington I gather that a specimen occurred on a Pandalus Dane Stimpson. In the specimen sent to me, only the abdomen of the host is preserved and this is certainly not that of a Pandalus nor of a Sclerocrangon, but ap- parently belongs to some species of //zppolyte. The parasite is attached as usual to the under surface of the third abdominal segment of its host. It has an ellipsoid shape, the longest axis lying nearly parallel to the longitudinal axis of the host’s body and measuring about 4 mm. _ Transversely to the body of the host the parasite has a diameter of 3.4 mm. and its vertical depth is 3 mm. The base of attachment is about 2 mm. in diameter and somewhat nearer the posterior pole. The genital openings could not be detected (Hoek states, in his ap- pendix to the Challenger Report on the MJacrura, p. 923, that these openings are closed in young specimens), nor was any trace of the mesenteric line visible. The branched “roots” are easily visible inside the body of the host. Hoek states (Ib., p. 924) that in Sy/on, contrary to what obtains in Sacculina, the roots do not reach the intestine of the host, but are, for the most part, confined to the space between the ventral muscles of the abdomen and the integument. In our specimen, however, the roots penetrate further into the body and form a plexus sur- rounding the intestine. 284 CALMAN. APPENDIX. Since the above paper was written I have received from Mr. N. R. Harrington a few Crustacea which had been overlooked in sorting out the Puget Sound material. Among them is a specimen of a small Slerocrangon closely resembling but apparently distinct from .S. muricus (Dana). I believe it to be identical with a species to be described by Mr. A. O. Walker in a forthcoming paper in the Proc. Biol. Soc. Liverpool, and of which Mr. Walker has been good enough to send me a sketch. His specimens were dredged in Puget Sound by Pro- fessor Herdman, of Liverpool. The collection sent me also includes a second specimen of Sylon, attached to a Aizppolyte brevirostris Dana. UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, DUNDEE, SCOTLAND. PEALE XXL PLATE XXXI. Fig. 1. Orchestoidea californiana (Brandt). Male. REFERENCE LETTERS. ant'.—Antennules. ant’’.—Antenne. as.—Anal style. bucc.—Mouth parts. ceph.—Under surface of head. emb.—Embryo. en.—Endopodite. ex.—Exopodite. ga’, gn" .—Gnathopods. /.—Labium. fa.—‘* Limbe antérieur.’’ p.—‘* Limbe postérieur.”’ /or.—Labrum. m.—Mandible. mp.—Maxilliped. mx’, mx" .—Maxille. ?’; p; etc.—Pereiopods. pl. —Abdomen. pl’, p/*'.—Pleural lamellez. plp.—Pleopod. up.—Uropod. ur.—Urosome. ¢.—Telson. I, 11, ITf, 7V.—Mouth parts of embryo (see text). ( 286 ) PLATE XXXII. > we ¥, ACADZSEE ANNALS N. 1mp W. T. C. ad nat. del. = P< a P< = << mel Ao PLATE XXXII. e Fig. 2. Polycharia Osborni n. sp. Female. Fig. 3. Madera dubia n. sp. REFERENCE LETTERS. ant’.—Antennules. ant” .—Antenne. as.—Anal style. bucc.—Mouth parts. ceph.—Under surface of head. emb.—Embryo. en.—Endopodite. ex.—Exopodite. gn’, gn” .—Gnathopods. /.—Labium. /a.—‘‘ Limbe antérieur.’’ /p.—** Limbe posterieur.’’ loy.—Labrum. m.—Mandible. mp.—Maxilliped. mx', mx" .—Maxille. p', p’; etc.—Pereiopods. pl.—Abdomen. pl", pi*'.—Pleural lamellee. plp.—Pleopod. uwp.—Uropod. ur.—Urosome. z.—Telson. I, 11, 117, TV.—Mouth parts of embryo (see text). ( 288 ) ANNALS N WT. C. ad net. del, . ¥: ACADESEL. ms PLATE XXXII. Qgn ee eis was PEATE XOOCiae Fig. 4.. Amphithoe humeralis Stimpson. REFERENCE LETTERS. ant'.—Antennules. ant” .—Antenne. as.—Anal style. bucc.—Mouth parts. ceph.—Under surface of head. emb.—Embryo. en.—Endopodite. ex.—Exopodite. gu’, gn” .—Gnathopods. 7.—Labium. /a.—‘* Limbe anteérieur.’’ /p.—‘* Limbe postérieur.’’ Joy.—Labrum. m.—Mandible. mp.—Maxilliped. mx’, mx'’.—Maxille. p', Pp’, etc.—Pereiopods. pl.—Abdomen. ° pl", pl’. —Pleural lamelle. plp.—Pleopod. wp.—Uropod. wr.—Urosome. ¢.—Telson. l, Il, [1l, [V.—Mouth parts of embryo (see text). (290 ) PLATE XXXIII. XL. ¥. ACAD: Ser, ANNALS N. Ss W. T. e ad nat. del. > 4 ‘ a > 4 . 7 PLATE XXXIV. PLATE XXXIV. Fig. 5. Pseudione Giardi n. sp. REFERENCE LETTERS. ant’.—Antennules. ant” .—Antenne. as.—Anal style. b6ucc.—Mouth parts. ceph.—Under surface of head. emb.—Embryo. en.—Endopodite. ex.—Exopodite. gn’, gn'’.—Gnathopods. /.—Labium. /a.—‘‘ Limbe antérieur.’’ Jp.—‘* Limbe postérieur.’’ /obr.—Labrum. m.—Mandible. mp. — Maxilliped. mx', mx" .—Maxille. p’', 2, etc.—Pereiopods. pl.—Abdomen. pl", pi*'.—Pleural lamelle. plp.—Pleopod. up.—Uropod. ur. —Urosome. 7.—Telson. I, Ll, [11, 1V.—Mouth parts of embryo (see text). ( 292 ) ANNALS N.Y. ACAD. SCI. XI. PLATE XXXIV. 5 Sbuce W. T. C. ad nat. del. yy 24 eee ) ' r a ’ +s et : : res A ga - bes - fe ; . 7 “te op aad > >. - : ae | a no ee | 2. ar a ay OR. _ ee a hte og —_ a i, bp ~ os 2 7 o wmab eae mare | Pate ee — we > ae _ [Annas N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI., No. 14, pp. 293 to 368, September 12, 1898. ] Pe iy SLOLOGM OF SECRETION. ALBERT MATHEWS. (Read April 11, 1898.) I. INTRODUCTION : PAGE. Manica ofthe secretory herve theory. -....2 %.. 9. en cae Wee ct a. Nor: et Chorda stimulated for several minutes, then .5 cc. of saturated solution of qui- nine sulphate injected slowly into Wharton’s duct. oe é. 13 fo) 12 38 2's hae 42 3! 0 IZ 39. aS el eee aoa o> EN ek re iethn 5:5 iba 50 I2 40 1S II < 27 12 44 ao rs. 12 12 45 SSrs es ee a ei I5. 9 WT Me lg Et a i ane a jt AIS Merce sar . oO EO TAR ee oleae a na ae eee ey es Pe Ng Oe 5 ole el aad Re Ae ena, poke Be Ce See 1.4 Ok a a aN Ske he a Pe ae ee a ge Bip a aseder a. a to ae eats Cea ai uE Sh ct Ceres et Wa rele od LAY ys Ce fa, ee Te Se Sy pe ae ee ee ee ee Ses ee tas vag Cet an ee Tee a fe lae- sete wr pl LO ns a phd eeaany REE SO oa ig? Se des. Inject mixture equal parts 0.6% NaCl and sat. quinine sulphate. UC ce ec oe S Pr. 24 YOR cc iwhie oh ap tet: s ee 4 I 09. s 12 fo) Roa ae J oe We Se te Ee ar 9 I CORES se hw oes Se ae ce eee erie Io Oo ACO ge ai yavuay 2) 2 nce ee eee ee: ee ee nv, 2 i ee eee are eer ere a et API re fe) Inject 0.5 % NaCl into duct. Ae Qe.” %, te) oi vetisbe Or, ene a Reyne 2 a - RIGA i= ae oe eee ee tN Gree tte. 894 . 14 BOG Fe aise Pa Serie ENS ee RE ee oe tla 3 4 09 Inject HCl 0.5% into duct. MO ie 5 OP en eS eae ceri ERAS, eas Te ca ty in a Chorda ineffective at any strength. In the foregoing experiment the chorda became completely ineffective at 12:30. The gland, however, was abnormally full of quinine fluid, and the first sympathetic stimulation after the 316 MATHEWS. injection consequently gave a greatly augmented secretion at - 12:39. Thereafter each stimulation yielded less and less, and finally at 12:59 only 3 mm. were secreted. The ducts may be assumed to be practically empty. Quinine solution was now again injected, and the next sympathetic stimulation yielded again a greatly augmented secretion. Finally at 1:11 the sym- pathetic failed to yield any secretion, and from then until 4 P.M. was totally ineffective. It would be said, at first sight, that the nerve was paralyzed. Such, however, was not the case, its seeming paralysis being due to the emptiness of the gland. This was shown by the injection of .5 % NaCl solution into the duct. The following stimulation of the sympathetic at 4:02 yielded a very large secretion. This experiment in two ways furnishes very strong evidence of the muscular nature of the sympathetic secretion. The fact that sympathetic secretion may be obtained long after paralysis of the chorda is very suggestive. Heidenhain* maintains that the chorda secretion is paralyzed by the action of the drug on the gland cells. ' If this be true, and I see no feason to doubt it, it furnishes very strong evidence that the sympathetic pro- duces its secretion in some other manner than action on the gland cell, for the sympathetic secretion is not materially affected long after the gland cells have been completely paralyzed. The fact that the nerve’s effect soon passes away, but may be restored by the simple injection of more quinine solution or other fluid into the duct, I believe to be susceptible of but one explanation, ?. ¢., that the nerve causes this secretion by compression of the ducts and alveoli. A similar phenomenon is witnessed if the gland artery be compressed and fluid thus cut off from the gland. A few stimu- lations of the sympathetic suffice to render the nerve inoperative, but by injection of fluid into the duct the nerve is shown to be still active. * Heidenhain, Studien aus Breslau, IV, 1868, p. 85, ‘‘so wird die Erregbarkeit der absondernden Elemente bald herabgesetzt und nach kurzer Zeit ganz vernichtet.”’ SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 317 Experiment Va (Continued; see p. 305). TIME. NERVE. SECRETION IN MM. fat. 5. SS a ee Artery clamped close by the hilus. Sag mer aw, EEE SOUS bier Rll ee ae fe) Bee. at he ty SIPC ICE es we oe es 23 BRR ac W tik es Mec e rey git | cc: oy aan oe oe a rr fe) BeAOn Ce ee a 5 SV MpAt MIE Hae wit ie as 5 oad). fe) 0.2 cc., .5 % NaCl solution injected into duct. = a ie ea rr SYMIpRHIGHG ye ht ok se or oa A A Dien Sartre os Ve) 2 oe Artery unclamped ADT? SOi he us Artery clamped | Be G4 nT oe ates gr 3 BAS ToT Ro Oe Oe me Oa a O AREY si id sy Syimparmetcr £500 5, 5. ee a ames 25 OES OE ty NO ee as S10 a ee Os aN ee fe) A MeO tk Lh) Supa WeMe..! G2. ee eas 14 AAO Pe val atch a.) 5 Syiipactene. 9) 9 rl 2 ae a O Bee as ~ 4 €t.,.5 9, NaCl injected into duct 1 Ng At Ser a ee Sympathetic. . .. Seared | 0.) a) a er PSRINPACMCIC ly eee. See fe) eer A ager.) Pe omminatnene . sy.) ke 8 2k eG O ee a a a ae 2 ct. > hi, acl injected Ae eOee wes! Se Pymipatetie.n” Gite (28s ox.Soe tw 8 In this experiment the sympathetic appeared paralyzed at 3:40, 4:20 and 4:26, but the injection of normal salt solution into the duct was followed by a secretion little less than normal, on the next stimulation. In one case twenty minutes after the artery had been clamped, the sympathetic was thus shown still to be active. Heidenhain attributes the loss of the chorda’s power to the suffocation and consequent paralysis of the gland cell. (See footnote, p. 308.) As already pointed out (p. 316) this would, if true, show that the sympathetic produces its secretion in some other way than by action on the cell. The fact that the nerve’s power may be restored by the injection of innocuous fluid into the ducts is readily explicable on the muscular theory of secretion, but, with difficulty, on the cellular theory. I found that a similar phenomenon may, at times, be seen in the cat’s submaxillary, which has been paralyzed by just suffi- cient atropin to prevent chorda secretion. As was first pointed out by Langley, atropin paralyzes the sympathetic in the cat, but more atropin is required than to paralyze the chorda. The 318 MATITEWS. sympathetic may appear paralyzed, wholly or in part, before it actually is. In this condition gently forcing the secreted saliva back into the gland restores the nerve’s power. Experiment XII. Cat etherized. Canula in duct of left submaxillary. Both chorda and cervical sympathetic cut. Both nerves active. In- ject .1% solution of atropin carefully into femoral vein until chorda just paralyzed. Sympathetic stimulated 30 seconds each time. TIME. NERVE. SECRETION IN CC. h, m. s. 2 50 Chorda O. 2°55 Sympathetic cca Qa52 ee Q. oT ees) : 6. I 3 4 : 0.05 3°55 i 0.05 3 56 os 0.03 Blew the secretion gently back into gland. 3°57 Sympathetic 0.13 4 00 oe 0.15 4 06 Inject .I cc. atropin into femoral vein. A OF Sympathetic 0.10 4 08 oc 0.10 4 09 be 0.10 4 MO Lee Sd | sympathetic ..% 26755 4s od (kD Inject .2 cc. atropin A AL Qe ha get, oe ae Syiipathietic — <24 1k ee pee 07 ALAS een eens Sao Nou eek is eae OREO ag eagle ee Uae we eee Cm or WED ate gg Dt ee Oe ee eee 03 Blew saliva into gland. Oe a ar ee . Syiipathetue's. 2 4a eee 25 AT ecses Sat yale: 6. BS iclene Gh ie, va, wen eae 505 2 cee ss renee te oe pea eg ke eg 04 Pgs Ce RA ees gree 3 ee tes Ee eed Le ee as ie 02 Blew .I cc. saliva back into gland. Ai DE Pee eas Sytipathetic... 4.45. 2 a) pets 12 ZN SP NSS PC a eRe oe Tp! S)y@ pty iat ee te She eee een 04 AZ 2igs esta coh Mental Noten aes Seine ects. Ye. oi ta dh eae ae ete 03 Blew .1 cc. saliva back into gland. SECRETION’ PHYSIOLOG Y. 319 Ea ek Symipetiee 3s 6 ee 14 Pais 7 A ae ee aa Tee oe DS et ar a ae . -O2 BEG eg A Mac a ae ee one ek we ea ie ae 04 REE wig alte e=.3 ae gia DS, Let! GA seas, Iie aa 02 Blew .1 cc. saliva back into gland. (ef ae ae ee .\, Syiipathetie fy ey Ge eS re. lat. ide AS hygeine = BOs Wal oe <9 * ee -O8 EL vetoes “ayers, Ye 757.8 pede ee Se eck ee ni a 06 See Oma gi ete isla! o's ee wit So ee PPPS he ip si ver OZ Ae ee we ag ee (ee ea eR ete cee Oe as OF Blew .I cc. saliva back into gland. eee ss Soins oo SyMpathegedt: | iis seas +) a0 I aS ae ee ae a as Dae es Mea apg es Bg aie 108 AA Tae suite (tsi s,s f0! feo ene ae ei pe Se eee 05 be a a er ae Fae 04 sir ea ee Pe tad ht 03 Blew back .1 cc. saliva. Bea meets. Wao in £ Soymepaimetic. 2 oc) LF Yr ok RS Sebo Wap Na era Ee ites eat ted oc Pe aes aes 04 PASOV Cote ba. ee a! aye “a ol oe aed a eae nowt 04 AOE PASS. s yd? oe (Ka ue 03 Blew back .1 cc. saliva. eres eect. . oympatieney 5. Ses a OP ETERS. 5 Se cO Lap aR i oh coh Rr lel mar Baan ve » +09 Merb glia, bape oh its Sao eas eee Vrs a ha ee eae ee 04 Cle orgs ar ae MR oat oe Were aimee ee cae JOR Blew back .I cc. Saliva. fc a Si Sf) ee 1 Lot | A a re 10 Att Sea RR aR ae Cd Na Ae a tae ee 7.2. 205 4 48 . - ee ae eee ee eee 03 PRON Ae Stet eer vat ph ces =e O04 ALISO. aia atten ares) ne a Se Meta: Sk ois dit Mase Apis 02 Blew back .1I cc. saliva. BBE Ss OS lack ae Sywiputhetic. -. 24 6: A prans mar | | A lnk. 5 Ala Bathe aS ae BARRO saw el » «2 NALS a Se ae ai eS 3 etna oPk MeSas Pelecge ote AL |g an 04 (NRL: Als Se Dae cae Me cnien Be Wen ti mene! Praees ge ce cers 025 Blew back .I cc 15) a ay A epee ea i Re A etd! TN Rene aia ee 075 OS ee arenes ae Dae: FAD ALO Hs 025 SS Ee I a Re Re ee ROE tee Veet yee 04 &c The most probable explanation of the apparent failure, partial or total of the sympathetic, in all the immediately preceding experiments, appears to me to be this: That by the injection of 320 MATHEWS. quinine, or atropin, or compression of the gland’s artery, liquid is prevented from entering the gland. A few stimulations of the sympathetic suffice to expell all, or most, of the available saliva in the gland, and the nerve thereafter appears paralyzed. If, now, the ducts and alveoli be passively redistended by the injection of liquid into the duct the nerve again causes a compression of the duct, and the fluid is again expelled and gives a secretion. This renewed secretion cannot, however, be re- ferred to the action of the gland cell, because the latter has been in one case paralyzed by the action of quinine, and in the other case by suffocation. Nor could it be referred to the action of the cell, even were the latter not paralyzed, for the. mere hypo- thetical taking-up of fluid into the cell from the duct, and its discharge again into the latter, would in no way alter the bulk of fluid in the ducts plus the bulk of the cell. There would, hence, be no pressure to drive the secretion from the gland. e. THE CHARACTER OF SYMPATHETIC SALIVA. Evidence that the sympathetic nerve innervates the gland cell has been derived from the character of the sympathetic saliva. This, as is well known, is richer in organic matters than the saliva secreted under the influence of the gland’s dilator nerve. This greater richness Heidenhain attributes to the predominance in this nerve of so-called “trophic’’ fibres, the function of which is to render the stored-up metabolic products of the cell (hylo- gens) more soluble, and the juice consequently more concen- trated. This assumption involves such consequences that by common consent it has been considered the most unsatisfactory part of the Heidenhain theory. It is, however, practically the only probable explanation, with one exception, which has been offered. The exception is the view suggested by Schiff, dis- cussed below. If the sympathetic simply drives out the saliva already present in the gland the sympathetic saliva must be of the character of that present in the ducts and alveoli at the moment of stimulation. There is evidence that this is the case. That the saliva in the ducts of the dog’s parotid is very viscid has been shown by SECRETION FA YSIOLOG Y. 321 Langley.” Sections show the ducts plugged with a viscous looking mass, and Langley suggests that the saliva is here too thick to be expelled. In one experiment Langley found a dog’s parotid which secreted under the influence of the sympathetic 1.3 cc. Concerning this saliva Langley says :* “The saliva was of the most remarkable nature ; it formed a thick jelly-like mass; if allowed to collect at all in the canula it could be drawn out as a continuous clot. During the experi- ment the duct was frequently emptied by pressure to prevent its being stopped up.’ The saliva contained 7.8 % of organic solids. We can, moreover, artificially alter the fluidity of the saliva in the ducts, rendering it more dilute, by the action of the chorda tympani or pilocarpine. In such cases, as we have seen in speaking of the augmented secretion, sympathetic saliva is almost as thin as chorda saliva. By long stimulation of the chorda, moreover, we may exhaust the soluble constituents of the gland. In such cases it may be presumed that the gland saliva is thinner than normal. It is known that under such cir- cumstances the sympathetic saliva may fall within the limits of density of chorda saliva.* A similar change occurs in paralytic secretions following division of the chorda. The gland then secretes a very thin saliva, and sections show the cells practic- ally exhausted of their mucous. The sympathetic in these causes a very abundant and very watery secretion. We may obtain still further evidence of the character of the saliva normally present in the ducts of the resting gland by a sudden, strong stimulation of the chorda tympani. The rapid inflow of fluid from the capillaries about the alveoli, taking place under the influence of that nerve, drives out the saliva in the ducts before it has time to become diluted. If we examine this saliva first appearing on chorda stimulation we find it in all re- spects typical sympathetic saliva. From this Schiff concludedt that sympathetic saliva was nothing more than the saliva nor- mally present in the ducts, formed during glandular rest. * Heidenhain, Studien aus Breslau, 1V, 1868. After long sympathetic stimula- tions the saliva becomes ‘‘ diinnflussig, hell, und dadurch dem chorda Speichel ganz und gar ahnlich,’’ ft Schiff. Legons sur la Digestion. Tome I., p. 296, 1867; also p. 304. 322 MATHEWS. Schiff found that if the sympathetic nerve of the horse be stimulated the parotid secreted quickly 8-10 volumes of white saliva, and then, as in the cat’s submaxillary, secretion ceased. If the horse be fed there ensued a copious, clear secretion of watery cerebral saliva. The gland was now, presumably, full of such saliva. If it be allowed to rest for twenty min- utes without secretion on again feeding the horse the first saliva (8-10 volumes) was typical, thick, white sympathetic saliva. This was followed by the clear cerebral saliva. Schiff repeated this many times, thus showing that in the interval of rest the gland, uninfluenced by the sympathetic, converts the clear cerebral saliva into typical so-called sympathetic saliva. A sim- ilar phenomenon has been described, with a somewhat different interpretation for the dog’s submaxillary, by Heidenhain.* I have repeated Schiff’s experiment on the dog’s submaxillary, fully confirming him. This is shown in the following exper- iment. Experiment XIII. Large dog, morphine and ether. At 10:30 A.M. canula in right Wharton’s duct. Sympathetic and chorda-lingual cut. On the first stimulation of the chorda the first saliva was viscid, whitish and filled with corpuscles. The chorda was stimu- lated until 2 cc. of saliva were secreted. This saliva was thin, clear, typical chorda saliva. Gland rested without secretion until 11:30. Stimulated chorda. The first saliva was thick, viscid, white saliva. The gland then secreted 1 cc., clear chorda saliva. Rested until 2:30 P.M. Stimulated the chorda. A very large amount of typical, sympathetic saliva appeared first, followed by 2 cc. of watery chorda saliva. Gland rested until 4 ?.M. Stimulated chorda. The first salva was viscid and contained many salivary corpuscles. Secreted afterward I cc. clear saliva. Rested until 5 p.m. “Stimulated the. chorda; The first saliva was again viscid, whitish saliva, filled with sah- vary corpuscles and lumps. * Heidenhain. Studien aus Breslau, 1V, 1868, p. 52. ‘‘Die erste Speichel por- tion war sehr dick, fast gallertartig, reich an Schleimballen wie sie sonst im Sympa- thicus Speichel vorkommen, und ebenso an Speichelkérperchen die haufenweise bei einander lagen.”’ SECRETION PHYSIOLOG Y. 323 This experiment proves that after each stimulation of the chorda, the thin, chorda saliva filling the gland ducts is quickly converted, even in the absence of sympathetic influence, into typical viscid, sympathetic saliva.* It shows, also, that the ducts of the normal, resting mucous gland are filled with saliva, sup- posed to be characteristic of the sympathetic’s action. This observation seems to me to render Heidenhain’s assumption of special “trophic’’ nerve fibres to account for the character of such saliva, superfluous; and, also, to give additional evidence that sympathetic saliva is nothing more than this “saliva of rest,” expelled by compression of ducts and alvecli. The cor- rectness of the latter view is, in my opinion, strongly confirmed by the great variation in character of sympathetic saliva, witha variation of character of the saliva within the gland. I wish to point out, also, that the influence of sympathetic stimulation upon the composition of the saliva secreted during coincident stimulation of the dilator nerve, upon which special stress has been laid by Heidenhain, is also readily understood on this hypothesis of the nature of sympathetic action. Langley’s discovery” that the sympathetic produces a secretion from the dog’s parotid unless the saliva be too thick for expulsion make Heidenhain’s results clear.” Heidenhain found, in harmony with all other observers, that stimulation of the sympathetic usually causes no secretion from the dog’s parotid. He concluded from this that the nerve carried no, or few, secretory fibres. He discovered, however, that if Jacobson’s nerve be irritated so as to cause a secretion, and during this irritation the sympathetic be stimulated, the saliva secreted during simultaneous irritation of both nerves was far richer in organic solids than that secreted under the influ- ence of Jacobson’s nerve alone.{ Denying that the sympathetic * This is a pretty conclusive reply to the statement of Heidenhain that the simple contact of the water with the hylogens is not sufficient to dissolve them We have here a demonstration that it is sufficient in the total absence of nerve in- fluence. { Heidenhain. MHermann’s Handbuch d. Phys. V, p. 55. ‘* Der Sympathicus des Hundes enthilt fiir die Parotis nur trophische, fiir die submaxillaris daneben wenige secretorische Fasern.’’ { Heidenhain, Hermann’s Handbuch d. Phys. V, p. 55. 324 MATHEWS. exerted a secretory effect upon the gland, he considered the secretion to be due to Jacobson’s nerve alone. He concluded, therefore, that stimulation of the sympathetic enormously in- creased the content of organic solids in the cerebral saliva. The sympathetic must hence act on the gland cells so as to render their contents far more soluble. From Langley’s results, how- ever, we can safely conclude that the saliva, secreted when both nerves are stimulated, is not pure cerebral saliva, but largely, if not wholly, augmented sympathetic saliva. Like all sympa- thetic saliva, it is more concentrated than the saliva secreted under the influence of the dilator nerve, because it is expelled without dilution. f. OTHER EVIDENCE OF THE MuscuLar NATURE OF THE MECHANISM OF SYMPATHETIC SECRETION. Very clear evidence, also, has been brought forward by Eck- hard,” von Wittich” and Heidenhain” himself that the sympa- thetic causes at least the major part of its secretion, by a com- pression of the ducts and alveoli. The parotid gland of the sheep is an albuminous gland, capable of secreting against a | pressure of 400-500 m. m. of water (Eckhard). If while secret- ing against a somewhat lower pressure (200-300 mm.) the cervical sympathetic be stimulated, the water rises suddenly in the manometer for some distance (30-100 mm.). Ox ceasing stimulation the secretion rushes back at once into the gland nearly, though never quite, torts former level. The higher the pressure the more sudden the flow backward. The quick rise at the beginning of stimulation and the abrupt back flow of the secretion at the end plainly suggest that the nerve caused compression of the ducts and alveoli, and thus pressed out the secretion. On ceasing stimulation these structures dilated, and the secfe- tion, being under pressure, rushed back into the gland. I see no other explanation for the back flow, as it takes place too suddenly and at too low a pressure (200 mm. water) to be due to back filtration. Heidenhain’s observation is less striking, but it is similar to SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. . 325 the above. (Breslau Studien, p. 69, 1V.) In taking the-secre- tory pressure of the dog’s submaxillary he stimulated the chorda until the pressure in the ducts was 271 mm. Hg. On ceasing stimulation the manometer gradually fell. On stimula- ting the sympathetic the sinking became much slower, and the ma- nometer remained stationary at 160 mm. On breaking the stimulation the manometer sank gradually to 100. On stimu- lating the sympathetic it rose to 107, and on chorda stimulation to 271. It gradually fell during following sympathetic stimula- tion, but on breaking the stimulation it fell with striking rapidity (Auftalig beschleunigtes Sinken). Heidenhain thus records for the dog’s submaxillary the same sudden back flow on breaking the stimulation of the sympathetic as Eckhard and von Wittich describe in the sheep. Paradoxical though it may seem, the experiments just quoted of von Wittich and Eckhard have been cited by Heidenhain as conclusive evidence that the sympathetic does not simply drive out the secretion already in the gland. And it is this con- viction which led Heidenhain, in the discussion of all experi- ments involving the sympathetic, to ignore the possibility of its having such an action. Heidenhain believed von Wittich was right in contending that the failure of the manometer to return to its former level on breaking stimulation proved that the amount of saliva in the gland had been increased. It will be instructive to consider von Wittich’s explanation of the phe- nomena of this secretion. von Wittich” suggests that the back flow of the saliva is due to the saliva being pushed back into the cells. Let us examine this more closely. von Wittich and Heidenhain assumed that the cells, on stimulation, discharge their stored products into the lumen. Such a process, it need hardly be said, would lead to no secretion from the ducts, as the bulk of the cell would diminish to just the extent that the bulk of fluid in the ducts increases. Hence the bulk of cell plus liquid would remain unaltered. We must, therefore, make either one of two farther assumptions: First, that the alveoli are greatly distended owing to the turgor of the cells. Stimulation of the nerve might conceivably diminish the resisting power of ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, September 13, 1898—zz2. 326 MATHEWS. the inner end of the cell, and the secretion be expelled from the cell by intra-cellular tension, and from the ducts by the elastic tension of the distended alveolar wall. Or, second, it must be assumed that, as the fluid flows from the cell, new fluid enters the cell from the rear, so that the cell does not diminish in bulk to an extent aqual to the bulk of secretion it has lost. Either of these assumptions lands us at once in difficulties. If the first be true we cannot understand why the sympathetic secretion should be abnormally large, just in those cases, such as par- alytic secretions, or after long-continued chorda secretion, in which the alveoli are not distended and are not presumably under pressure. The second assumption, besides being wholly imaginary, has to explain whence comes the fluid flowing into the cell, and why it should flow in during sympathetic stimu- lation at a time when there is a pronounced vaso-constriction. With this difficulty of understanding how the nerve could cause a secretion by action on the cell, let us see how the sudden back flow could be understood. According to von Wittich and Heidenhain the diameter of the alveoli has remained constant. The secretion, manifestly, cannot upon this assumption return into the gland, unless there be a diminution in the combined bulk of the secretion in the ducts and the cells. There will be no such alteration in bulk, however, by the secretion passing into the cell as von Wittich assumes, for the cell will grow to just the amount that the secretion in the lumen diminishes. The only way a diminution in bulk could be brought about is by a back filtration. The fall is, however, much too sudden for this, and takes place at a pressure much less than the gland can sus- tain without becoming cedematous. It is also impossible to see why on ceasing stimulation the permeability of the gland to back filtration should suddenly increase. Easy though it seems at first sight, therefore, to ascribe such a back flow to a reabsorp- tion under pressure of saliva by the cell, closer inquiry shows that it is impossible to account for this back flow except on the assumption either of a back filtration or that there has been an alteration in the diameter of the alveoli. I maintain with Eck- hard that a back filtration is highly improbable, and there re- SECRELION. PITYSIOLOG Y. 327 mains only the alternative of an increase in the diameter of the alveoli, probably following an active compression. But if the saliva is simply pressed out, why is it that it does not return to its former level on ceasing stimulation? This was supposed by von Wittich to prove that the nerve increased the amount of saliva in the gland. I fully agree with von Wittich in this contention, but I disagree with him entirely in referring the increase to the action of the nerve on the cell This increase may be readily understood on the muscular theory, without any assumption of nerve activity on the gland cell, as follows: On breaking sympathetic stimulation of considerable duration a temporary vaso-dilation occurs and the ducts and alveolirelax. It takes an appreciable time for the saliva to pass back into the fine tubules, and during this time the cells are ab- sorbing water from the lymph and capillaries. Hence their bulk and the amount of saliva is increased and the saliva is never able to return to its former level. The proof of this is sufficiently clear. That vaso-dilation does occur temporarily on ceasing stimulation of constrictor nerves has often been re- marked. I have myself often seen it in the rabbit’s ear and in the cat’s submaxillary. In the dog’s submaxillary I have often seen, also, that coincident with this vaso-dilation a slight secre- tion may actually ensue (See Expt. VII, p. 311). It is, also, well established that the cells do imbibe fluid and food during or after sympathetic stimulation and thus increase the bulk of undifferen- tiated protoplasm. In view of these facts, I believe that von Wittich’s and Eck- hard’s experiments, instead of proving that sympathetic stimu- tion can not possibly be due to compression of the ducts and alveoli, demonstrates that it must be due to such compression ; that it is impossible to account for the back flow on any other probable hypothesis, and that the fact that the saliva does not reach its former level is readily understood by reference to the nerve’s constrictor action and the temporary vaso-dilation ensuing on breaking simulation. I do not believe that von Wittich ever endeavored to analyze in detail his own explanation, or he must have perceived its impossibility. 328 MATHEWS. g. THE LOcATION AND NATURE OF THE CONTRACTILE SUBSTANCE IN THE GLAND. The contractile tissue, responsible for the sympathetic secre- tion, resides neither in the gland capsule nor in the capillaries. Glands dissected free from the capsules secrete normally. The capillaries cannot be held responsible, as Vierheller™ supposed, because, as one may readily see in the cat’s submaxillary, the nerve may be still active on the blood vessels while producing no secretion, and von Wittich’® records that after curare, the rabbit’s sympathetic loses its secretory activity while still active on the blood vessels of the ear. Unna’ has suggested that the basement membrane 1s contractile, and this may possibly be the ease. There is, however, no evidence of im. “That there as smooth muscle about some of the principal ducts of the salivary elands is well-known, but most histologists have failed to find any between or about the alveoli. However, Pfliger™ and Schliter® have each described isolated fibres, and strands of smooth muscle lying between the alveoli, distinct from the blood vessels, ‘so that the stroma is not entirely lacking in contractility.” Whether the contractile tissues thus far recognized histo- logically in the gland are those active in the production of this secretion appears to be doubtful. The physiological evidence is of itself so strong, however, that I believe we can safely as- sume the existence of such a tissue, even had we no histolog- ical evidence of its presence. h. THE CHANGES IN GLAND CELLS UPON SYMPATHETIC STIMU- LATION. The changes in gland cells, induced by stimulation of the sympathetic nerve, are most clearly seen in the rabbit’s parotid,” . less clearly in the dog’s parotid, where the nerve causes normally little or no secretion. The changes consist in the diminution in the size of the cell, the discharge of the mucous or secretory products, the formation of new undifferentiated protoplasm and SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 329 in the nucleus becoming round and moving toward the center of the cell. These changes are identical in kind with, though taking place generally more slowly than, those following stimu- lation of the dilator nerve or the injection of pilocarpine. Do they indicate the direct action of the nerve on the cell? Al- though they might be so interpreted, they may be readily under- stood without any such assumption, as follows: Stimulation of the nerve causes a compression of the cells and thus expels from them their stored-up metabolic products and liquid. By this means the cells discharge their products. On ceasing stimula- tion the alveoli and ducts relax, and the cells take up water and food from the lymph. The latter process is hastened probably by a temporary vaso-dilation ensuing when the sympathetic stimulation is broken. In virtue of the food, oxygen and lymph thus brought to them the cells form new undifferentiated proto- plasm. On _ several successive stimulations the accumulated metabolic products are largely discharged, the cells become smaller and the nuclei, relieved from pressure, become round and move toward the center of the cells. The same explanation holds also for the changes following stimulation of the dilator secretory nerve, with the exception that the stored products are dissolved out of the cell, instead of being squeezed out, and as vaso-dilation accompanies this secretion the changes take place at a more rapid rate. These changes are discussed more at length in my paper on the Pancreas Cell.* z. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION. The phenomena of sympathetic secretion, which have been con- sidered, could hardly indicate more clearly, I think, the muscular mechanism of that secretion. The sudden gush of saliva; its sudden cessation, however prolonged the stimulation; the dim- inution in the amount of saliva secreted when the stimulations are rapidly repeated ; the apparent paralysis of the nerve when the ducts are empty and its restoral to power if the ducts be passively redistended ; the augmentation in volume of the secre- tion, when the ducts are abnormally full of fluid saliva, and the * Shortly to appear in the Journal of Morphology. 330 MATHEWS. diminution in amount of secretion when there is little saliva present ; the dependence of the character of the sympathetic saliva upon that present in the gland at the moment of stimu- lation; the back flow of saliva into the gland on stopping stimulation when the gland is secreting against pressure; the presence of smooth muscle in the ducts and between the alveoli— these facts point unmistakably in one direction. A stronger chain of circumstantial and direct evidence that this secretion is caused by compression of the ducts and alveoli by contractile tissue would be hard to imagine. If some of these phenomena are susceptible of explanation upon the hypothesis that the secretion is Gue to gland cell activity, others of them, z. ¢., the augmented salivary secretion, the back flow of saliva on break- ing stimulation, the paralysis of the nerve when the ducts are empty, and its restoral to power if the ducts be redistended, are explicable, if at all, by that theory, only by means of improba- ble and unproven assumptions. The surprisingly ready acceptance of the Ludwig-Heidenhain theory of secretory nerves, acting on gland cells, as an explana- tion of the sympathetic salivary secretion in the face of unmis- takable indications of a muscular’ mechanism, has been duc largely, I believe, to the generally prevalent belief that there is but one mechanism of secretion. That this belief is erroneous, there has long been, I believe, many indications. . For there is direct evidence in many glands, such as the poison glands of snakes, the skin glands of amphibia, many unicellular glands, sebaceous and sweat glands, that many secretions are due to muscular action. And in many other glands the phenomena of secretion have shown as clearly that here the mechanism was some other than muscular. There must evidently. be at least two different mechanisms, a muscular and some other one. Once the idea that there is but one mechanism of secretion is abandoned, the salivary secretions will be found, I believe, to lose much of their puzzling character. The facts which Heidenhain urges as showing that the sym- pathetic produces secretion by action on the gland cell are readily accounted for if the sympathetic cause compression of the ducts and alveoli and vaso-constriction. SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 331 Mi; OTHER SEGRE FIONS DUE TO MUSCLE ACTION. Probably many other secretions are due to muscle action. The unicellular glands of the carp-louse, Argulus foliaceus, are surrounded by muscle fibres. Nussbaum,” observing the liv- ing glands, states that they are emptied by the contraction of this musculature. Muscle surrounds the unicellular glands in the mantel of Aplysia,* and the glandular pedicellaria of the Echino- derms.** The gasteropod liver* possesses, beneath the serosa, an incomplete musculature, the contraction of which has been watched in the living gland. A similar sheath is found in the livers of Crustacea, land and water Isopods, Amphipods and Decapods.™ The poison glands of spiders have their alveoli enclosed in a tunic of spirally arranged muscular fibres.* In the salivary glands of Cephalopods™ the cells rest on connective tissue, which is, in turn, surrounded by muscle fibres. An examination of the physiology of these glands leaves little doubt that the secretion is due to muscular action.** The amphibian skin glands are sur- rounded by a muscular sheath lying between the cells and the basement membrane. There is no doubt from observations on the living glands (Engelmann,"© Drasch," Ranvier®) that this muscle at times contracts, compresses the gland and thus causes a secretion. A similar muscular mechanism prevails in the mucous glands of Petromyzon, in which the cells are bodily extruded. The poison glands of amphibia and reptilia and others of the salivary glands” are provided with their own musculature, or are emptied by surrounding skeletal muscles. Many anal and cloacal glands,” sweat® and sebaceous glands are provided with a musculature lying between the basement membrane and the cells. There is little doubt that the secretion of sebum is pro- duced by the action of this muscle. The same can be said for the secretion of the oil gland of birds. Probably the most in- teresting secretion due to muscular action, outside of the sali- vary glands, is found in the mammalian sweat glands. From 332 MATHEWS. the observations of Ranvier,” Joseph” and others certain secre- tions of sweat are probably due to the compression of the gland by this muscle. Probably the post-mortem sweat secretions, secretion after closing the artery, or the injection of strychnia are due to this cause. (There is, however, a second sweat mechanism associated with vaso-dilation. ) Many more examples of the muscular mechanism of secretion might be given, but these suffice to indicate the very wide dis- tribution of such a mechanism. Muscular mechanisms are, pos- sibly, more common among the invertebrates, but they play, also, a not inconsiderable part in vertebrate secretions. The vertebrate, however, with its delicately coordinated, closed vas- cular system, develops a second mechanism, that of osmosis, which we will now consider. IV. SALIVARY SECRETION ENSUING UPON STEM— ULATION OF THE VASO-DILATOR NERVE. That the general features of chorda secretion coincide with the phenomena of osmosis, regulated by the nerve’s dilator action, is pointed out briefly on p. 356. I wish here to consider more particularly those facts which have hitherto been irreconcilable with such a theory, and have been generally considered evidence of a special action of the nerve on the gland cell. These facts are the most important evidences of a secretory nerves and so warrant a careful consideration. They are: (a) the increase in the percentage of organic solids of a secretion coincident with an increased rate of secretion ; (4) the action of atropine ; (c) the chorda-secretion after clamping the artery; (d@) the action of nicotine. a. THe INCREASE IN THE PERCENTAGE OF ORGANIC CONSTITU- ENTS COINCIDENT WITH AN INCREASED RATE OF SECRETION. Heidenhain * observed that on passing from a weak to a strong stimulation of the dilator nerve in the fresh submaxillary and * Heidenhain. | Hermann’s Handbuch der Physiologie V. p. 50. Studien aus Breslan IV, 1868, p. 32. SECRETION PAYSIOLOG Y. 333 parotid gland of the dog, not only was the rate of secretion in- creased, but also the percentage of solids. He obtained a simi- No. of So & | Rate of | = 5 Stimula- Time. | Coil. = 2 | Secretion \Solids.| Salts. § tion. | <2 | In I min, | O & i: am. m I | 9 20-45 315—288 335 OA [O74 “| Ol22 0.52 2 9 47-51 160—1I 30 3.5 .87 210.) “50 1.54 3 110 54.5-59 | 100— 60 3.0) 266 20S ||" .A5 1.63 4 (10 19-40 264—245 2.8 ay a 1.44} '.36 I.07 5 10 45-48 160—130 2.0" | 1.00 1.41 .49 0.91 6 [ro 50-56 S0—— 65 3.0 we hiro Pig “1! «6.76 4 II 9-27 270—250 2.5 a3 0.78 | 30 |} .o48 8 ‘II 30-34 | 150—I120 2.5 re 0.90 | .38 | 0.51 9 rik 45-44 | SB eR 2.8 | gr} o.79g 1) .36 |). 0.4% | | lar result in the dog’s pancreas, Gottlieb’’ in the rabbit’s pan- creas, and Pawlow and Schumowa-Simanowskaja”™ in the dog’s stomach. Inthe sheep’s submaxillary, on the other hand, there was little or no increase in the per cent. of solids on increasing the stimulus. Heidenhain believed that this increase in solids meant that the cerebal nerve, besides quickening the flow of water through the cells, rendered the cell contents more soluble. How otherwise shall we explain the fact, he asks, that although given a shorter time of contact with these solids, the water passing through the cells, nevertheless dissolves more than during slow secretion. “Die blosse Berthrung mit der aus dem Blute ausgeschiedenen Flissigkeit ist zur Uberfuhrung des Schleimes in das Secret nicht ausreichend, denn sonst musste das Secret um so reicher daran sein, je langer die Flussigkeit in den Drtisenraumen ver- weilt, d. h. je langsamer die Secretion vor sich geht.’ He further assumes that the trophic fibers require a stronger stimu- lus than the secretory. ‘‘ Das cerebrale Secret wird, so lange die Driise unermiidet ist, bei Reizverstarkung reicher an or- ganischen Bestandtheilen, weil der Umsatz der organischen Sub- stanzen in den Zellen unter den FEinflusse der starker gereizten trophischen Fasern schneller steigt, als der Wasserstrom unter dem Einflusse der starker gereizten secretorischen Fasern.’”’” 334 MATHEWS. There are two possible fallacies in Heidenhain’s argument. One fallacy probably lies in his tacit assumption that the gland secretes as a whole ; that the secretion following a strong stimu- lus is derived from the same alveoli as the secretion following a weak stimulus. The other fallacy is the assumption that all of the organic constituents of saliva secreted from a fresh gland upon a strong stimulus are in solution. The true reason why the dilator-secretory nerve may cause an increase in the organic matter present in a secretion, coincident with an increased rate of flow, in passing from a-weak to a strong stimulus, may be the following : If a very weak stimulus be used, only a portion of the alveoli are aroused to activity. The supply of stored up products (hylogens) in these, becomes soon exhausted and the secre- tion derived from them is poor in organic constituents. On passing to a strong stimulus, the previously resting alveoli are thrown into activity and the secretion derived from them ts rich in organic constituents. It is the secretion from these fresh alveoli, which increases the percentage of organic constituents in the whole secretion. On passing from a long continued weak to a strong stimulus in a fresh gland, one is really pass- ing from an exhausted to a fresh portion of the gland. Moreover, in Heidenhain’s observation there is a second source of error which he has overlooked. Heidenhain treats all of the organic constituents of the rapidly secreted saliva as if they were in solution and considers that the liquid derived from the blood is in contact with the materials to be dissolved, only during the time of its passage through the cell. There can be little question, however, that saliva, and particularly the rapidly secreted saliva of a fresh gland, cannot be considered a true solution, for it contains many bodies in suspension. Heidenhain himself has been one of those to describe the microscopical appearance of the lumps of mucous matter, salivary corpuscles and occasional leucocytes found in this secretion. The presence of these bodies in saliva indicates that the rapidly secreted saliva carries out of the cell not only substances in solution, but vis- cous masses of mucous matter not in solution. Its swift cur- SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. oon rent is able to transport these masses, while a more slowly flowing secretion is not. Furthermore, in all probability the saliva keeps on dissolving them as it carries them along and hence becomes actually more concentrated, because it is in con- tact with them really for a longer time than the more slowly secreted saliva and not for a shorter time as Heidenhain thought. Heidenhain made no endeavor to distinguish between the mat- ters in suspension and those in solution. That any gland functions as a whole, as Heidenhain tacitly assumes in his explanation, can not be maintained. The whole surface of the stomach, for instance, may be con- sidered as one large gland. It has long been known that se- cretion can ensue in one spot, and not in another. Heidenhain himself, has called special attention to the marked differences in the condition of the various alveoli inthe salivary glands. Even in the resting gland, here and there alveoli will be found posses- sing the structural features of secretory activity.” In the stomach he remarks that some glands show changes on stimulation before others,” and I have, myself, repeatedly observed glands in the Newt’s stomach close together in very different stages of activity. Kuthne and Lea® have observed this in the living rabbit’s pancreas, a portion only of the gland being normally active. After pilocarpine all the alveoli passed into a condition of activity. In the kidney the independence of the various tubules in se- cretion has been remarked for the bird’s kidney by von Wittich, and for the mammalian kidney by Ribbert,“ and by Dr. Herter in conjunction with the author. Finally, in the case of the sali- vary glands, Langley says that even on prolonged activity of the chorda many alveoli show no change. ‘‘ This is due, in some cases, to fibres escaping stimulation, fibres which leave the lingual later than usual.” This histological evidence appears to me to be conclusive with reference to the idea that the gland does not function as a whole, but that the individual alveoli in the secreting gland may be here active, there passive. The physiological. evidence that the foregoing is the true ex- planation of Heidenhain’s observation is hardly less conclusive. We can easily obtain evidence that the secretion obtained 336 MATHEWS. during a weak stimulus is derived from a portion of the gland only in the following manner: Let us stimulate the chorda nerve carefully with a very weak current, until a large amount of se- cretion has been obtained. If this secretion has been derived from the whole gland a stronger stimulus should yield a se- cretion much less concentrated than a stimulus of equal strength before the weak stimulus. The glands should show, in other words, a considerable exhaustion of the gland products. If, on the contrary, the whole of this secretion has been derived from a portion only of the gland the rest of the alveoli must remain practically unaltered, and a stronger stimulus arousing these should yield a juice, little, if any, poorer in organic matters than was yielded by a stronger stimulus before the weak. Werther” has unintentionally tried this experiment and found the latter possibility to be what actually occurs. A very weak stimulus, with the secondary coil at 300-240 mm., was em- ployed for over three hours, and more than 20 cc. of saliva were secreted. The percentage of organic solids secreted in the slowly flowing saliva steadily fell, but the percentage of such bodies in the saliva secreted on a succeeding stronger stimulus was little if any less, after this long secretion, than it was with an equally strong stimulus before. If, however, a somewhat stronger stimulus was employed, the secretion from a still stronger stimulus was much poorer in organic solids, than the similar stimulus before the weak. The fact that rapidly secreted saliva is not a pure solution, and the considerations just presented concerning the independ- ence of the alveoli of the gland render this observatoin of Hei- denhain of doubtful value as evidence of the existence of se- cretory nerves. Moreover, there is good reason for doubting the truth of Heidenhain’s statement, in the quotation on page 333, that the liquid derived from the blood is incapable of dissolving the con- stituents of the cells in the absence of nerve influence. As has already been pointed out, in treating of sympathetic saliva, (page 322), if the thin chorda saliva be simply left in the gland for twenty minutes, or more, it is converted into a dense, vis- SECRETION PHYSIOLOG Y. 337 cous fluid having all the characteristics of sympathetic saliva. This conversion takes place with equal readiness whether the gland nerves be intact or divided. Heidenhain’s own explanation, also, will be found on an- alysis, I believe, to involve such assumptions as to arouse seri- ous doubt of its truth. To explain this phenomenon on the basis of secretory cell activity, he assumed separate ‘“ trophic”’ nerve fibers acting on the cells. He thus necessitated the im- probable conclusion, that at least many of the cells of the sub- maxillary gland received at least four different nerve ends, z. ¢., trophic and secretory of the sympathetic, and trophic and secre- tory of the chorda; and at least two entirely different nerve impulses, z. ¢., trophic and secretory. That such a conse- quence should not have aroused suspicion in his own mind of the truth of his explanation is difficult to understand. 6. POST-MORTEM CHORDA SALIVARY SECRETION. Another strong argument that the chorda does not produce its secretion by its dilator action on the blood vessels, but by di- rect action on the gland cell, has been derived from the so-called post-mortem chorda secretion. Ludwig and Heidenhain found that if the gland’s artery be completely closed, or if the head be rapidly cut off, and the chorda at once stimulated, a fairly copious secretion ensued. ‘This secretion was most abundant in the first minute after section, and thereafter rapidly diminished, but a lit- tle could still be obtained four, and in some cases five, minutes after decapitation, or compression of the artery. Thereafter the nerve was ineffective. Heidenhain believed this secretion to be due to the action of the nerve on the gland cell, and its rapid fail- ure to lack of oxygen and water. Both Ludwig and Heidenhain believed that by the conditions of the experiment they entirely eliminated the factor of the nerve’s vaso-motor action, and hence thought it demonstrative evidence that the secretory and dilator functions of the nerve were independent. I think it may be questioned, however, whether the condi- tions of the experiment do entirely obviate the vaso-motor action of the nerve, and whether it is not still possible that this dila- 338 MATHEWS. tion may cause the secretion. It is conceivable that this post- mortem secretion might be due to the flow of blood from the veins and arterioles into the capillaries, owing to the active dila- tion of the latter during chorda stimulation. This explanation, it is true, necessitates the assumptions that the chorda tympani causes, on stimulation, an active dilation of the capillaries, or veins, as well as of the arterioles, and that that dilation in some manner makes it easier for the liquid to pass out into the secre- tion. Both of these assumptions are difficult of proof, and in the limited time at my disposal I have not been able to get demonstrative evidence, either of their truth or error. There is some reason to believe, however, that they may possibly be true. That liquid passes out of the capillaries into the secretion of the submaxillary gland because of an attractive pull exerted upon it by some constituents of the gland cells, has been sug- gested both by Ludwig and Heidenhain. To the evidence pre- sented in favor of such a view by Heidenhain, I have nothing to add, and in the normal condition of the capillary and gland wall, I presume that the hypothesis is true. Ludwig supposed that during chorda stimulation the attractive pull of the cell was increased, owing to the formation of substances in the cell pos- sessed of a higher endosmotic equivalent. Heidenhain believed that the attraction of the cell for the liquid in the blood was constant, but that on stimulating the chorda, the turgor of the cell diminished owing to the passage of liquid into the gland lumen, and water was thus enabled to enter the cell from the blood. Both of these explanations, as will be noticed, assume that in some manner the effectiveness of the attractive pull of the cell is increased during nerve stimulation and water enters the cells independent of the state of the vascular system. The question which confronts us and which it was supposed this post-mortem secretion settled is this: Does stimulation of the nerve cause secretion by increasing in some manner the attrac- tive pull exerted by the gland cells on the liquid of the blood, or does it indirectly render effective by vaso-dilation an attrac- tion which is constantly exerted by the cell on this liquid? This is a very difficult point to determine. The endeavor SECKE LION FH YVSIOLOG Y. 339 has been made to answer this question indirectly by showing that vaso-dilation may ensue without secretion, and secretion without vaso-dilation. But all the evidence which has hitherto been offered, that vaso-dilation may ensue without secretion, and that it alone is incapable of causing secretion, is invalidated by the fact that the conditions of such experiments produce an abnormal gland, or capillary wall, both factors which research on lymph formation have shown to be of importance. Quinine, hydrochloric acid, sodium carbonate, or atropine, drugs which enable vaso-dilation to ensue without secretion, probably alter the permeability of the capillary, or gland cell. So that infer- ences can be drawn from such experiments as to processes oc- curring in the normal gland only with the greatest caution. The evidence with the exception of the post-mortem secretion, that the chorda may cause a secretion without vaso-dilation is also unsatisfactory, as pointed out on p. 355. Attention may now be directed, hence, to this post-mortem chorda secretion. It is probable from the considerations presented on page 338, that the liquid causing this secretion is derived from the blood. Can the chorda tympani act on the blood vessels in the absence of circulation, in such a manner as to facilitate the passage of that liquid from the capillaries to the gland cells? The only possible way in which it might so act, I believe, is by causing an active dilation of the capillaries or veins, as well as of the arterioles. Is there any evidence that the chorda has such an action ? Tiegerstedt™ states that the capillaries are contractile but that they have not hitherto been shown to be under nerve control. Roy and Brown have brought forward strong evidence that the capillaries are normally in a state of tonic contraction and that they may actively expand independent of the blood pressure. They observed in the capillaries of the web of the frog’s foot that, although blood pressure might be diminished almost to atmospheric pressure, the application for an instant of chloroform to the web caused an enormous expansion of the capillaries. Interesting, also, in this connection, are the observations of von Frey. v. Frey’ examined microscopically the capillaries of the 340 MATHEWS. frog’s tongue. He found that on stimulation of the dilator, hypoglossal nerve, a dilation of the capillaries ensued even after the blood supply had been cut off. If the artery be clamped, he observed that the blood streamed out of the capillaries both into the arteries and veins. If, now, the hypoglossal be stimu- lated the capillaries dilate and blood streams into them from the arterioles and veins. This movement persisted for from one to two minutes after clamping the artery. Furthermore, in ex- perimenting on the blood flow from the veins of the submaxil- lary gland of the dog during stimulation of the chorda, v. Frey often observed that stimulation of the chorda was followed bya temporary decrease in the rate of flow of blood from the vein, before the ordinary increase. He suggests that this would seem to indicate a widening of the capillary area leading to a back flow of blood from the veins were it not more probable that the increased flow from the dilated arterioles would be more than sufficient to offset this. These facts justify the conclusion, I believe, that on stimu- lating the chorda tympani in the severed head, the capillaries of the gland probably dilate, and that blood enters them from the veins. How such a vaso-dilation might lead to a secretion is not clear, but two possibilities suggest themselves: (1) that the capillaries are thus brought into closer relation with the alveoli, and the constant attraction exerted by the gland contents for the water of the blood is thus rendered effective: or (2) that vaso-dilation may in some way increase the permeability of the capillary wall. The post-mortem chorda secretion can not, I believe, be accepted unconditionally as illustrative of a secre- tion independent of vaso-dilation, until these possibilities have been shown to be non-existent, or non-essential. If it shall be found that vaso-dilation of itself is a cause of secretion in the normal gland, and that the gland cell is not the secretory agent, the facts of secretion in the submaxillary gland will probably necessitate the following conclusions, which are not without interest for those studying the physiology of the circulation: (1) That stimulation of the chorda causes an ac- SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 341 tive dilation of the capillaries, as well as a dilation of the arte- rioles. (2) That the sympathetic is able to overcome the chorda’s action on the arterioles, but not its action on the capil- laries. This is shown by the following fact: If, during strong stimulation of the sympathetic, the chorda be irritated by a cur- rent which by itself is barely able to arouse a secretion, a secre- tion ensues which is certainly as large, if not somewhat larger, than the chorda alone would cause. Such a weak stimulus of the chorda is, however, unable to neutralize the sympathetic’s constrictor action on the arterioles, as shown by the observa- tions of v. Frey. It will be necessary to assume, hence, that the arterioles have remained contracted, while the capillaries have dilated and blood has entered them from the veins produc- ing a secretion analogous to the post-mortem chorda secretion. I endeavored, in a variety of ways, to obviate with certainty all possibility of the chorda’s dilator action. By the injection of supra-renal extract into the circulation I hoped to cause such an intense peripheral constriction as to neutralize the di- lator action of the nerve. I am indebted to Dr. R. H. Cunning- ham for this suggestion. After division of the chorda I injected into the jugular vein the whole of a normal salt extract of two powdered supra-renal capsules of another dog. I found, how- ever, that the injection was followed by a slow constant secre- tion of what appeared to be sympathetic saliva, and that this secretion was increased at all times by a very weak stimulation of the chorda. Indeed, the chorda caused a larger secretion after the injection than before, probably due to the vaso-con- striction in other areas of the vascular system. This result was so discouraging that I did not attempt to repeat it. Heidenhain remarks that large doses of physostigmin cause such an intense constriction of the arterioles of the gland after division of the chorda that stimulation of the latter nerve is un- able to cause either a vaso-dilation, or secretion. Unfortunately, Heidenhain does not give a full account of the experiment. Were it true that the drug produces this effect within three or four minutes of its injection, it would be, I believe, conclusive evidence that secretion can not ensue in the absence of vaso- ANNALS N. Y. AcAD. Scl., XI, September 13, 1898—23. 342 MATHEWS. dilation, and that the nerve does not cause secretion by action on the gland cells; for it is known that the drug does not directly paralyze the hypothetical secretory fibers, or the gland cell. To obtain the details of the drug’s action, I injected into the jugular vein of a medium-sized dog 0.1 gr. of physostigmin sulphate. But although the chorda was divided, a spontaneous secretion began which stimulation of the chorda considerably increased. This discrepancy from Heidenhain’s results is prob- ably due, I believe, to the impure calabar extract he used. I endeavored to ascertain whether the presence of blood in the capillaries was an essential condition of the post-mortem se- cretion by forcing the blood out with air. After ligaturing the carotid artery and placing in it a canula directed headwards I rapidly cut off the head and allowed air to pass into the carotid under a pressure of 100mm. of Hg. The first experiment gave a positive result. On stimulating the chorda a brief, scanty se- cretion was obtained which quickly ceased. Examination of the gland showed it to be practically bloodless. Intwo other simi- lar experiments the post-mortem secretion was greatly reduced in amount and ceased after 1 to 3 minutes, instead of lasting for from 3 to 5 minutes, as normally. The glands in these experi- ments still contained blood in the veins. The experiments indi- cate, I believe, that the presence of blood in the capillaries is an essential condition of this secretion. I regret not having been able to bring my experiments to a more satisfactory con- clusion, but it is to be hoped that the important bearing of this post-mortem saliva upon the theory of secretion may lead to its being made the subject of careful investigation. From the following experiments the following conclusions may be drawn relative to this post-mortem secretion : 1. After clamping the gland artery, or cutting off the head, a secretion may be obtained from the submaxillary gland on stim- ulating the chorda. This secretion is most abundant in the first minutes, and thereafter rapidly diminishes. After four or five minutes no more secretion can be obtained. The total amount of saliva secreted varies from 9.3 to 1.5 cc. (Experiments aN Li ian es) SECRETION PHVSIOLOG Y. 343 2. If the gland be left without stimulation for a minute after decapitation the total amount of saliva obtainable is considerably reduced. 3. If the gland be not stimulated until 3 or 4 minutes have passed a small secretion may be obtained 6 minutes after decapi- tation. (Experiment XVIII.) 4. If air be blown into the carotid artery, after cutting off the head, the secretion of saliva is reduced in amount and se- cretion ceases, either abruptly or after 2 to 3 minutes. (Experi- ments LXIII, LX VI and LXVII:) 5. If defibrinated blood be run under small pressure into the vein of the gland a small secretion may be obtained 20 to 30 minutes after clamping the gland artery. 6. If the blood supply be cut off for 30 minutes, on read- mitting blood the arterioles dilate, arterial colored blood issues from the vein ata rapid rate and a spontaneous secretion begins. The rate of this secretion is not changed by stimulation of the chorda in the first minute. (Experiment Va.) Experiment Va. Large dog. 3 cc. 1% morphine sulph. subcut. Tracheot- omy. Ether. Canule in both submaxillary ducts. Both chordo-linguals and both sympathetics cut. The left vagus sub- sequently divided also. The right gland is stimulated from rate tO time. (sce p. 305: Lhe left is freed from its tunic and is attached only by the hilum. The vein on the upper surface is open and flows continuously. The only blood vessel coming to the gland is the hilum artery. The other artery was tied and ent, Readings computed in cc. TIME. NERVE. AMOUNT OF SECRETION IN CC. hm. $s hems a. 25 Clamped artery going to gland. 370.25 - 3 30 s Gradually less. 3 £30 c None. 3% (34 Cc & 3.35 S 07 344 Ko OW to Go G2 Lo AK LA Rep KR SE AAR ERE ey ee Ss ing te SS SS Se ee amp RP 23 we, 30 30 30 30 30 wm U1 09 10 MATHEWS. s .00 s 00 Inject 5 cc. .5% NaCl into duct. s 05 Unclamped artery. ¢ Active secretion. Gland secretions spontaneously .17 cc. per minute. Cut left vagus. Clamped artery again. Chorda (intermittent). .50 c .18 30 c 07 Cc .0O S -08 c-coil 12 .0O I5 Ss .05 (very viscid) 5 -0O Inject NaCl. 5% into duct. S 30 sec. 04 c .0O s .0O Inject % cc. fluidinto duct. Most of it runs out before stimulation. S 025 Unclamp artery (red blood rushes out of vein). Gland secretes spontaneously, Sa ce: se We = » £2) 6G. € .30 cc. per minute. Spontaneously secreting. .08 cc. per minute. c I mm. Joe: Spontaneously. 25) GC: € .9 cc. per minute. Clamped artery again. 30 c (coil 12) os Gland still slowly secreting spontaneously. 30 Cc aul c .03 30 c .005 in first thirty seconds, then no more. S 03 c ele) 30 c coil Io .0O s coil Io .O15 Unclamped artery. c Readily secretes. Blood rushes continuously out of vein a bright red on unclamping the artery. Gland secretes spontaneously .5 Cc. Ss .O5 SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 345 Br £3 30 Clamped artery. 5 13 49-5 14 40 c +5 5 14 40-5 17 30 No Stimulation. Rae. 30 — 5 118 30 c .03 5. £9 - 5 20 € 02 a 20 c ere) B22 -5 23 s .OI rm 24 c .0O Be 25 -5 26 S .O1 5) 35 c .00 ae a SO s 00 5 36 Unclamped artery. Red blood rushes from the vein. 5 40 Chorda. Rapid secretion. Gland secretes spontaneously. Be .45 —5 46 Right Sympathetic. “i ee. a Ae —-5 48 Left Sympathetic. .O4 CC. Cut off head as rapidly as possible. Was unable to saw 5 40 30 through the vertebral column. All the muscles and skin severed. Right gland. BR, 50330 — 5 55 Intermittent stimulation of right chorda. .530 5 55 Chorda (coil 5) muscular contractions. No secretion. ae Right sympathetic. 22 CC. 6 10 Right sympathetic. 04 ce. Left gland; no secretion either from chorda or sympa- 5 5° thetic. Experiment LIV. Right submaxillary. Chorda and sympathetic cut. Dog under morphine and ether. Tracheotomy. The dog’s respira- tions become very slow, and finally cease without any struggles, and without ether. There was considerable fluid in the trachea. 4.46. Stimulate the chorda while dying, chorda effective until 4.50. The secretion becomes less and less and finally ceases. I then stimulated the sympathetic and obtained a very copious secretion of .2 cc. No more secretion from either nerve. Experiment LXIV. Before cutting. 10seconds stim. Coil 24. Secretes.79 cc. Begin to cut at 4.50. 1 minute to sever head completely. No secretion during operation. 346 MATHEWS. nem eS. Oh am AMOUNT. 4 57 - 4 58 Stimulates 3 times, Io seconds at a time. 515 .€e 4 59 “ Io seconds ~150, Cc: a> 59. 3O a LO) .O2F CE. No more secretion. Total time of stimulation 50 seconds. Total amount. .686 cc. From beginning to cut to end of chorda effect, 3 m. 30s. Experiment XXI. Before cutting. _ Coil 20," 10 siistimulation secretes: 5 5vee: Begin to cut at-4.05. I minute to sever head completely. No secretion during operation. h.: im. 's h). im AMOUNT. 4 06 -4 07 Stimulate 3 times, Io seconds at a time. I. 6235 2 Ose Dog swallows. 3. O00 4 07 -4 08 ae 3 times, IO seconds at a time. I, '.070 2. ~.O40 Swallows. 3. .060 a OS" 205 Coil to 10, muscular contractions, IO sec, .100 4 09 30 seconds stim. off and on (muscle). .030 4 09 15 No more secretion. 4 10 * Coil 4. Heavy contractions (escape of current). 000 Total time of stimulation, 85 seconds. Total amount, 1665: ce: Time from beginning to cut until end of chorda effect, 4m. 15s: Experiment XVIII. Before cutting. Coil 11. Stimulate 10 seconds. Right gland secretes .64 cc. Left gland, .61 cc. 5.24.30 begin to cut head. Head severed in 30 s. hy ans Ss h m RIGHT GLAND. AMOUNT. 125 . 100 .080 .070 .050 .020 .O10 Baro? —5 29 is 40 seconds. .O40 cc Bi 28-07 3G) pa as to ag .OCO 5) 25 — 5 + 26 Stimulate 3 times, 10 seconds at a time. 5 26 Paid iS) ~I ay an Sou ) oO N SECRETION PHYSIOLOGY. 347 2 LEFT GLAND. AMOUNT. 5 30 Stimulate left chorda Io seconds. .070 Reet a”. ° -O10 i 330 30 *¢ «© chorda (strong muscular contrac- tions ). .O70 Ss 31 Left chorda, No more effect except on mus- cular contraction. SUMMARY. Right gland. Total time of stimulation, 120 seconds. Total secretion, .495 cc. From be- ginning of cut to end of chorda effect, 4 minutes. Left gland. Total time of stimulation, 20 seconds. Total amount, .o80 cc. Time from be- ginning to cut to end of chorda effect (2) 5 minutes, 30 seconds. Experiment LXIV. Before cutting. Coil 18. 30sec. stimulation. Secretes 2.1 cc. Cut head at 4.30, 1% minutes to sever completely. Sm s h m 4 31 40-4 36 Intermittent stimulation. Secretes .250 cc. ._ No more secretion after 4.35. 4 38 Stimulate sympathetic for two minutes, secretes .065 cc. Time from beginning of cut to end of chorda effect 5 minutes. Experiment XXII. Before cutting. Coil 18.:10 sec. stim: Secretes .2 cc. Cut at 6.07. 30 seconds to sever head completely. fe: 5 lh m5 oF 630° — 6-6; Stimulation, Ist 10 seconds 225 CG: 40 seconds stim. .060 cc. 6 o9 20-6 Ig 10 Stimulate coil 18. 30 sec. stim. 1893-45 7o. Unna, P. G. Zur Theorie der Driisensecretion, insbersondere des Speichels: Cent. f. d. Med. Wissensch, 1881, p. 258: 71. Vierheller. Beitrage zur Anatomie u. Physiologie der Parotis dés Schates: 2277. f.-7a7, Med. SOOM ar 868: 72. Vulpian. Comptes rendus, UXXXVII. 1878. 73. Van Gehuchten. Recherches histologiques sur l’appareil di- gestif de la larve de la Ptychoptera contaminata: La Cellule, VI. 1890. 74. Weber. Ueber den Bau und die Thatigkeit der sog. leber der Crustaceen: H — ae ey, ~ PLATE XXXV. [ANNALS N. Y. AcAp. Sci., XI, No. 17, pp. 401 to 403, October 13, 1898. ] A SIMPLE AND CONVENIENT PHOSPHOROSCOPE. WALLACE GOOLD LEVISON. (Read April 4, 1898.) In Wright’s Z’gfz' there is a description of a phosphoroscope designed for lecture illustration which is attributed to Professor John Tyndall. It consists of a cylinder set in revolution by a crank mechanism before a slit in a light-tight box, through which the light from an electric arc lamp enclosed in the box falls upon the cylinder. The cylinder being coated with coarsely pulverized uranium glass, the audience, in a dark room observes a band of green light across the cylinder the inten- sity of which increases in proportion to the rapidity of its revolu- tion. This is due to light absorbed by the uranium glass as it passes the slit, and given forth so deliberately as to be still es- caping during the time required for more than a half revolution of the cylinder. Having occasion to use some such simple contrivance in a recent investigation upon this property” of minerals, I con- structed a modified form of this instrument consisting of a hol- low pasteboard cylinder, set in revolution by an electromotor, whereby much greater speed is attained than by a mechanical device. Instead of coating the cylinder directly with the min- eral to be examined I dust it in coarse or fine powder upon the surface of sheets of paper brushed over with hot gelatine. These fold around the cylinder and fasten with rubber bands, and are, therefore, interchangeable at pleasure. In other cases I simply fix a single piece of a mineral, either transparent or opaque, upon the surface of the cylinder. At the great speed 1Wright (L.), Zzght, London, 1882. 2 For which the term photofluorescence, in view of the recent experiments of Wiedemann and Schmidt seems to me best adapted. (401 ) 402 LEVISON. attained by the electromotor, bands of light are thus obtained from certain minerals which afford perhaps a shorter afterglow than uranium glass. In one or the other of these ways I have obtained a band of green light from willemite, from Franklin, N. J., and a band of crimson light from corundum, from near Franklin, Macon Co., N. C. I have no doubt that other min- erals affording too short an afterglow to be at all pronounced with the cylinder revolved by a hand power motor, would be effective with my light cylinder set in rotation at the high speed of an electromotor. By further modification the apparatus may be used in two other ways. The hollow pasteboard cylinder employed is closed by a solid wooden block at the end which is fixed upon the axle of the electric motor. The other end may be closed with a paper cover, or left open; in the former case I attach to the inside of this cover’ a spring forceps, by means of which an object such as a diamond, a ruby, or a piece of willemite may be held exactly in the center of the cylinder. The cylinder is provided with a side opening through which the light from a lantern condenser may be focused upon the object in the center of the cylinder when the opening is on the side away from the observer, and through which the side of the object just pre- viously illuminated, may be seen by the observer wholly screened from any light whatever, when the opening is on the side of the cylinder toward the observer. If the object be thus examined in a totally dark room and affords no afterglow, noth- ing whatever is seen; but if it affords an afterglow, it becomes visible owing to the persistence of vision, with a characteristic colored light when the cylinder rotates with sufficient speed, and its brilliancy increases as the speed of rotation of the cylinder further increases. In the latter case a similar spring forceps supported upon a suitable stand is introduced through the open end of the cylinder to hold the object, which, therefore, does not partake of the motion of the cylinder. The first form is adapted to both trans- 1 Modification adopted since the paper was read. Exhibited at the Annual Re- ception of the Academy [Physics, No. 7], April 13, 14, 1897. SIMPLE PHOSPHOROSCOPE. 403 parent and opaque objects, the latter more particularly to trans- parent objects which, being at rest, are more distinctly seen ; an advantage in the case of cut gems. In one or the other of these ways I have obtained beautiful results from uranium glass, cut rubies, semi-transparent corun- dum and willemite. I have not yet had an opportunity to try a diamond affording an afterglow. It is evident that both opaque and transparent substances may be examined by this instrument, either fixed upon the outside of the cylinder, or held within it, as described ; and in either case its indications are quite sensitive, inasmuch as it may be given so high a speed that only a very small fraction of a second elapses after the object is illuminated and before its presentation in absolute darkness to the eye of the observer. Moreover, in either case, one object may be substituted for another quickly and easily, and the brilliancy obtained from some minerals, es- pecially rubies, is quite surprising. Pe as ets nae i - yo iin | . we, Bai a : [ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, No. 18, pp. 405 to 406, October 13, 1898. ] PHOTOGRAPHED OCUEAR MICROMETERS. WALLACE GOOLD LEVISON. (Read April 4, 1898. ) Owi1nc probably to the difficulty of starting and stopping rul- ing machines at cross lines without overrunning them, it has been found difficult to obtain eye piece micrometers ruled in squares, particularly of the design now so much used in water supply investigations for counting and measuring micro-organ- isms. It occurred to me that these micrometers might be made easily by photography, and as a test experiment I made some of them by the ordinary simple dry-plate method with some precautions to ensure clear films. An outline drawing 14 centi- meters square was first made with India ink and an ordinary drawing pen upon glass coated with gelatin, and one-half the square in each direction was ruled in five equal parts. The small central square formed by the crossing of these lines was then divided by cross lines into twenty-five equal areas accord- ing to the plan given in Prof. Albert R. Leed’s report on the Brooklyn water.' This drawing was photographed down by an ordinary one- quarter portrait lens with small diaphragm stop, to about five centimeters square on a Stanley dry plate, care being taken to obtain as nearly as possible a black negative with very clear lines. For each micrometer this is again reduced by the same lens to a square of seven millimeters on lantern slide plate, care being taken to develop the lines black, keep the film transparent and avoid scratches. 1A. R. Leeds, Report on the Brooklyn Water, published by the Department of City Works of Brooklyn, N. Y., 1897. ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XI., October 13, 1898—27. ( 405 ) 406 LEVISON. The plates thus obtained are cut in circles a little larger than the recess in the eye piece diaphragm in which they are to be used. A cover class is then applied with balsam and xylol and baked for several days until the cement is hard and dry. The circle is finally accurately centered on a lathe and ground toa true circle of the exact size of the recess in the eye piece dia- phragm. In making these photographs the action of halation will cause the lines to be much thinner in the negative than in the original drawing and thicker in the finished positive than in the nega- tive, and moreover it will cause a peculiar thickening where the lines intersect unless the precautions known to expert photog- raphers are employed at each step to counteract this peculiarity of the photographic process. But even if not wholly obviated, this does not materially in- terfere with the practical utility of the micrometer. I have no doubt that very accurate and beautiful micrometers may be thus made by the so-called process method which is a wet plate method used for making photo engravings as it affords jet black lines on a particularly clear ground. The lines as I have made them are thicker perhaps than is necessary, but this does not appear to interfere with the use of the micrometer, providing distances are taken from one side of a line to the same side of the next line, and so on throughout the scale. Eye ptece micrometers made by the simple method I have tried appear to be satisfactory for use with any objective, as re- gards transparency. In fact they seem in some respects to be more satisfactory than ruled micrometers, especially in the cir- cumstance that the lines are black and always distinctly visible and that they can be made with facility of any design desired. For the latter reason they may be valuable not only for meas- uring micro-organisms but also any class of microscopic objects whatever, as for example the areas of the crystals or grains of minerals in thin sections of rocks and building stones and thereby perhaps estimating their relative proportions. [ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, No. 19, pp. 407 to 413, October 13, 1898. ] NOTES ON BERMUDA ECHINODERMS. HusBeErRtT LYMAN CLARK. (Read May 9g, 1898.) Tue collection of echinoderms made in Bermuda in the sum- mer of 1897 by the New York University party, has been very kindly placed in my hands by Professor Bristol, for examina- tion. Although the collection is in itself'a small one, it is of no little interest, as our present knowledge of the echinoderms of Bermuda is very incomplete. So far as I can discover, no at- tempt has hitherto been made to prepare a complete list of them, so that it has seemed worth while to add to the species in the New York University collection, others which have previously been recorded from the islands, thus making as far as possible a catalogue of the littoral echinoderms of Bermuda. In 1888, Professor Heilprin, of the Philadelphia Academy of Sciences, published in the Proceedings of that Academy, a list of the echin- oderms, which he and a party of students had collected in Ber- muda that summer. The list contains twenty species, six holo- thurians, six echinoids, six ophiurids and two asteroids. Of the six holothurians, four are described as new to science. The New York University collection contains only eleven species, but of these at least three are additions to Professor Heilprin’s list. The principal interest of the collection, however, lies in the light which it throws on Professor Heilprin’s ‘‘new”’ species of holothurians, and on one of Professor Verrill’s species of starfish. There are only two species of ASTEROIDs in the collection, but both are of interest. One of them, of which ten specimens lie before me, is the common starfish of the Bermudas. One of its peculiar features is the great variation in the number of arms, one specimen having nine, five having seven and the other four ( 407 ) 408 CLARK. six, while Professor Heilprin reports having found one or two specimens with only five. The specimens I have agree in every particular with the most careful descriptions of Asterias tenui- spina Lamk., from the Mediterranean and eastern Atlantic, and, I have no doubt, belong to that species. Verrill has separated the Asterias of Bermuda from A. tenuispina as A. atlantica, on the ground that the proportions of the arms are slightly differ- ent and that there are no large single pedicellariz. Sladen, in his. report on the starfishes of the “Challencer ~ cellectiong} identifies the only Asé¢evias from Bermuda as A. ¢enuispina and questions the authenticity of Verrill’s species. In the specimens before me the proportions of the arms vary considerably and large single pedicellarize occur in the ambulacral furrow as in A. tenuispina. Accordingly it would appear that A. et/antica must be regarded asa synonym of that species. In several of the New York University specimens the prominent spines on the upper surface are rather unusually colored, being strongly tinged with violet. The other starfish, of which there are five specimens in the collection, is Asterina folium Ltk., a small pentagonal species found closely adhering to the under side of broken pieces of rock. They are very light colored, almost white, but one is strongly tinged with blue. ‘They agree in all particulars with specimens of the same species from Jamaica. The two Opuiurins are of no especial interest, though one of them has not previously been taken in Bermuda. This is Ophiura appressa Say, of which there are three specimens in the collec- tion. They were kindly identified for me and compared with Jamaica specimens by my friend, Mr. Caswell Grave, of the Johns Hopkins University. Of the other species, Ophionereis reticu- fata Ltk., there is a large number of specimens. It seems to be the common brittle-star of the islands. The four Ecuinoips are all reasonably common in suitable places, Professor Bristol tells me, and have all been recorded from Bermuda before. They are Diadema setusum Gray, Lchinometra subangularis Leske, Hipponoé esculenta Leske and oxopneustes variegatus Lamk. Anyone familiar with the latter urchin as it ap- pears in Jamaica or along our southern coast would never recog- BERMUDA ECHINODERMS. 409 nize it in these handsome specimens from Bermuda. A close examination, however, shows that the great difference in color is only one of degree. Specimens from Jamaica are green with white markings and with whitish or greenish spines, the latter being often tipped with violet. Now in the Bermuda J/ovxopneustes, violet has become the predominant color, so that all trace of green and white variegation has disappeared. The test has be- come very dark and the spines are a bright purple violet. This tendency towards violet coloration of spines has already been mentioned in connection with the starfish, Asfevzas, and it is also quite marked in one of the other sea-urchins, Echinometra. Specimens of this form from Jamaica are usually reddish-brown of some shade but the spines are often greenish, tipped with violet. Bermuda specimens show this violet coloration of the spines much more plainly. It would be interesting to know what may be the cause of this tendency toward violet among the Bermuda echinoderms ; but I have no explanation to offer. There are only three species of HOLOTHURIANs in the collection but all of these are of considerable interest because of the light which they throw on the “ new”’ species described by Professor Heilprin. Professor Bristol's students report that there are two large species of Stichopus common at the Bermudas, and that they are readily distinguishable from each other. This statement agrees with Professor Heilprin’s, who has described and figured each of them as a new species. One of them is black and was called S. daboli, but I am sorry to say that of this species there is not a specimen in the collection before me. The other one is less common, is markedly different in color, and was given the name S. ranthomela Heilprin. Of this species, I have two specimens in hand, one of which agrees perfectly in color with Professor Heilprin’s description, while the other is much darker. It needed but a glance to see that they are the common West Indian form of Svchopus, though what that form is to be called it is not easy to decide. A more careful examination of the Ber- muda specimens has shown that they agree in all particulars with specimens from Jamaica. After a careful examination of hundreds of specimens of Stichopus from Jamaica, both living 410 CLARK. and alcoholic, I am convinced that specific differences cannot be distinguished in this genus with any accuracy except in living specimens, and furthermore that coloration is so variable that it is almost useless as a standard in classification. Four species of Stichopus have been described from the West Indian area, all of them from alcoholic material, by men who have never visited the West Indies, and they are separated from each other by char- acters which are seen in a large series of specimens to intergrade in inextricable confusion. For the present however, the com- monest West Indian species may bear the name S. 77007, be- stowed by Semper, and Heilprin’s S. aanthomela is doubtless the same. According to the latter the Bermuda form has eighteen tentacles, but both of the specimens before me have twenty, while one Jamaica specimen has nineteen and another twenty- one. The normal number of tentacles in S#chopus is however twenty, and any other number is merely an individual peculiarity. The second species of holothurian from Bermuda in my hands is a small one, occurring under broken slabs of rock, and of this there are six specimens. I have compared them with more than a dozen species of small holothurians collected in Ja- maica in similar situations, but they do not agree with any of them satisfactorily. After some hesitation, I have decided to refer them provisionally to Ludwig’s Hlolothuria surinamensis, as they approach nearest to that species, though the differences are pretty clearly marked. I think it probable that a larger series of specimens will show the Bermuda form to be a new species. Professor Heilprin collected five specimens of a small holothu- rian, which he refers to 7. foridana Pourt., but neither in his description nor his plate does he refer to the small rosette-like calcareous bodies, so characteristic of that species and its allies. If they are not present in his specimens, I should think it at least possible that these are the same species as the ones before me. The last of the three species in the New York University collection is obviously either a 7hyrne or a representative of that section of Cucumaria to which Lampert gave the name Semperia. There are two specimens about 6 cm. long and agreeing in all particulars with each other. After a careful BERMUDA ECHINODERMS. 411 examination I refer them without hesitation to Ludwig’s Czcw- maria punctata, described from a specimen collected in Barba- does. In a few details they differ from that species: the color being apparently different, the stone canal free, only one polian vessel, and the- anus armed with five small cal- careous teeth. The calcareous buttons are so numerous in some places that the skin is very hard, the layer of but- tons being .4 mm. thick. Professor Heilprin describes from a single specimen a new species of Cucumaria which he calls Semperia bermudicnsis. While I have no way of proving that this is the same species as the specimens before me, the differ- ences which he points out between it and Ludwig’s C. punctata do not seem to me important, and I strongly suspect that 5S. bermudicnsis Heilp. ought to be put down asa synonym of C. punctata Ludw. Iam ata loss to understand what Professor Heilprin means by the ‘long back processes’”’ of the calcareous ring ‘for the attachment of the powerful retractor muscles.”’ So far as I know the retractor muscles of Cucumaria and Thyrne are never attached to the posterior prolongations of the radial pieces of the calcareous ring but always to azéerior pro- longations. The latter are quite long in Cucumaria punctata. In the light of these facts, I append the following revised list of the littoral echinoderms of.Bermuda, as complete as I have been able to make it. It does not pretend to include the deeper water species collected in the vicinity of the islands by the * ehallencer.” CVATALOGUE OF THE. LITTORAL ECHINO— DEKMS OF BERMUDA. ASTEROIDS. 1. Asterias tenuispina Lamk. = A. atlantica Verrill. Com- mon. Collected by all parties. 2. Asterina folium Lrx. Not very common. One speci- men collected by the “ Challenger’ and five by the New York University party. 412 CLARK. 3. Linckia guildingii Gray. Apparently not common. Recorded by Sladen in the ‘‘ Challenger’’ report and by Pro- fessor Heilprin. OPHIURIDS. 4. Ophiactis mulleri Lrx. Two specimens collected by the Philadelphia party. 5. Ophiocoma crassispina Say. One specimen taken by the Philadelphia party. 6. Ophiocoma pumila Lrx. Collected by the ‘ Chal- lenger ’’ and by the Philadelphia party. _ 7 Ophiomyxa flaccida Lrx. One specimen taken by the Philadelphia party. | 8. Ophionereis reticulata Lrx. Abundant. Recorded by all parties.’ g. Ophiostigma isacantha Say. Two specimens taken by the Philadelphia party, 10. Ophiura appressa Say. Three specimens taken by ‘the New York University party. ECHINOIDS. 11. Cidaris tribuloides Br. Reported common by the Philadelphia party. 12. Diadema setosum Gray. Common. Collected by all parties. | 13. Hipponoe esculenta Lreske. Not uncommon. Col- lected by all. 14. Echinometra subangularis Leskr. Common. Col- lected by all. 15. Toxopneustes variegatus Lamx. Common. Collected by all. 16. Mellita sexforis Ac. Said to be common, but not actually collected by either the Philadelphia or New York parties. Recorded from Bermuda by Agassiz. 1'7. Echinoneus semilunaris Lamx. Reported from Ber- muda by Agassiz in his “‘ Revision of the Echini”’ and in the ‘“ Challenger” ‘report: BERMUDA ECHINODERMS. 413 18. Brissus unicolor Kr. Reported from Bermuda by Agassiz. HOLOTHURIANS. 19. Cucumaria punctata Lupw. Two specimens collected by the New York University party. 20. Cucumaria (Semperia) bermudiensis Herirp. A very doubtful species described from a single specimen taken by the Philadelphia party. 21. Holothuria floridana Pourr. Five specimens collected by the Philadelphia party. 22. Holothuria captiva Lupw. Two specimens collected by the Philadelphia party. 23. Holothuria abbreviata Herirpr. A very doubtful species described from a single specimen, probably an abnormal indi- vidual of the preceding species, collected by the Philadelphia party. 24. Holothuria surinamensis (?) Lupw. Six specimens, collected by the New York University party, are referred to this species with much hesitation. 25. Stichopus diaboli Herirp. Reported as very common. 26. Stichopus mobii Semper. = S. xanthomela HEIrp. Reported as quite common. 27. Stichopus haytiensis Semper. Reported from Ber- muda by Dr. Theel froma single specimen collected by the “Challenger.” I .am inclined to think it may be the same species as the preceding. 28. Synapta vivipara Orerst. Recorded from Bermuda by Dr. Theel in the ‘‘ Challenger”’ report under the name SS. fecta. Dr. Theel also has numerous other specimens from the Ber- mudas. Of the above twenty-eight species, four or five of the holo- thurians are in doubt, so that the need of larger and more com- plete collections is very obvious. Of the remaining twenty-two or three species, all but one or two are distinctly West Indian, so that it is only fair to expect the discovery of many more, by more careful and systematic collecting. =a : 2 Sy Pe ms | oe (=e be a 7 -_ « Ss 4 2 [ANNALS N. Y. Acan. Sci., XI, No, 20, pp. 415 to 430, October 13, 1898. ] ADDITIONS TO THE PALAAOBOTANY OF THE CRE- TACEOUS FORMATION ON STATEN ISEAND.. NO. iF ARTHUR HOLLICK. (Read May 16, 1808.) [PLrates XXXVI-XXXVIII.] IN two papers upon this subject previously published our knowledge of the Cretaceous flora of Staten Island was brought up to the year 1892." Since that time considerable additional material has been collected, including several species not before recorded from the island, which have been the subject of notes and memoranda read before the Natural Science Association of Staten Island and published from time to time in its Proceedings. The object of the present paper is to describe this material as a whole and also to indicate certain modifications of views pre- viously expressed, due to information acquired since the other contributions to the subject were issued. All the specimens were found in hardened ferruginous clay concretions or shaly fragments, in connection with the terminal moraine. None of the specimens was found in place, although they must have been derived from Cretaceous strata in the im- mediate vicinity, either on the island or on the adjacent main- land. Some of those from Tottenville and Prince’s Bay may have been from the latter source, but the Arrochar specimens were undoubtedly native to the island, although disturbed from their original position. It was previously taken for granted that all the cretaceous 1The Palzontology of the Cretaceous Formation on Staten Island. 7Zyans. WN. Y. Acad. Sct., XI (1892), 96-104; Pl. I-IV. p Additions to the Palzeobotany of the Cretaceous Formation on Staten Island. Ibid., XII (1892), 28-39; Pl. I-IV. ( 415 ) ? 416 HOLTAGCK. strata on Staten Island were continuations of those at Perth Amboy and Woodbridge, and that the fossil plants found in them or derived from them would prove to be identical with those of the mainland. Such, however, has not been found to be the case, and this fact has seemed to indicate that some of the strata from which the Staten Island plants were derived may represent a different and presumably a higher member of the Amboy clay series than do those represented at the New Jersey localities mentioned. Many of the species are identical, but a number of those found on Staten Island have not yet been discovered in the New Jersey clays, although these have been quite extensively exploited and hundreds of specimens have been collected from them ; and further, some of the species most common in New Jersey are conspicuous by their absence or rarity on Staten Island. As is well known the Cretaceous clays of New Jersey ex- tend across the State with a general northeast and southwest strike and a dip towards the southeast of about fifty feet to the mile. Those which outcrop furthest to the northwest are therefore the lowest or oldest of the series. If a geological map of New Jersey be examined and the trend of the clay out- crops be theoretically extended on to Staten Island, it may be readily seen that the lower beds, represented by those at Wood- bridge, Sayreville, Perth Amboy and possibly South Amboy, would strike the western shore of Staten Island in the vicinity of Tottenville and Kreischerville, while the upper beds, repre- sented by those in the vicinity of Cheesequakes creek, would strike along the southern shore of the island from Tottenville to Arrochar. This probability is further strengthened by the fact that marl bed fossils have been found in the moraine at the latter locality, showing that strata even higher than the upper members of the clay series are or once were represented there. From a consideration of these facts and other similar ones in connection with the Cretaceous clays on Staten Island, Long Island, Block Island and Martha’s Vineyard, the name ‘ Island CRETACEOUS FORMATION ON STATEN ISLAND. 417 Series ’’ was given by Dr. Lester F. Ward to the strata repre- sented on these islands. ! The ‘Island Series’? would therefore lie above the Amboy clays as described by Newberry,’ and below those of the clay marls at Clifford, as described by me in a recent paper.’ The sequence of the strata and their relations to the localities where they are prominently exposed may be understood from the following table : Geological Horizons. Strata. New Jersey Localities. Matawan. Cliffwood. Island Series. | Morgans. (?) South Amboy. Perth Amboy. Upper Potomac (Amboy Clays ). Albirupean Series. Sayreville. Woodbridge. ? (*« Tron Ore Series”? ) Middle Potomac. Acquia Creek Series. ae Not known in New Mount Vernon Series. Jersey. Basal Potomac. _ Rappahannock Series. James River Series. Whether or not all of Dr. Ward’s conclusions will stand, ap- pears to me, will depend upon future investigation. Thus far I have failed to find the equivalent of the Island Series on the mainland of New Jersey in the region where it should theoretic- ally occur, nor have the ferruginous concretions and fragments, by which the series is characterized on the islands, been found there, and the fact of their absence on the mainland, and their presence on the islands only in connection with the terminal 1 The Potomac Formation, 15th Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Surv., 335, 330: 2 The Flora of the Amboy Clays, A/onoy. U. S. Geol. Surv., XXVI. ’The Cretaceous Clay Marl Exposure at Cliffwood, N. J., 7rans. W. Y. Acad. Sct., XVI (1897), 124-136. 418 HOLLICE. moraine, has led me to think that they are not characteristic of the series except as representing fragments of clay strata which were originally in a plastic condition but which have become hardened by oxidation after having been torn up and made part of the morainal material. This view is further strengthened by the fact that these concretions and fragments may be found in the moraine in every stage of development from masses of soft clay with only a thin shell of limonite on the outside to those which are hardened throughout. Many of the hardest frag- ments also exhibit beautifully defined planes of shearing or slipping, evidently accomplished before the process of harden- ing had been completed. In several localities, notably at Glen Cove, Long Island, and at Gay Head, Martha’s Vineyard, the shaly fragments and concretions occur in the Cretaceous clay strata, but these strata are greatly contorted and have been sub- jected to similar conditions to those which have wrought the changes noted in the mixed morainal material. The disturbance of the strata would naturally expose them to the same oxidizing influences and would cause portions of them to be converted into hardened seams or assist in the formation of concretions. So that until we find the strata upon the mainland with such hardened seams, fragments or concretions in place and con- taining representatives of the same flora, the most reasonable explanation of their occurrence throughout the morainal region of the islands would seem to be that it is due to oxidation caused by the disturbance wrought there by glacial action. CRETACEOUS PLANTS OF STATEN ISLAND. In the following list Nos. 4, 5,8) 0; IO; 11, 12,904 15 ane 16 have not before been reported from Staten Island, and No. 12 represents a species here described for the first time. 1. Moriconia cyclotoxon Den. « Err. (Plate XXXVI Figs.) Moriconta cyclotoxon Deb. & Ett., Urwelt. Acrob. Kreidegeb. Aachen und Maestricht, p. 59 (239), Pl. VII, Figs. 23-27. Locality : Prince’s Bay, Staten Island. CRETACEOUS FORMATION ON STATEN ISLAND, 419 2. Thinnfeldia Lesquereuxiana Heer. (Plate XXXVI, Fig. 6.) Thinnfeldia Lesgquereuxiana Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct., Vol. VI, Pepto: Ip. 37, Pl. XLIV, Figs. o, 10% Pl. XLVI, Figs. 1-11, I2a and b. Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island. 3. Populus Harkeriana Leso. (?) (Plate SX XVI, Fig. 3:) Populus Harkeriana Lesq., Fl. Dak. Gr., p. 44, Pl. XLVI, Fig. 4. Although somewhat imperfect in outline, this specimen appears to agree in all essential particulars with this species and seems to warrant at least a provisional reference to it. Locality : Tottenville, Staten Island. 4. Salix inzequalis News. (Plate XX XVIII, Fig. 4a.) Salix tnequalis Newb., Fl. Amboy Clays, p. 67, Pl. XVI, Pies. i 4, G~ Pl XVII, Figs. 2—7. Locality : Arrochar, Staten Island. 5. Myrica longa Herr. (Plate XX XVII, Fig. 6.) Proteotdes longus Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct. Vol. III (Kreidefl.), p. Pie, Pi XXX, Fie Sb > PliX x Xi; Figs: 4,5. Myrica longa Weer, tid., Vol. VI, Abth. IT, p. 65, Pl. X VIII, Pieosop, bl woh ies 15-17 FLX XIII, Fig. 10; Pi. ALY, Fig. ad. Locality : Arrochar, Staten Island. 6. Ficus Woolsoni News. (?) (rate XXXVI, Fig. 9.) ficus Woolsont Newb., Fl. Amboy Clays, p. 70, Pl. XX, Fig. 3; Pl. XXUI, Figs. 1-6. 420 t1 OLETGR It is with considerable hesitation that I have provisionally referred this fragmentary specimen to this species. Fig. 6 of Plate X XIII, seems, however, to approach it, quite closely. ACAD SCI. ANNALS N. = xX * m~< : 3 a4 Figs. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. PLATE XXXVII. CRETACEOUS PLANTS FROM STATEN ISLAND. 1,2. Tricalycites papyraceus News. Tottenville . Magnolia longifolia News. (?) Tottenville Sterculia Snowii Lesa. (?) Tottenville Sterculia sp.? ‘Tottenville Pterospermites modestus Lesg. Tottenville . Andromeda Parlatorii Herr. Tottenville Moriconia cyclotoxon Des. & Err. Princes Bay Ficus Woolsoni News. (?) Tottenville . ( 428 ) PLATE. XXXVI. SOL.) 2k, ANNALS: N. YY. ACAD, = Ps ? Ww J bets UF — ’ Lo A i D) - wy: h a » 9 1 ) : aT ] ) b < : > * 7 wf : q “he 7 -, oy. ee - 7 7 mG : _ ; _ i a _ ¥ _ Pp. , “ - a “« we , a | 7 ; cw a Ai se > | b Sy [77> ee 475, pees SLES ee eee "4 pt aes a ae 15 +} a): A+ a i) - ne a = a -” Oca eag : 1 PLATE XXXVI. PLATE XXXViIIi- CRETACEOUS PLANTS FROM STATEN ISLAND. Fig. 1. Rhizomorphs. Tottenville . ane Fig. 2. Aralia rotundiloba News. (?) Tottenville Figs. 3, 4b andc. Myrsine elongata News. Arrochar. Fig. 4a. Salix ineequalis News. Arrochar Fig. 5. Hedera sp. ? Tottenville . Fig. 6. Myrica longa Heer. Arrochar ( 430 ) PAGE. 423 421 420 419 421 419 PLATE XXXVIII. NALS: N.-¥. ACAD: SCT. XT. AN [ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sct., XI, No. 21, pp. 431 to 441, December 17, 1898. ] fi LATIER: PARTVOR, BUCKETIVUS, AND EPICURUS zept petewour. E. G. SIHLER. (Read March 28, 1898.) THE charm of Lucretius is perennial. The source of it, how- ever, is rather complex. That his work is the foremost didactic poem of antiquity is admitted. That his manipulation of the possibilities of the Latin tongue stamps it, as Teuffel says, as the production “‘ Eines Sprachgewaltigen” few would gainsay. That his exordia and many of his digressions really are meant by the lumina of Cicero’s judgment in his letter to his brother Quintus (2, 11) seems most probable. And still stronger than these is the tremendous earnestness of the man. We have a distin- guished Epicurean in the generation after L., Horace of Venu- sia. To him, too, we may trace that blending of morals, of quasi-religious conviction and strictly philosophical tenets, which constituted adherence to the one or the other of the two most prominent sects of the day: the Epicurean and the Stoic. These conditions Horace evidences most frankly in his earlier writings, ¢. g., in the Iter Brundusinum, I, Sat. 5, 97. dein Gnatia lymphis Iratis extructa dedit risusque iocosque, Dum flamma sine tura liquiscere limine sacro Persuadere cupit. Credat Judaeus Apella Non ego: namque deos didici securum agere zvum, Nec, siquid miri faciat natura, deos id Tristes ex alto caeli demittere tecto. The vanity of concern for the utter extinction implied in the mortality of the soul is iterated in his Odes, as is the vanity of all human passions; the good-natured banter of criticism of Stoic exaggeration comes naturally from an Epicurean ; but the (431) 432 SITE Te fearless and uncompromising attack on the Etruscan religion of his country is not sounded by the pensioner of Maecenas, and the poet who composed for the princeps the Carmen Saeculare and supported distinctly the social and religious reforms so dear to Augustus (recorded too as the latter’s dearest aspirations in the Monumentum Ancyranum) could not well make a propa- ganda—for Epicureanism. It is different with Lucretius. His tremendous earnestness is coupled with a humility and rever- ence for the person and doctrine of Epicurus which I need not substantiate here in detail, I, 66-79, III, 1 sqq, and particularly His te42 ipse Epicurus obit decurso lumine vite qui genus humanum ingenio superavit et omnis restincsit, stellas exortus ut etherius sol. . . and the much quoted lines V, 8, sq. deus ille fuit, deus, inclyte Memmi qui princeps vitz rationem invenit eam quz nunc appellatur sapientia . . . As to the Greek sources of Lucretius: was there anything be- side Epicurus himself? If so, what? If not, which writings of E.2 Then too: did: he base it all on the 37 bb: of Ei mee guasws? The exhaustive grouping of every shred of Epicu- rean doctrine by H. Usener, of Bonn, in his Epicurea, Leipzig, 1887, with the critical edition of the text of book X, of Diog- , enes Laertius is a monument of erudition. . . still, inasmuch as Epicurus’ doctrine is stated there with very great conciseness as a Summary digest for the conning of confirmed disciples and not with explicit clearness nor argumentative breadth, the temp- tation has always been great for students of the subject to make Epicurus’ letter to Herodotus a “source on 1 The exact mode in which Lucretius used the main work the 37 bb. zepe guaews will probably never be known, inasmuch as, although there were three complete copies of Ep. zeo¢ guaeu¢ in the villa of Piso at Herculaneum, the deciphered fragments from the carbonized rolls are entirely too scanty to permit in- ferences ; if Philodemus, a second-rate writer, was represented LUCRETIUS AND EPICURUS. 433 with his endless volumina in that Epicurean library, are we to believe that a Lucretius was content with a perusal of anything short of the great dogmatic work of the master? It is not likely. This, too, is made more probable by the substantial ele- ments of controversial analysis or censure directed against other schools, and particularly against the Stoics, although the latter are never mentioned by name throughout the work of Lucre- tius. These controversial elements certainly were not in them- selves attractive to such Roman readers as were to be made proselytes of the sect. Therefore, I do not see how the paral- lels between the letter to Herodotus and between Lucretius, elaborated by /vo Bruns in his Lucrezstudien, Freiburg, Tuebin- gen, 1884, prove anything in this respect. Noram I convinced of the main thesis of Bruns, that Lucretius, in the course of the elaboration of his work, determined quietly to omit or remove the treatment of the theory of cognition, to xavoxzov, of the system of Epicurus. Why should we assume that the treatment of the Aavwy was an essential part of the 37 bb zeo¢ guaews when, as we see in Diogenes L. X., 27, there was a distinct volume zeoe xoetyotov 4% Kavov.... Lucretius essayed to show that this physical theory truly emancipated the souls of men from fear of death and from all the terrors with which the traditional mythology had invested the Inferno, that it secured that peace of soul which in the Epi- curean conception is essentially negative, freedom from all the passions whether involved in the persuit of wealth, of sexual indulgence [hence the appendix of book IV in L.,] or of political preeminence. This is “purgare pectora’”’ L. VI, 24.. Now books I-IV substantially present in sequence what Epicurus called 7 r>qjar0s guaohoyta : [letter to Pythocles, Diog. L. 10, 85]. But books V and VI of L. are apt to make at first the impres- sion of a mass of unrelated or ill-related matter. As for book V the very exordium 55 sqq. states distinctly a complex theme : the creation of organic beings, persistence of created types, es- sentially physical nature of mind: deception of man by visions. My next theme [rationis ordo] : this organic universe is perish- 434 SALER. able [Diog. L. 10, 74 g@aprtot of xoopoe]. Earth, sky, sea, stars, sun and moon established by that association of matter, creation of living beings out of the earth [primitive civilization ], origin of speech, religion, absence of conscious purpose in the movement of heavenly bodies, no teleology: celestial mechanics directed by no divine providence. These themes are actually found in the book, although in a somewhat different order. Beginning with V. 509 sqq. we begin to notice that characteristic mark of Epicurus’ treatment of “ra wstéwpoa,” viz., the advancement of two or more theories to explain phenomena so radically different from the absolute posi- tivism of the atomistic physical system proper, of boks I.—IV. But it may be more instructive to present at first tables showing the themes and the sequence of themes in Epicurus and in Lucretius. EPICURUS TO PYTHOCLES. LucreTIus V. Dios. Laert. X..35 sqq_ 509. Motion of stars. Sun, moon and ‘‘ other stars’’ 564. Size of Sun. Size of sun. Heat of Sun. Decline and filling of the moon. 619. Sun’s mutation of course Face in moon. in the year. Eclipses. 650. Night, ta&ts meptddov. 656. Periodicity of sunrise. Length of night and day. 680. Correlation of day and Clouds. night ir length. Rain. 705. moon’s phases. Thunder. We iy MeCUpSEs: Lightning. (771-779 resumé. ) Thunderbolt. ; Waterspouts. Book VI. Earthquakes. 96. Thunder. Winds. 219. Lightning: optical phe- Hail. nomena. Snow. 379. Lightning: destructive Dew. phenomena. Hoarfrost. | 451. Clouds. Tce: 495. Rain. LUCRETIUS AND EPICURUS. 435 Rainbow. 527. Snow, hail, hoarfrost, ice. Halo of moon. (A few lines only. ) Comets. 535. Earthquakes. Slower movements of some stars. 639. Etna. Meteors. 713. Nile. (explanation of Seasons. (?) summer-rise. ) 738. Exhalation of Avernus. 840. Puzzling changes of tem- perature. go6—1082. Magnet. togo. Epidemics in general. 1138. The plague at Athens. 4309-429. (Paraphrase of Thucyd. II 47- 55-) The most striking thing in the letter to Pythocles is this: The interest of Epicurus in the explanation of these phenomena is not a scientific or even a positive one: it is mainly negative ; to furnish zatural explanations, an assortment of two or three or four or even more, sometimes without much, if any, indication which to prefer as long as the idea of any divine will or agency as a fac- tor was utterly cancelled from the problem ; cf., also, in letter to Herodotus § 76 xae pry ev tots pstewoors QOPay xat TpOT HY xat Exhehey xat dvatokny xat Ovaw xat Ta ovaTOLYa TOUTOLS HATE heetOUP- yourtog tevos vomiCew det ytvecbar xat deatdtcovtog 7 dcatd&avto¢ x0L OMA. THY TAdoay paxapLotyta. EYOVTOS psta d~bapotag . . . and so in the letter to Pythocles § 97 of the course of the sun nat h Geta quer mpd0¢ tadta pHdapn Tpocayéabw GALd Ghectovpy7toOT dcatnostabw xat ev tH Tdon paxapeotyte, Ws t TOVTO pn TeAayYOnasTak dmaca. i mept TOY peteWowY altiohoyta patata Soca. And fur- ther recurring to the element of supernatural cause 87-, ‘‘éze tov woUov xatapps.”’ And § 115, speaking of other possible modes of explaining meteora: ‘‘ xae Gdhoe 02 ToOTOE eg TO TOUT tehéoat apulytot setae.” When we turn away from this general negative bias of this summary petewpodoyvta we are met by acurious and puzzling characteristic. 436 STHLER. These phenomena, according to Epicurus, according to their very nature, are unattainable to our positive knowledge ; many explanations are possible for each of them as a rule, one is as good as the other; their knowledge is a mere inferior corollary to the system of atomism proper, 7 7yyat0¢ guacoloyta (Diog. L. 10.85). The aim of this a¢ceodoyta is not scientific precision, nor the satisfaction of the craving for accurate knowledge ; no, here too it is ($85) draoagta ; these themes belong to an entirely dif- ferent category from the (§ 86) tay didwv guaomarv mpo0fdnudter kddapacc, e. g., that the universe is material and intangible (dvagyc¢) as to its fundamental substance (z. ¢., as to the atoms), and that the atoms are the material principle, principles which are in adso- Jute harmony with phenomena; not so, however, with petéwoa ; AAG TAUTE Ee TASOVAYHY EYst KA THE FEVEGEWC ALTLAY XO THE OvGtAS tats utalnacat oUpowrvoy zatnyoptay. The main point is not to adopt and persist in any ove explana- tion, but give equal authority to them all as long as none of them is in hisharmony with parallel or analogous processes from the spheres of our actual empirical perception and observation (gvaoy7 pata § 93)... In one passage § 94 he refers to the adoption of the single or exclusive as “being smitten’’ with it—cf. § 98 (xatayarav) as a folly of him who knows not the (§ 113) limits of human survey. And so—a brief illustration must suffice—e. ¢., he gives four explanations of the changes of sun and moon, and speaks with scorn of the computations of professional astrono- mers as (§ 93) ta¢ “uvdpaTodmdste “uatpohoywy TEyveTetag. . . . of the decline and increase of the moon he offers not less than six; explanations, of clouds (§ 99), four; of rain, four; of thunder, five (§ 100); of lightning § 101-102, seven; of earth- quakes, ¢hree ; with a fourth collective which recurs frequently. It would be mere iteration to go through the whole list. This easy eclectic attitude towards the real solution of these phenomena, this absolutely unscientific, nay childish, position as over against exact science, naturally brought Epicurus and his school into very glaring contrast as over against the positive attainments of the Peripatetic and Stoic schools. LUCRETIUS AND EPICURUS. 437 And so this particular matter well illustrates the attitude of Epicurus and his school to technical culture or towards the cultivation of technical knowledge. Usener has collected the passages: Epicurea, p. 170, sqq. Cf. particularly Diog. 10, 6 TaOstay O& Tadoav, poxdos, were, Taxdt~ov “apdpevog and Quintil. 12, 2, 24, “fugere omnem disciplinam.” But, we are all told, there are doubts as to the genuineness of the letter to Pythocles, so that Usener, while critically editing it with the other two letters, brackets the title. This is due to a notice of Philodemus in the Herculanean papyri, 2d collation, Tom. 1, fol. 152, with Usener’s supplements, p. 34. << Szow [fa]y Thy [a] [Aa] pBav[e ae “ws TEpt TI@y ’extatod[ dy] xat THs [7pds I]v0| oxida es Jetes] tedpur ETLTOPT,S xar TOD mept “apeTOv xté Peay cr The notice of Philodemus, who was a close contemporary of Lucretius and intimate friend of Calpurnius Piso, really is, in the first place, a prima facie proof that this piece of Epicurean writ- ing existed in Jus day and hada place among the works of Epi- curus. Further, the summaries must have (like the zvp¢ae dogaz) enjoyed a much greater vogue than the bulky works of Epi- curus ; they were evidently studied and passed on from genera- tion to generation in a school in which the zpse dixit of the master was zealously maintained as the standard of true doc- trine. It is natural, on the other hand, and most probable that a man of real attainments and wide knowledge like Philodemus had little love for this weakling among the intellectual progeny of the son of Neocles, and would have been glad to have it neglected or cast aside as a bastard. The genuine and profound indifference of Epicurus towards this entire sphere of themes I need not emphasize again ; it is unfair to demand (as Usener does) more apt arrangement and fitness in the succession of themes—or what succession of themes would Usener postulate ? The strongest argument for the genuineness of this second-rate product of Epicurus, how- ever, is afforded by the parallel of Lucretius’ themes. He is not (as Epicurus did not) desiring to write an exhaus- ANNALS N, Y. ACAD. Sci., XI, January, 1899—29. 438 SE tive or systematic treatise on physical phenomena both normal and abnormal ; at the first reading of the greater part of Book V and all of Book VI one cannot suppress a feeling that sys- tem is cast to the winds and to miss that rigid, comparatively speaking, that rigid sequence of treatment which is so unmis- takable in the general unfolding of Epicurean doctriue in Books I-IV. Cf. Munro’s commentary’ on Jeucretius V, 533: and with Epicurus’ incessant railing against the postulate of ome ex- planation (tov povayy tporov, §95 |. c. and § 113 TO 0& puay OLTLAY TOUTWY ATOOLOOVAL, TAEOVAYOS TOY PALVOPEVWY EXXAAOD LEVY, paxtxoy éoct). Cf. Lucretius V, 620, “ zon inquam, szmplex his rebus reddita causast.”’ ‘¢729 [of two different astronomical theories] ‘* proinde quasi id fieri nequeat quod pugnat uterque ‘*aut minus hoc illo sit cur amplectier ausis.’’ Pune! 2755, te Solis item quoque defectus lunaeque latebras pluribus e causts fiert tibi posse putandumst. And so again in book VI, 703 sqq., the theory of a¢zeosoyta is advanced even more clearly: «Sunt aliquot quoque res quarum wsam dicere causam non satis est, verum pluris, unde una tamen sit; as f. e. when you see the dead body of a man lying at @ distance [7. e., preclud- ing a close and direct inspection on our part]; there it behooves us to exhaust the entire range of contingencies through which a man may perish; although we cannot, at that distance, prove any particular single one: the sword, or frost, or disease, or poison. And so we find the same plurality of explanation in Lucretius : positive and exclusive asseverations in this sphere are impossible. V 526 nam quid in hoc mundo sit eorum fonere certum difficile est; sed quid possit fiatque per omne [das All]. in varlis mundis varia ratione creatis id doceo plurvisque sequor dsponere causas, etc... LUCRETICOS ANE EPICUR GS. 439 ¢. g., V, 509 sqq. of the motion of the stars ¢iree conjectural ex- planations, with two alternatives for the third; for the light of the moon 575 ¢wo, the periodical mutations in the sun’s course 614 sqq. two, the problem of night (650), ¢wo ; the correlation of day and night 680 sqq. three ; moon’s phases 705 sqq. “ree ; eclipses 750 sqq. ¢wwo. Thunder VI, 96, ze explanations ; lightning (246), four ; waterspouts (423), two; clouds (451), five; rain (495), four; earthquakes (535), four, rise of Nile (712), four. It is a matter of some interest, philologically, to survey the range of expression in which each writer presents the modality of possibility of alternative conjecture; in Diog. L. 10, 93; evOe eta. . . OMOLWS. . . 7G KOL. . . Y XOL— ; Q4 Hat Ofotws, . . ET OS nat... ete Te evOeystae. . . evdsyetar O&. . . in Q5 ; OvvaTac xat. ... xt... iN 107; “evdeysta... ytvorto dy... ’amotéeaw dv dopBdvoe... in III TOL... Toe H.—in 112; ob povov...’adha , 4 \ > AY Sahil? ' Ay ° XL... 1. . Kat zat Gdhoug OF TAstovag TooTOUs OvYatat. With this compare Lucretius V, 515 sqq. Aut... est etiam quoque Brieigesiias 275) Sq; (SVE... VSive, J =) 637 fit quoque ut; Gai mut... aut... quia; also 658, 660, 682, 697, aut etiam quia 701 ; potest 705, est etiam quare 715; and 731 sqq. cur nequeat..\/,, difficilest; rattone. docere. . ..753.isqq. cur luna Sica ...1On posse; putctur,.. ..762, cur terra: queat.... 765 slat .nequeat..j.\,and.)in- VI, 97 propterea. quia... 108 Rie eiew 1 1G..b Quogue, tt. 121.-hecetiam pacto: .< cademMiur 132 \eSt etiam ratio. ... >. 137 fit. quoque ut: . . 142 sunt quoque 156 denique. .. 160 item.—295 est etiam cum. It cannot be my aim to enter into the detail, much less into the scientific merits, of these explanations; it is curious and noteworthy that Seneca in book VI of his xaturales quaestiones dealing with the problem of earthquakes [a theme suggested by the great earthquake of 63 A. D., from which Pompei and all the gulf of Naples suffered], in reviewing the extant theories on earthquakes, while quoting the Epicurean Metrodorus c. 19; and Epicurus himself does not mention Lucretius, with whom he was familiar. Now Seneca puts Epicurus 6, 20 in the cate- gory of those “ qui oma tsta quae retult in causa esse dixerunt 440 STHLER. aut ex jis plura. And particularly VI, 20, § 5 is so strong a confirmation of the letter to Pythocles that it seems pertinent to give part of it entire: omnes istas posse esse causas Epicurus ait pluresque alias temptat, et a/zos, qui aliquid unum ex iis esse adfirmaverunt, corripit, cum sit arduum de his quae coniectura sequenda sunt, aliquid certi promittere.’’ And so the version of Seneca contains the following words or phrases of alternative conjectural statement: potest, potest, fortasse enim, fortasse, fortasse, fortasse, fortasse, fortasse .. . et inde aut, aut. But Lucretius has further themes which hardly come within the sphere of petéwoa, Etna, Nile, exhalation of Avernus, odd changes of temperature in a certain spring, the Magnet, Epidemics, the Plague at Athens. True, but his fundamen- tal interest is that of ad Pythoclem § 104: jpovoy o poéos ONEOTU, OTEaTH Of, Edy TIS KAAS TOTS Waevopervots axohovAar TZE;t Tay “agavey onyuswta. The absolute elimination of divinity as factor or efficient cause, § 113 and 116, ‘learn this by heart,’ my dear Pythocles ; for the sequence is stated as a two-fold one: KATH TORY TE ~AO TOD pobon "exByoH zat TH OpOyEry, TOUTOLS GULODaY dvvyio7. And so we see Lucretius engaged in elaborate and ambitious efforts to apply the abstract and fundamental doc- trines of atomism, ¢. g., in dealing with Etna, 647 sqq., with Avernus and its reputed exhalations, 769, 790 sqq., w. the magnet, go6 sqq., where the preliminary elaboration of first principles is carried on with such fulness that the poet apologizes : gIg. et minimum longis ambagibus est adeundum and 1081. nec tibi tam longis opus est ambagibus usquam nec me tam multam hic operam consumere parest . and while it is his ambitious attempt to apply fixed principles (cf. Diog. L. 10, 116, “tay Tw@Y apya@r xat amEcptag xat THY GLyyEvoY toutots Gewptav)” to definite physical problems which swelled the theme of the Magnet to the bulky total of 184 lines (905-1080), let us glance at the theme of Thunder and Lightning in the earlier part of book VI, 96-379, a little 'ess than 300 lines .. . and then follows the fervid attack on the formule of the Etruscan ritual and the folly of ascribing these manifestations to Jupiter ; LUCRETIUS AND EPICURUWS. 441 which uprooting of popular fear of the gods with its interde- pendence with the fear of death is really the chief motive and the very essence of this unique poem . . . the practical moral in- terest of emancipating the soul vastly predominates over the didactic or speculative interest. But the limits of the /3e7, the mechanical necessity even of limitation, so instructively elaborated by Th. Birt in his ‘‘ Das Antike Buchwesen,” 1882, put their constraint upon the poet ; so that alongside of these disproportionate elaborations of par- ticular themes as just noted we find, e. 9., VI, 527 sqq. snow, winds, hail, hoarfrost, ice merely summarily mentioned, and turned over to the reader’s application of first principles. We must not incline, however, to the assumption that this apparent miscellany of physical and meteorological themes and problems in Lucretius V and VI was a mere appendix, or second-thought supplement of the work proper; for in the very first detailed announcement of his chief themes, in I, 127, this entire matter is even placed first in order: Qua propter bene cum suferis de rebus habenda nobis est ratio, solis lunzeque meatus qua fiant ratione. . . In conclusion we ask were the yetéwpa an essential part of the 37 bb. zeoe gucsws? It seems impossible to prove that the let- ter to Herodotus, § 35, 83, in Diog. 1.., X, isa true, 7. 2., an even and truly proportioned summary of the entire range of the great work of 37 bb., the brief reference to wetéwoa in § 76 is too slender for elaborate or positive inferences. In the list of E’s works Diog. L., 10, 27, of some forty-nine titles with 89 volumina are recorded as ta féAttata out of the total of 300 xvid 00e with the exception of zeoe votrwy ddFaz there is no title specifically bearing on the subject of wetéwoa. NEw YoRK UNIVERSITY, 1808. fAnnats N. Y. Acap. Scr., XI, No, 22, pp. 443 to 499, January 18, 1899. | RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF THE NEW YORK men DENY OF SCIENCES. JANUARY, 1898, TO DECEMBER, 1808. RICHARD E. DODGE, Recording Secretary. [ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XI, No. 22, pp. 445 to 499, January 18, 1899. ] RECORDS OF MEETINGS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCDTENCES. January, 1898, to December, 1898. RicHARD E. Donce, Recording Secretary. REGULAR BUSINESS MEETING. JANUARY 3, 18098. Academy met with President Stevenson in the chair. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The Sec- retary presented for election as Resident Members the names of the following candidates which had been duly approved by the Council. RESIDENT MEMBERS ELECTED. F. W. Devoe, tor Fulton street. W. G. Dewitt, 88 Nassau street. E. 1 Haines, New Rochelle. N: Y: Michel M. LeBrun, 8 Mountain avenue, Montclair, N. J. Charles S. Schultz, Hoboken, N. J. | 5. L: H. Ward, 67 Wall sttert: The Secretary was authorized to cast a ballot for the names read, and all were declared elected. The section of Astronomy and Physics then organized. J. F. Kemp, Secretary. (445 ) 446 RECORDS. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND CRY sles JANUARY 3, 1898. Mr. Dudley in the chair, eighteen members and guests pres- ent. W. Hallock was appointed Secretary, pro fem. Minutes of last meeting read and approved. The first paper was by H. Jacoby, entitled PHoToGRAPHIC RESEARCHES NEAR THE Nort POLE oF THE HEAVENS. Pro- fessor Jacoby explained how the “trail plates’ are taken with stationary telescope having in its field the north pole point, and pointed out how, after proper corrections, an improved location of the pole could be obtained as the common center of the trail arcs. The results are excellent, and bid fair to give much better values for declination than those obtained by other methods. The paper was discussed by Professor Rees, Mr. Post and Professor Hallock. The second paper was by P. H. Dudley, entitled THE Com- PLETION OF RELAYING THE TRACK OF THE BOSTON AND ALBANY RAILROAD WITH 95-LB. Rais. Mr. Dudley outlined the intro- duction of rails of improved material and section, and the gradual relaying of this line, showing how greatly the road was improved at all points, how heavier loads were carried, and how a gain was obtained in all directions. Meeting then adjourned. W. HIALLOGK; Secretary of Section, pro tem. SECTION“OF-BICLOG JANUARY I0, 1898. Professor Osborn in the chair, fifty-six persons present. The following programme was offered: H. F. Osborn, THE OrIGIN OF THE MAMMALIA. F. M. Chapman, Tue DistripuTion oF BirDs IN THE STATE OF VERA CRUZ. F. E. Lloyd, On HyprertropHieD LEAF-SCALES IN PINus PONDEROSA. RECORDS. 447 Professor Osborn showed that the speculation of recent au- thors (Cope, Baur, Osborn) regarding the ancestry of the mam- malia turns back to certain Permian reptiles of the orders Therio- dontia Owen, and Gomphodontia Seeley. He reviewed the characters of the skeleton of these Theriodontia, showing their unmistakable promammalian features. A number of persistent reptilian characters were also cited. In conclusion, the speaker said that these Theriodontia have the geological age required for ancestors of the mammalia, and are the only type of reptiles which exhibit mammalian affinities. Their great size and cer- tain adaptive specializations alone bar any known type from di- rect ancestry of the much smaller earliest mammals; but this fact does not preclude the existence of very small unspecialized forms which may have developed into the mammalian type. Pro- fessor Osborn’s paper was illustrated by lantern slides. Dr. Chapman described the various types of vegetation and the altitudinal distribution of birds along the course of the two railroads running from the coast at Vera Cruz into the table- lands of the interior. His paper was also illustrated by lantern slides. In answer to Professor Britton’s question whether the variations in air pressure have any influence in modifying bird structure, the speaker said apparently not. They undergo dif- ferent pressure, as shown by height of flight, and seem to thrive equally well under differing conditions of barometric pressure. Professor Lloyd showed that scales which subtend the fasci- cles of Pzxus ponderosa are morphologically equivalent to leaves ; and, when hypertrophied, these leaves closely resemble the leaf of the genus Pseudotsuga. The speaker suggested that the Pines may have been derived phylogenetically from a general- ized form represented by Pseudotsuga, and that the hypertro- phied leaves are atavistic. Gary N. CALKINS, Secretary of Section. 448 RECORDS: SECTION: OF “GEOLOGY JANUARY 17, 1808. Professor Kemp in the chair, fifteen persons present. The first paper was by Mr. Arthur Hollick, entitled Fur- THER NoTES ON Biock ISLAND GEOLOGY AND Botany. The speaker gave a summary of his work done on Block Island in July, 1897, and particularly of his success in tracing eastward from Long Island the Amboy clays which had previously been determined by paleontological evidence on Staten Island, Long Island and Martha’s Vineyard. Something like fifteen species of Middle Cretaceous flora, nine of them typical of the Amboy clays, have been found. Mr. Hollick then classified the existing flora of the Island physiographically into that of the hills, peat bogs, sand dunes and beaches, salt marshes and salt water. In the course of his work he has added to the already published lists something like twenty-four new species, although it is not considered that this by any means completes the list of possible species that might be found in the springtime. The flora as a whole is distinctly that of a morainal country, and its nearest analogue is that of Montauk Point. Mr. Hollick then offered some suggestions to account for the present peculiar flora of the island, and particularly for the ab- sence of certain species that would be expected, and showed that two elements are to be taken into consideration, the geolog- ical and the human. Block Island is the only part of the ter- minal moraine along the New England coast which does not have accompanying the moraine a certain amount of plain land which would naturally allow a variety in the flora. It is pre- sumable that Block Island also has been practically separated from the rest of the continent by a deep channel of more than twenty fathoms for a considerable time, and that even before the last depression of the land the island was connected with the mainland merely by a small peninsula. Hence the diversity of the flora as compared with the continent, because of the length of separation. KLECORDS. 449 The speaker also mentioned the extensive archeological dis- coveries on the west shore of the island, and gave a list of the shells and implements discovered in several of the kitchen mid- dens, and also of the bones of animals brought to light in the old fireplaces in the sand dunes. He made particular mention also of the great numbers of Lzttorina, the common periwinkle of Europe, which has never before been announced from Block Island. The paper was discussed by Professor Lloyd and Dr. Martin. The second paper of the evening was by Richard E. Dodge, entitled ScIENTIFIC GEOGRAPHY IN EpucaTion. The speaker brought out the point that geography work may be classified into three divisions, that for the common schools, the secondary schools, and the universities, and outlined briefly a few sugges- tions as to how the subject matter might be treated scientifically in each of the groups, and the dependence of each group upon the others. He paid particular attention to the difficulties of securing scientific work in geography in the grade schools, and to the fact that geography at present is extremely unsatisfactory in most of our schools, probably because of the lack of inspi- ration owing to the neglect of the subject hitherto in the universi- ties of the country. The paper was illustrated by the exhibi- tion of cheap and easily procurable maps, that can be used for scientific geography work of several grades. The meeting then closed with a few remarks by Professor Kemp, in reference to the famous classic, entitled LitHo- GRAPHLE WIRCENBURGENSIS DUCENTIS LAPIDUM FIGURANTORUM, A POTIORI INSECTIFORMIUM PRODIGIOSIS IMAGINIBUS EXORNATA, SPECIMEN PRIMUM, written by J. B. A. Beringer in 1726. Pro- fessor Kemp summarized the work of the author in attempting to explain a great collection of pseudo fossils from a theolog- ical standpoint, the fossils having previously been made by some practical jokers and buried in the rocks for the author to find. RicHARD E, DoncgE, Secretary of Section. 450 RECORDS: SECTION OF PSYCHOLOGY AND ANT OROrOLEeGy JANUARY 24, 1898. Professor Bliss in the chair. Fourteen names proposed for membership by the Secretary, were referred to the Council. The following papers were then presented : E. L. Thorndike, ExPpERIMENTS IN COMPARATIVE PSyYCHOL- OGY. H. J. Smith, Recenr ARCHEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS IN BRITISH COLUMBIA. L. Farrand, Report oF THE MEETING OF THE AMERICAN PSYCHOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION AT ITHACA. CHARLES B. BLIss, Secretary of Section. REGULAR. PURE see erukes: JANUARY 31, 1898. The Academy met in the Mott Memorial Library and listened to the second public lecture of the season, which was delivered by Professor Henry H. Rusby, of the College of Pharmacy, upon the subject, AN AFTERNOON ON A VENEZUELAN Bayou. Thirty persons were present and at the conclusion a vote thanking the speaker was passed. J. F. Kemp, Secretary. REGULAR BUSINESS MEETING FEBRUARY 7, 1808. The Academy met, with President Stevenson in the chair. About twenty-five members present. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. ‘The Secretary presented the following nominations of new members from the Council : RECORDS. 451 CORRESPONDING MEMBER ELECTED. Professor George E. Hale, Yerkes Observatory, Williams Bay, Wis. RESIDENT MEMBERS ELECTED. James Boyd, 12 Franklin street. Alfred S. Brown, 160 West 76th street. William Phelps Eno, 111 Broadway. William W. Hoppin, 111 Broadway. J. Morgan Howe, M.D., 58 West 47th street. John S. Kennedy, 6 West 57th street. Solomon Loeb, 37 East 38th street. Edwin S. Marston, 20 William street. George L. Nichols, 66 East 56th street. Wheeler H. Peckham, 685 Madison avenue. J. Hambden Robb, 23 Park avenue. Henry H. Rogers, 26 East 57th street. J. A. Roosevelt, 4 West 57th street. H. L. Thornell, 51 West 73d street. Spencer Trask, 27 Pine street. John I. Waterbury, Morristown, New Jersey. Frederick H. Wiggin, 55 West 36th street. Alfred R. Wolff, 15 West 89th street. C. A. Woodward, D.D.S., 49 West 36th street. George Zabriskie, 45 West 48th street. On motion the Secretary was instructed to cast a ballot for all the nominees, which was done. The Secretary presented the following recommendation from the Council, which, on motion, was adopted by ballot : Resolved, That in consideration of the extremely valuable and conscientious services to the Academy of Professor D. S. Martin, his past dues be hereby remitted, and that he be made a Life Member. AMENDMENTS TO By-Laws. The Secretary laid before the Academy the following amend- ments to the by-laws, which had been recommended by the Council : 452 RECORDS. Chapter I, to add Article 4: “The number of Fellows shall be limited to 100.” | Chapter V, Article 1, to add: “Past Presidents of the Acad- emy, residents of New York City, shall be advisory members of the Council, with a right to be present at the meetings and to serve on committees, but without vote. They shall be notified of all meetings.” The Section of Astronomy and Physics then organized. James F. Kemp, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND, PHySic=: FEBRUARY 7, 1898. The meeting was called to order with Mr. P. H. Dudley in the chair, twenty-one members and guests being present. The reading of the minutes of the last meeting was omitted, and the section proceeded with the programme of the evening. H. Jacoby took the chair; and P. H. Dudley read a paper, illustrated by lantern views, entitled THE UsE oF THE DUDLEY STREMMATOGRAPH FOR DETERMINING THE STRAINS PRODUCED IN Rairs By Movine Trains.”’ He described the use of the instrument in recording tensional and compressive stresses in steel rails under various kinds of traffic, and stated that much greater stresses exist in steel rails than are commonly supposed to be caused by locomotives and cars standing on or moving over them. After a few supplementary remarks in reply to questions, Mr. Dudley resumed the chair, and W. S. Day read a paper entitled RECENT EXPERIMENTS CONCERNING THE SpeciFIC HEAT oF WaTER. He discussed the results obtained by Rowland, Schuster, Bartoli, Griffiths and Miculescu, in measuring the mechanical equivalent of heat, and compared the results obtained by these scientists by means of curves. The paper was discussed by W. Hallock, H. Jacoby and others. After a few concluding remarks by Professor Jacoby, the meet- ing adjourned. R. Gorpbon, Secretary of Section. RECORDS. 453 SEC PION@Or BIOLOGY: FEBRUARY 14, 1898. Professor Osborn in the chair. Twenty-one persons present. The following programme was presented : George S. Huntington, THe EparTerIAL BRONCHIAL Sys- TEM of THE MAMMALIA. F. S. Lee, THE Function OF THE EAR AND LATERAL LINE IN FISHES. Professor Huntington’s paper dealt with the structure of the Bronchial System and with the pulmonary supply in various representatives of orders and families of the Mammalia. The conclusions reached are at variance, in their main points at least, with the views expressed by Professor Achy and with the gen- erally accepted views in the text-books of human and com- parative anatomy. The most primitive form appears to be Achy’s “bilateral hyparterial type,’ represented by Achy in Aystrix cristata, by Weber in Lalena mysticetus, and now by the author in Zaxidea Americana. In the other mammalia a distinct and progressive series can be established between the primitive types of bronchial distribu- tion and the most complex arrangement. Among the many conclusions reached by Professor Hunting- ton, we may note the following: The active agent in changing the architecture of the lung is not the pulmonary artery (Achy), but the migration of the cephalic primary trunk or its proximal secondary derivative for increasing respiratory area. The pul- monary artery, in the majority of forms, is lateral ; hence, dis- tinction in “ dorsal’ and “‘ ventral” should be abandoned, etc. Dr. Huntington’s paper was well illustrated by lantern slides. Dr. Lee, after describing his experiments on the auditory functions of certain fish, came to the following conclusions : (1) the otolithic organs mediate the perception of progressive move- ment; (2) all experiments for demonstrating the power of hear- ing in the customary sense, have failed, but destruction of the organs of the lateral line, combined with removal of the large pectoral and ventral fins in some species (Latrachus tau) causes ANNALS N. Y. AcaD. Sci., XI, January 18, 1899—39. 454 RECORDS. lack of appreciation of equilibrium, also central stimulation of lateral nerve causes coordinated compensating movements of the fins exactly similar to those caused by stimulation of the acous- tic nerve. The inference then is that the organs of the lateral line are sense organs of equilibrium analogous to the ear; (3) the ear is a derivative of the lateral line. Dr. Lee’s paper was illustrated by models, charts and dia- grams. Dr. J. A. Blake was nominated for membership, and referred to Council. Gary N. CALKINS, Secretary of Section. STATED MEETING: FEBRUARY 21, 1898. The Academy met with President Stevenson in the chair. Seventeen members present. The Secretary presented the following nominations for resi- dent membership : Robert F. Cornish, 123 Claremont avenue, Montclair, N. J. Mrs. Henry Draper, 271 Madison avenue, New York. Rev. “Dr. Henry Mitchell. McCracken, (D9. -Lie Dees York University. Mr. G. F. Kunz presented a circular relating to the proposed dinner of the Scientific Alliance and urged all the members of the Academy to be present. ° SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. FEBRUARY 21, 1808. Professor Kemp in the chair. In the absence of the Secre- tary, Mr. Gilbert van Ingen was elected Secretary, pro fem. The first paper was by George F. Kunz, entitled A REcENT DISCOVERY OF HUGE QUARTZ CRYSTALS IN THE WEsr. The RECORDS. 455 crystals were found in the neighborhood of Grass Valley, Cal., in placer gold mines and, although somewhat waterworn, are re- ported to be of great size and clearness. One is said to weigh a ton. The paper was discussed by Messrs. Levison and Kemp. The second paper related to the exhibition of recent acces- sions of rare minerals, loaned for the purpose, by Professor A. J. Moses. Among the rest a large specimen of cellular rock with coats of Huantahajite, the whole being 8 inches square, was of particular interest. In the absence of Professor Moses the specimens were commented on by the Chairman and by Professor Chester. The third paper was by Professor F. D. Chester, entitled KRENNERITE FROM CRIPPLE CREEK, Cor. The speaker re- marked on the rarity of the mineral and described his good for- tune in obtaining a specimen with crystals capable of being measured, which were now being studied by Professor Penfield of Yale. The paper led to a considerable discussion upon the occurrence of the telluride ores, by Messrs. Caswell, Chester, Kunz and Kemp. Professor Kemp then exhibited some specimens of the Nephe- line Syenite from Dungannon, Ont., which he had received from Mr. F. J.. Pope, and which showed crystals of Corundum of large size, forming an original mineral in the rock. Dr. W. G. Levison exhibited some microscopic mounts of minerals in small pasteboard boxes. A paper by Stuart Weller, entitled DrEscriprion or DE- VONIAN CRINOIDS AND BLASTOIDS FROM MILWAUKEE, WIS., was read by title. On motion the meeting adjourned. GILBERT VAN INGEN, Secretary, pro tem. 456 RECORDS. ANNUAL BUSINESS MEETING. FEBRUARY, 21, 1808. The Academy met with President Stevenson in the chair. Fifty persons present. There being no minutes to read, the President called for the Annual Reports of the various officers. REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY. The year now closing has been a successful and gratifying one in the history of the Academy. The meetings have been well attended, the quality of the papers good, and the general interest in the affairs of the organization has been pronounced. The membership has increased beyond any previous figure in its history. There have been nine meetings of the Council, nine regular business meetings of the Academy, twenty-two additional stated meetings, five public lectures, one public reception, and two re- ceptions to distinguished scientific visitors from abroad. The Section of Astronomy and Physics has held eight meet- ings, with an average attendance of twenty; the Section of Bi- ology has held eight, with an average attendance of twenty- four; the Section of Geology and Mineralogy eight, with an average of thirty-three; the Sub-section of Philology three, averaging twenty-seven; and the Sub-section of Psychology and Anthropology four, with about the same number. A total of eighty-three papers has been presented, not includ- ing Public Lectures, which may be classified as follows : Anatomy I Geology 16 Anthropology 5 Mechanics I Archeology 2 Mineralogy 4 Astronomy 6 Paleontology 8 Botany I Philology 5 Civil Engineering 1 Physics 9 Chemistry 4 Psychology 2 Geography 3 Zoology 18 RECORDS. 457 Fifty-one new members have been elected, nine have resigned, and three have died, leaving a total of 330 on the Secretary’s list, a gain of 39 over last year. As stated above, the resident membership of the Academy is now the largest in its history. One Honorary Member has been elected and ten nominations are pending. One Corresponding Member has been elected and the nominations of fifteen are pending. Nineteen Resident Members have been elected Fellows. In connection with the publications the Council has decided that it is inadvisable to issue two octavo series and a quarto. The Z7ransactions will therefore be discontinued with Volume XVI and will be merged into the Annats, beginning Volume XI of the latter. While the same size of page will be pre- served a new and more desirable font of type has been chosen. The records of the meetings will be printed separately from the scientific papers. The volumes will also run coincidently with the calendar years. The by-laws have been amended so as to abolish the fee for election as Fellow. And so as to limit the number of Fel- lows to one hundred. The public reception of the Academy in March last passed off most successfully and the exhibition has now become an annual event, anticipated both within and without the Academy. The Academy extended to Sir Archibald Geikie in May last a reception which proved a very enjoyable occasion; and in October offered its hospitalities to Dr. Albrecht Penck. Respectfully submitted, J. F. Kemp, Recording Secretary. ANNUAL REPORT OF THE TREASURER. RECEIPTS. Balance on hand as ‘per last Annual Report. ...-.. $394.89 Panciibution to: Audubeneh utd ee 100.00 mace: of Audubon und’. tise wastes Gasnle ll. 89.86 458 RECORDS. income ol Pabheation Fund 5256 tae ee ee $60.00 “ Permanent Fund.3\2. 22a eee 300.14 ite Memberships Fee? 2/21 .:.): eee 100.00 Pnttiation Fees! o.s ole SR ae eee 250.00 ammeal doves.) GOa. nak Sees $10.00 aS Of UNBOISS co 21a eee aeieeemaetarae 30.00 ‘> ES OO gee eh te eee ee 80.00 . (0 S807 «xs ee eee 2,035.00 o nS SSIS Bc9s if Cetin eg ae 2900.00: 2,445.00 Proceeds Salesot, Electrical Fixtures: 253. ee 20.00 $3,759.89 DISBURSEMENTS. Wet Cow of Publishing Avinals’. Lea $690.14 Net Cest of Publishing Transactions> <9) 425 24 1,033,7% Expenses.ot Recordine Secretary..- 11-7) ee 380.68 s Secretary of Biological Section’ 7. 7.) 15.22 ae SB GAFIAIE- a 2'.J-Pin miles eo ee ee 82.46 Cost -of Accession to lkibraty S2c.g oe eee [4.93 Expenses or Dreastirer: aire ee ee ee eee 2463 Janitorial Services ts Fi" are eae eee ee oe 48.00 Rent.of itooms, Oct.’ 11607, to Janet, 1S0d7 2 ea. 70.00 Insurance: Premiums 2/7 95 208 es ce ee eee KG"37. Expenses wor Wectures s/t... year kee. eee eee 58.00 “ Fourth Annual Reception. (4 ee 546.52 2 NiGWiihe< | 470g he co aoe eee 22.63 $3,022.49 Balance. Cash now on hands... 737.40 DETAILS OF PERMANENT FUND. Balance on hand as per last Annual Report....... $348.68 Life Membership Fee received during the year .. .. 100.00 Initiation Fees received during the year ja eae 250.00 Balance now-on hand 2.2 5)) eras $698.68 RECORDS. 459 DETAILS OF AUDUBON FUND. Contribution received from Mrs. Esther Hermann.. $100.00 Income from Bond and Mortgage Investment ..... 89.86 ieareed back to Publication, Fund... 2. V2... - 23.00 Balance now Of mate. .o seth. ess $212.86 DETAILS OF PUBLICATION FUND. Income from Bond and Mortgage Investment ..... $60.00 Credited back to Audubon Fund..... $2 3.00 Credited to General Income a/c .-:... 37.00 $60.00 DETAILS OF GENERAL INCOME ACCOUNT. Balance brought down as per last Annual Report. . $46.21 meee om Permanent Mand: 5... 0:06 62 60 ee +.5) 300.14 2 Pe iica mon twits. . 25. ee eek es es 37.00 Peeceecds sale-o! Flectrical Fixtures............. 20.00 Reever tor intial Des 5... cn ees eke ages oo 2,445.00 $2,848.35 cess : Net Cost of Publishing Annals and Transactions... $1,723.85 eM, GG io ean er 509.99 Rent of Rooms, Janitorial Services and Cost of ra ig a ee ee a 150.63 Post of Accessionus'te Library.) os... 2 $14/13 Bean Oh CERES a) ees So8 oe no sha Saker ei 58.00 Gost-of Fourth Annual. Reception... ... 546.52 fasurance Prete. 22007000... % ed ex. 10.37 $3,023.40 Deficiency in Income to meet Current Expenses... 174.14 SUMMARY. Balance to credit of Permanent Fund............ $698.68 " ‘<. VAnidabon Fai) OG 212.86 $Q1I.54 Bens Deicit uw teneran amciine oe oy ey). 174.14 Balance, Cash on hand ..... eee er $737.40 460 RECORDS: ASSETS Casha, Dankisdierient fori" aks hn A ee $737.40 Investments in Bonds and Mortgages, aye tenmanent und, - ee eee $8,402.75 aie Publication: (und 22.4. urewemee 1,800.00 ajc Audubon, und’. .aneeen er eee 1,797.25 $12,000.00 Annual Dues, in arrears, Pof-1805' igo See 20.00 8 PG OO eee eee ee 140.00 DSO 7 Ges sue koa Seek tee ea 21O100 470.00 Totals 25 poe eas, oe ee eee $13,207.40 AS avainst amount last year wae gee 12,644.89 Respectfully submitted, CoCo Treasurer. On motion the report was referred to the Finance Committee for auditing. HONORARY MEMBERS ELECTED. The following nominations of Honorary Members were then presented from the Council : Professor Arthur Anweers, Berlin. Professor W. K. Brooks, Johns Hopkins University, Balti- more. Dr. David Gill, Astronomical Observatory, Cape of Good Hope. Dr; George W.osrll, Nyack, N.Y: Professor E. Ray Lankester, Oxford, England. Professor Albrecht Penck, Vienna, Austria. Professor W. Pfeffer, Leipzig, Germany. Professor Hans Reusch, Christiania, Norway. Professor Karl von Zittel, Munich, Germany. Professor R. Virchow, Berlin. On motion, the Secretary was instructed to cast a ballot for all the nominees, which was done and they were declared elected. KECORDS. 461 CORRESPONDING MEMBERS ELECTED. The following nominations of Corresponding Members were presented from the Council : Professor F. D. Adams, Montreal. Professor W. B. Balfour, Edinboro, Scotland. Professor George Baur, Chicago. Dr. William Carruthers, British Museum, London. Professor T. C. Chamberlin, Chicago. Professor William M. Davis, Cambridge, Mass. me A. Pranchet, Paris. Professor J. P. Iddings, Chicago. Professor C. S. Minot, Boston. Dr. George Murray, British Museum, London. Professor W. B. Scott, Princeton, N. J. Professor C. O. Whitman, Chicago. Professor H. S. Williams, New Haven. Mr. C. D. Walcott, Washington. On motion the Secretary was instructed to cast a ballot for all the nominees, and they were declared elected. ELECTION OF OFFICERS. The Academy then proceded to the election of officers for the ensuing year. The following ticket was elected by ballot: President, Henry F. Osborn. 7st Vice-President, Nathaniel L. Britton. 2a Vice-President, James F. Kemp. Corresponding Secretary, William Stratford. Recording Secretary, Richard E. Dodge. Treasurer, Charles F. Cox. Librarian, Arthur Hollick. Councilors, Charles L. Bristol, Bashford Dean, Charles A. Doremus,, William Hallock, Harold Jacoby, Lawrence A. Mc- Louth. Curators, Harrison G. Dyar, Alexis A. Julien, Géotee EF Kunz, Louis H. Laudy, William D. Schoonmaker. finance Committee, Henry Dudley, John H. Hinton, Cor- nelius Van Brunt. 462 RECORDS. ANNUAL ADDRESS OF RETIRING PRESIDENT, J. J. STEVENSON. On the announcement of the election, President Osborn took the chair and assumed control of the meeting. Retiring Presi- dent Stevenson then delivered the annual Presidential Address upon the subject, THe DeBr oF THE WoRLD TO PURE SCIENCE. The addfess appears in the ANNALS, Vol. XI, pp. 177-192. At the conclusion of the address, President Osborn expressed the thanks of the Academy to the speaker, and the meeting ad- journed. REGULAR BUSINESS MERTING: MARCH 7, 1808. President Osborn in the chair, fifteen members present. Min- utes of last meeting read and approved. The amendments to the by-laws proposed at the February meeting were both carried. The Secretary presented for the Council the following names for Resident Membership, and he was authorized to cast one ballot for the list, which was done. RESIDENT MEMBERS ELECTED. Robert H. Cornish, 123 Claremont avenue, Montclair, N. J. Henry Mitchell MacCracken, D.D., LL.D., New York Uni- versity. Dr. Joseph A. Blake, 437 West 59th street. Mrs. M. A. P. Draper, 271 Madison avenue. MEMBERS PROPOSED. The following nominations were read and referred to the council : Life member, Miss Catherine W. Bruce, 810 Fifth avenue ; nominated by J. K. Rees. Resident members, S. B. Hoffman, Morristown, N. J. nomina- ted by Harold Jacoby. RECORDS. 463 Douglass Burnett, 42 Livingston street, Brooklyn, N. Y.; nominated by P. H. Dudley. The following paper was read by title, and referred to Publi- cation Committee : THE NorTHROP COLLECTION OF CRUSTACEA, by Professor Walter M. Rankin, of Princeton, illustrated by three plates. The Section of Astronomy and Physics then organized. RICHARD E. DODGE, Secretary. SCION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS. Marcu 7, 1898. Meeting was called to order by the Chairman, Mr. P. H. Dudley, there being eighteen persons present. The first busi- ness of the meeting was the election of officers for the ensuing year. Nominations being declared open, J. K. Rees nominated P. H. Dudley as Chairman. There being no other nominations, the Secretary was empowered to cast one ballot for Mr. Dudley; and he was declared elected Chairman. R. Gordon was nomi- nated Secretary by W. Hallock. There being no other nomi- nations, the Secretary was empowered to cast one ballot for him; and he was thereby declared elected. The next business was the reading of papers. Romeyn Hitchcock read a paper entitled, InpusTRIAL APPLi- CATIONS OF OxyGEN in which he described a gas enriched by oxygen for the purpose of increasing its heating power. He compared the composition of this gas, with which experiments have been carried on recently, with that of several of the usual gases commercially employed for lighting and heating. After brief discussion, W. Hallock described a Maxke-Circuit PEN- DULUM, and showed a working model of the same. After some discussion, the meeting adjourned at 9:20 P. M. ne R. GORDON, Secretary of Section. 464 RECORDS: STATED MEETING MaArcH 14, 1808. President Osborn in the chair. Secretary read the following nominations of committees made by the President, from the body of the Council for the en- suing year. Committee on Publication: President and Secretary, Professors Dean, Jacoby, McLouth, Kemp and Britton. As representatives of the New York Academy of Sciences in the Scientific Alliance: The President, Professor Stevenson and Mir. Cox: Secretary then made announcement of the proposed grant of the Newberry Fund for the ensuing year. Section of Biology then formed. RIcHARD E. DODGE, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY: Marcu 14, 1898. Professor Wilson in the Chair. Twenty-three persons pres- ent. The following program was offered : 1. B. B. Griffin, A Drescrirrion oF SOME MARINE NEMER- TEANS FROM PUGET SOUND AND ALASKA. 2. W. H. Hornaday, THe Desrrucrion oF BIRDS IN THE UNITED STATES. : 3. N. R. Harrington, REporT ON THE CRUSTACEA OF PUGET SOUND. 4. H. E. Crampton, Jr., AN Important INSTANCE OF INSECT COALESCENCE. In the absence of the author, Mr. Griffin’s paper was read by title. Mr. Hornaday first described the method employed to reduce bird loss to figures. Circulars containing the following ques- tions were sent out to trappers, guides, sportsmen and natural- ists in all parts of the United States. (1) Are birds decreasing RECORDS. 465 in your locality? (2) How many birds are there now com- pared with fifteen years ago? (3) What are the most destruc- tive agents? (4) Are any birds becoming extinct? The answers came from all but four States and territories, and showed surprising agreement. The most destructive agencies are sportsmen, plume-hunters, boys after eggs, pot-hunters, fire, English sparrows, etc.; and through these it has been esti- mated that there has been a decrease of about 46% during the last fifteen years. It was shown that game and edible birds are becoming scarce, and that song birds are being used for food in their stead ; that plume-birds are becoming extinct, and that de- structive agencies are increasing. Mr. Hornaday concluded with an appeal for more drastic measures in our game laws and for their careful execution. The paper was discussed by the Chairman, by Professor Osborn and by Mr. Mathews. Mr. Harrington’s report was based on the Crustacea col- lected at Puget Sound in 1896, and worked up by W. T. Cal- man, University College, Dundee, Scotland. It dealt with sixty- three species, some three of which were new. One of the new species, a parasite, Psewdione giard., is interesting because males, female, and larva, were all found on a single specimen of its host Lupagurus ochotensis ; another new species, Polycheria os- borni is interesting because the only other known representative of the genus is found in the Antarctic region. The entire col- lection was made up as follows: Macrura, 15 species (13 of which were shrimps); Srachyura, 34 species; [sopoda, 6 spe- cies; Amphipoda, 3 species; Copepoda, I species. Mr. Crampton spoke of his experiments on insect-grafting, and of one case in particular where the colors of the scales of one species were imposed upon the scales of another. The paper was discussed by Dr. Dyar and others. The Secretary of the Academy notified the Section that the income of the John Strong Newberry Fund of the Council of the Scientific Alliance is to be awarded this year to a paleon- tologist or a zoologist ; and that a candidate should be chosen before the Council meeting of April 2d. Gary N. CALKINS, Secretary of Section. 466 RECORDS. SIATED MEBITEING: MarcH 21, 1898. President Osborn in the chair. Minutes of meeting of Feb- ruary were read and approved. Secretary read the following paper by title: THE PHYSIOLOGY OF SECRETION, by Albert P. Mathews. Section of Geology and Mineralogy then formed. RICHARD E. DODGE, Secretary, SECTION OF GEOLOGY. AND: MINERMEOG MARCH 21, 18098. Professor Kemp in the chair. Thirty-four members present. Minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. Secretary read a letter from the Secretary of the Scientific Alliance mm reference to the Newberry grant for paleontology or zoology. The paper of the evening, illustrated by lantern, was by Dr. Heinrich Ries, entitled THe Cray anp Kaorin DEposits OF Europe. Dr. Ries sketched briefly the geographical distribu- tion of the Kaolin deposits, and their relation and comparison to similar deposits of America. He then gave special attention to the deposits of Great Britain, Belgium, Denmark, Germany and Austria, and mentioned briefly those found in other regions He described particularly the deposits of Cornwall, which are found in association with veins of Tin and Granite in regions where it is supposed that the Feldspar has been changed to Kaolin through the influence of fluoric fumes rising from below. These products are very pure, containing 97 %4 % of clay substance. He also spoke of the ball plastic clays found in southwestern Eng- land, which occur in lenses in large beds of sand, and are used to mix with non-plastic kaolins. Refractory clays are found in England and Scotland in the Carboniferous rocks, and are worked by underground mining. Impure clays, used for bricks, are par- ticularly found in the vicinity of London. The Staffordshire ce COR DS. 467 blue brick, Fuller’s earth and Bath brick deposits were sketched briefly, and the technological treatment in Great Britain, Ger- many and the United States was compared. The latter part of the paper was devoted to a rapid summary of the position, quality, uses and manner of mining of the famous clays of Bornholm, Denmark ; of the Glasspot clays of southeastern Belgium ; of the Kaolin deposits of Limoges, France, and the deposits of Prussia. The paper was discussed by Dr. Julien, the Chairman, and Professor Hallock. Professor Henry F. Osborn described the progress this year made through international effort in correlating the larger divi- sions of the fresh water Tertiary deposits of Europe by a study of the vertebrate remains. Professor J. F. Kemp was nominated for Chairman of the Sec- tion for the ensuing year. There being no other nomination he was unanimously elected. Dr. Heinrich Ries was nominated for Secretary of the Section and unanimously elected. Academy adjourned at 9:15. | RicHARD E. DonceE, Secretary of Section. SUB-SECTION OF PHILOLOGY. MarcH 28, 1808. Meeting called to order by Chairman, Professor T. R. Price. Officers for the ensuing year were elected: Lawrence A. Mc- Louth, Chairman, A. V. Williams Jackson, Secretary. Moved and carried to request Council of Academy to pro- vide for four meetings of Philological Section for 1898-99. The following papers were read and discussed : E. G. Sihler, Tue carrer part or Lucretius, AND Epicurus TEN PETEWO POY. J. R. Wheeler, THE Newry Discoverep Poems or Baccuy- LIDES. 468 KECOKDS. B. D. Woodward, THE VowELs OF THE RUMANIAN AND OTHER ROMANCE LANGUAGES. On account of the lateness of the hour, the reading of the last paper on the programme was postponed. LawRENcE A. McLoutu, Secretary of Section. REGULAR: BUSINESS MEETENG: APRIL 4, 19890: Academy met at 8:10, President H. F. Osborn in the chair. Minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. Secretary submitted the following list of names that had been approved by the Council for election, and was authorized to cast one ballot for the same, which was done. MEMBERS ELECTED. Miss Catherine W. Bruce, 810 Fifth avenue, Life Member Douglas Burnett, 42 Livingston street, Brooklyn. S. V. Hoffman, Morristown, N. J. MEMBERS PROPOSED. The following candidates for membership were read and re- ferred to the Council under the rules: Francisco G. P. Ledo, Chancellor of the Brazilian Consulate. C..E. Tripler, 121 West oth street: De L: T? Chamberlain, 123 Muth avenue. The President appointed Mr. P. H. Dudley as the represen- tative of the Academy in the Sctentific Alliance, in the place of Professor J. J. Stevenson, resigned. The Secretary made announcement of the changes to be in- corporated in the eleventh volume of the ANNALS, now under way, with certain new regulations in reference to the printing of papers, and gave a statement of recent business transacted by the Council. Section of Astronomy and Physics then organized. RICHARD E. DonGE, Secretary. RECORDS. 469 SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS. APRIL 4, 1898. The Section organized with Mr. P. H. Dudley, the Chairman, presiding. There were sixteen persons present. After the reading of the minutes of the last meeting, the following papers were presented : Mr. W. G. Levison showed a PHOTOGRAPHED EYE-PIECE MIcRoMETER, and described the construction of it, also speaking of micro-organisms as a complication in washing photographic plates. He, in addition to this, described and showed a model of a simple phosphoroscope. The discussion on these subjects was participated in by W. Hallock, C. F. Cox, H. F. Osborn, and C. C. Trowbridge. The next paper was entitled A MopiricaTIoN oF MANCE’s MetuHop oF MEASURING BATTERY ReEsISsTANCE, by W. S. Day. This was treated mathematically by Dr. Day at considerable length. After this Frank Schlesinger read a short paper upon THE PR#SEPE GROUP, mentioning the measurement and reduc- tion of the Rutherford photographs of this group. After a few questions by members on the subject of the measurements the meeting adjourned. REGINALD GORDON, Secretary of Section. SECTION: OF BIOLOGY. APRIL II, 1898. Professor Wilson in the chair. Eighteen persons present. Election of sectional officers for ensuing year. Dr. Dean sec- onded by Professor Stratford, moved that Professor Wilson and Mr. Calkins be reelected to their respective offices, and the Secretary was directed to cast one affirmative ballot. The following programme was announced : 1. 0. S. Strong, A New PoInTt ON THE INNERVATION OF THE LATERAL LINE ORGANS. ANNALS N. Y. AcaD. Sci., XI, January 18, 1899—31 470 RECORDS. 2. A. P. Mathews, THE PuysioLoGy oF SECRETION. 3. G. N. Calkins, THE OriGIn oF Protozoan NUCLEI. 4. F. C. Paulmier, SPERMATOGENESIS IN HEMIPTERA. | Dr. Strong explained some exceptions which have been urged to the view that the lateral line organs are innervated exclusively by special roots having a common center in the medulla. Among these exceptions is the innervation of a certain canal- organ by a branch of the glossopharyngeus instead of by a lat- eral line nerve proper. Dr. Strong showed that, close to the medulla in the young dog-fish (Sgwalus acanthias) a small intra- cranial bundle of fibers becomes detached from the lateral line root, and fuses with the glossopharyngeus. This bundle retains its identity, shown by greater calibre, etc. On emerging from the auditory capsule the bundle becomes detached and passes to a canal organ. Similar fibers described by Kingsbury in Anua, would probably be found to have the same history. The three other papers were read by title, the authors not being present. H. E. CRAMPTON, Secretary of Section, pro tem. FIFTH ANNUAL EXHIBITION, APRIL 13 AND 14, 1808. The Fifth Annual Reception was held in the American Mu- seum of Natural History, April 13 and 14, 1898, under the control of the following committee, assisted by the chairmen of fifteen departments of science: Henry F. Osborn, Reginald Gordon,- Charles: F: 1Cox,: Gary IN Calkins;eand, Racharadae: Dodge, Chairman. The exhibition lasted two evenings and one afternoon, and was attended by an estimated umber of more than 6,000 people. The annual lecture was given April 14th by Professor George E. Hale, of Yerkes Observatory, on ‘THE FuNcTION OF LARGE TELESCOPES.”” Several demonstrations of Liquid Air were given by Mr. Charles E. Tripler. RECORDS. 471 The programme and catalogue of this exhibition is printed as an appendix to Part I of Vol. XI of the ANNALs. RICHARD E. DODGE, Secretary. STATED. MEE LENG. APRIL 18, 18098. Academy met with Vice-President Kemp in the chair, in Schermerhorn Hall, Columbia University. Minutes of the meeting for March were read and approved. Letters of thanks from Professor J. P. Iddings and Frank P. Adams, accepting the honor of being elected Corresponding Members were read. Having no further business, the Section of Geology and Mineralogy then formed. RICHARD E. DOonpcE, Secretary. Sec ltiONn OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. APRIL 18, 1898. Professor Kemp in the chair. Thirty-five members present. Professor Kemp made a few opening remarks and was fol- lowed by Dr. A. A. Julien who read a paper entitled THE ELEMENTS OF STRENGTH AND WEAKNESS IN BUILDING STONES. Dr. Julien called attention to the fact that in the testing of building stones little consideration is given to the causes influ- encing their various properties. In judging the resistance which a stone shows towards weathering, care should be taken to rec- ognize the character of the forces to which it has been sub- jected. The strength of a stone bears no relation to its mineral components, but is dependent on the shape and arrangement of the mineral grains and the character of the cementing material. In considering the strength of a stone four facts have to be kept in mind, viz.: interlockment of the particles; coherence, de- 472 RECORDS. pendent on the character of the cement and adhesion of the grains ; rigidity and tension. The “quarry sap,” Dr. Julien be- lieves, plays a more important role than has hitherto been rec- ognized, as it probably carries much of the cement in solution and deposits it only when the stone is exposed to the air. This accounts for the hardening of the stones after being quarried. A distinction should also be made between porosity due to cavities between the grains and interstices in the individual min- etals. The former is a source of weakness; the latter not, al- though either may cause the rock to exhibit a high absorptive capacity. All of these points, which have an important bearing on the strength of building stones are best studied with the microscope. The paper was illustrated by means of sectiors thrown on the screen with a polarizing lantern. Discussion was by Professor Kemp and Mrs. Dudley. The second paper of the evening was by J. D. Irving on CONTACT-METAMORPHISM OF THE PALISADES DIABASE. Mr. Irving referred to the work done by Professor Osann and Andrae some years ago and stated that his results agreed with theirs, but recent railroad excavations at Shadyside had enabled him to obtain additional facts. The Diabase flow becomes denser, finer grained and porphyritic towards the contact, with a decrease of Hypersthene. In addition to zones found by Osann, © Mr. Irving found: 1. A normal hornfels zone rich in Spinel. 2. A hornfels zone with brown basaltic hornblende layers. 3. Hornfels with an undeterminable isotropic mineral resemb- ling Leucite. 4. Hornfels with Andalusite, gradually chang- ing to Arkose farther from the contact. The Diabase is to be considered as an intruded mass and nota surface flow. The paper was discussed by Professors Kemp, Dodge, Dr. Hovey and Mr. White. Owing to the lateness of the hour the reading of the other two papers on the programme was deferred until the next meet- ing. Academy adjourned at 10:15. HEINRICH RIEs, Secretary of Section. RECORDS: 473 SUBSECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. APRIL 25, 1898. President Osborn in the chair. After some discussion, the section asked the chair to appoint a committee of four to confer with the council in reference to the number of meetings to be held by the Section of Psychology and Anthropology during the coming year. The committee appointed consisted of Messrs. Bliss, Farrand, McLouth and Boas. The following papers were then presented : J. D. Prince, Some Passamaquoppy DOCUMENTS. L. McWhood, A Meruop or StupyinG THE Motor EFFECTS oF Music. After the papers Charles B. Bliss was elected Secretary of the subsection for the coming year. CHARLES B. BLIss, Secretary of Section. RGU kK PUBLIC LECTURE. The third public lecture of the year was delivered Friday evening, April 29, 1898, at the Mott Memorial Library, by James Douglass, Esq., of New York, on the subject: Furry YEARS’ PROGRESS IN MINING AND METALLURGY IN THE UNITED STATES. The lecture was copiously illustrated by lantern slides, and was both descriptive and statistical. The changes in centers of production and the improvements in furnaces were shown for iron, copper and the precious metals. At the conclusion of the lecture there was passed a vote of thanks to Mr. Douglass. Forty members and friends were present. RIcHARD E. DOonDGE, Secretary. 474 RECORDS. SPATED MEETING OF THE TACADEMa. May 2, 1808. Academy met at 8 P. M., Mott Memorial Library. President Osborn in the chair. In the absence of the Secretary, Mr. William Hallock was appointed Secretary, pro tem. Minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. MEMBERS ELECTED. The following candidates for election, approved by the Coun- cil, were read by the Secretary who was authorized to cast one ballot for them, which he did. Dr: L.. Y.Chamberlin) 125) Piith-avenue. Francisco G; P. Weso0, 23 State streck: Charles E> Tnipler;- 121 West. Soth street. AMENDMENTS TO By-Laws. The following amendments to the by-laws recommended by Mr. C. F. Cox, Mr. Wm. Hallock and Mr. Edmund B. Wilson, a committee acting for the Council, were read and laid on the table for one month, in accordance with the rules: 1. That Section 2 of Chapter I of the by-laws be repealed. 2. That a new section be added to Chapter I, entitled Sec- tion 2, as follows: “Any Resident Member or Fellow, who shall resign because of removal to a distance from the city of New York, may be re- stored to Membership or Fellowship at any time upon his own application, by a vote of the Council, and without payment of initiation fee.”’ A series of letters of acceptance were read by the Secretary from several of the new Corresponding Members. Section of Astronomy and Physics then organized. WILLIAM HALLOcK, Secretary, pro tem. RECORDS. 475 SRLBION-OF BIOLOGY. MEETING OF May g, 1898. Professor Wilson in the chair, twenty-three persons present. The following programme was offered : 1. C. L. Bristol, MEAsuREMENTS oF A LARGE LOBSTER CAUGHT OFF SANDY Hook. 2. H. L. Clarke, Notes on BERMUDA ECHINODERMS, pre- sented by C. L. Bristol. a. 0. P.. Keppel and Go N. Calkins, F REPORT ON THE Hy- DROIDS COLLECTED IN PUGET SOUND. 4. E. B. Wilson, ON THE STRUCTURE OF PROTOPLASM IN THE EGcGs oF ECHINODERMS AND SOME OTHER ANIMALS. 5. In addition to the above Professor Osborne reported on some facts concerning a huge herbivorous Dinosaur, bringing out in particular the discovery of some hitherto unknown char- acters of the caudal vertebre, and the peculiarly avian structure of the posterior cervical and the anterior dorsal vertebre. Gary N. CALKINS, Secretary of Section. se CliON OF GEOLOGY. AND. MINERALOGY. May 16, 1898. Professor Kemp in the chair. Ten persons present. Minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. Mr. Geo. F. Kunz exhibited specimens of Quartz crystals in massive Gypsum from Gallineo Springs, N. Mex., and announced the discovery of a new meteorite from Ottawa, Kansas. The first paper on the programme was by Professor D. S. Martin on THE GeEoLocy oF CoLumsiA, S. C., AND ITs VI- cinity. Professor Martin described the granitic and gneissic rocks of that region, and their residual products. He also com- mented on the character of the Potomac, Lafayette and Colum- bian formations which are well exposed in the railroad cuts south of the city. 476 RECORDS. The paper was discussed by Mr. Dodge and Dr. Ries. The next paper of the evening was by Professor Kemp, en- titled SOME REMARKS ON TITANIFEROUS MaGnetitTes. The speaker discussed the formula of Ilmenite, and stated that it was probably a mixture of FeO, TiO,, and z FeO,. The amount of Titanium present in the titaniferous magnetites is very variable, running sometimes as high as 40% ; in the Adirondack ores it running 10-20%. Magnetic methods of separation for the elimination of the Ti- tanium have not yet proved successful. Nearly all of the titanif- erous magnetites show small amounts of MnO, Cr,O,, CoO, NiO, V,O,and MgO. The latter suggests the presence of Spinel. SiO, and AI,O, have also been found, but Phosphorus and Sulphur are rare. Professor Kemp suggested that the rarer constituents might have some influence on the metallurgical behavior of the ore. The native and foreign occurrences of these ores were - also alluded to. Discussion of the paper was by Professor Martin, Dr. Ries and Mr. Kunz. Owing to Dr. Ries’ removal to Cornell University, his resig- nation as Secretary of Section was accepted, and Mr. Geo. F. Kunz elected Secretary for the remainder of the year. Meeting adjourned at 10 P. M. HEINRICH RIEs, Secretary of Section. SECTION “OF PHEROLGGr Way..22,. tage: The Section of Philology held its closing meeting for the year 1897 and 1898 on Monday evening, May 23d. The at- tendance numbered fifteen persons. Professor J. F. Kemp opened the session and presented Professor L. A. McLouth, the Chairman of the Section, who thereupon assumed the duties of presiding officer for the coming year. Professor T. R. Price brought forward a contribution in RECORDS. 477 which he gave the results of his study of SHALL AND WILL IN Livinc EncuisH Usace. Dr. Price’s investigations were con- fined to works that have appeared since 1850, in order to get the results of present usage. He chose as typical writings (1) a file of the London Spectator from August, 1897, to January, 1898 ; (2) The Poems of Stephen Philips; (3) The Essay of Henley on Robert Burns; (4) The Poems of Matthew Arnold ; (5) The Idyls of Tennyson that have appeared since 1850. He presented only that part of his paper which dealt with the first person; the second and third persons are reserved to be printed. His results showed that shad/, should are the normal usage in the first person; / wl and / would in best usage are regularly con- fined to the idea of volition. The distinction seems to be quite sharply made in the best writers; and the number of occur- rences is equally balanced. Several of those present took part in the discussion that followed. The second paper of the evening was by Professor L. ‘A. McLouth, and was entitled, Norres on E. JosepH’s KuREN- BURG THEORY. Dr. McLouth emphasized the strong points in Joseph’s monograph, but criticised the tendency which the writer showed at times, it seemed, somewhat arbitrarily to re- construct the text on the basis of a preconceived theory. Dr. McLouth favored rather a more conservative method. Shortly after ten o’clock the meeting adjourned. A. V. WILLIAMS JACKSON, Secretary. STATED MEETING. JUNE 6, 1808. Academy met at 64 Madison avenue, Vice-President Britton in the chair. Minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The changes in the by-laws which were to be brought up for adoption at this meeting were laid over until October, a legal quorum not being present. 478 RECORDS. After a notice by the Secretary about the meeting place for next year, the Section of Astronomy and Physics organized. RICHARD E. DopaGE, Secretary. SECTION ‘OF ASTRONOMY Ey Slee: JUNE 6, 1898. Regular monthly meeting of the Section was held on Mon- day, June 6th, at 8: P.-M., thetchairman, DE. 2. ne Dudley. presiding. There were nine members and guests present. The minutes of last meeting were read and approved. Dr. P. H. Dudley read a paper on Strap Rairs oF THE Mo- HAWK AND Hupson RAILROAD, and showed a specimen of the rail, rolled in the year 1826. After a few general questions and remarks, Dr. Budiey de- scribed the improvement that has been made in the condition of the track of the Boston and Albany Railroad, by the use of heavy rails, especially on steep grades. Professor D.S. Martin then read a paper entitled, ARCHEO- LOGICAL NOTES NEAR COLUMBIA, S. C., and showed specimens of curiously marked pieces of pottery found in that locality ; also, a very interesting shell that had probably been used as a drinking cup. - After brief discussion, the meeting adjourned at 9:25 P. M. R. Gorpdon, Secretary. REGULAR: BUSINESS? MEETING OcTOBER 3, 1808. Academy met at 12 West 3Ist street, at 8 P. M., Vice-Presi- dent Kemp in the chair. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. Proposed changes in the by-laws in reference to Correspond- RECORDS. 479 ing and absent Members were referred back to the committee on by-laws, on request of the Secretary. Section of Astronomy and Physics then organized. RIcHARD E. DOonbGE, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS. OCTOBER 3, 1898. Section met on Monday evening, October 3, 1898, at 8 P. M., Vice-President J. F. Kemp in the chair. There were eighteen members and guests present. The minutes of the meeting of June 6, were read and ap- proved. The Secretary then read a paper by Mr. P. H. Dudley on STREMMATOGRAPH RECORDS, giving some recent results obtained with the instrument under locomotives, and entire trains. Brief remarks were elicited by the paper, after which another by the same author was read by the Secretary, entitled OXYDATION OF Rairs 1n Tunnets. After a few remarks on the subject, the Section adjourned. REGINALD GORDON, Secretary. SHC LION OF BIOLOGY. OCTOBER 10, 1898. In absence of the chairman, Professor Wilson, Professor Os- born presided. Twenty-four persons were present. Professor Osborn referred to the loss sustained by the Acad- emy, and the Biological Sciences in general, through the death of Professor Baur, of Chicago, and of Dr. Arnold Graf, of New York. Following the usual custom the meeting was devoted to ac- counts given by various members of their summer’s work. 480 RECORDS. Professor H. F. Osborn described the different museums which he visited in Europe, giving a very brief account of the good and bad points of each. At Stuttgart he saw a unique and unde- scribed fossil Yyrax which Professor Fraas very generously gave him the pleasure of describing. The description was presented at the Meeting of the British Association in Cambridge. Professor Osborn was followed by Professor N. L. Britton, who gave a resume of the work accomplished during the sum- mer on the building and grounds at the Botanic Garden in Bronx Park. Professor B. Dean reported on a few results on the embryol- ogy of the Hag Fish, which he thinks is similar to that of the sharks. He also described the appearance of a South American Lung Fish (Profopterus) which was sent to him in a ball of dried mud. Dr. 0. S. Strong and Mr. H. E. Crampton reported briefly on the nature of the work accomplished at the Marine Biolog- ical Laboratory at Wood’s Holl, bringing out particularly the fact of the cordial relations between the investigators of the Fish Commission and those of the laboratory. Mr. N. R. Harrington related some interesting experiences in connection with his expedition to the Nile valley in quest of Polypterus bishir. The expedition, which was made possible by the generosity of Mr. Chas. H. Senff, was undertaken by Mr. Harrington and Dr. Reid Hunt. As guests of the Egyptian government they enjoyed unusual advantages in securing their ends, but only after repeated trials and discomforts and many disappointments did they finally get the fish. Other brief reports were made by Professor Lloyd (on the botanic gardens of Germany), Dr. Brockway and Mr. Calkins. At the suggestion of Professor Osborn and Dr. Dean a series of nominations for corresponding membership was sent to the Council. Gary N. CALKINS, Secretary. RECORDS. 481 REGULAR MEETING. ~ OCTOBER 17, 1898. Academy met at 8 P. M., Vice-President Kemp in the chair. ' Twenty-five persons present. In the absence of the Secretary, reading of the minutes was dispensed with. MEMBERS PROPOSED. The following nominations for new members were presented for the Secretary by the chair : Jacob M. Rich, 50 West 36th street ; Ernest Foley, 108 East 62d street. The nomination of Dr. Henry S. Washington, of Locust, N. J., was made by Mr. George F. Kunz. These three names wee referred to the Council under the rules. The following paper was read by title: ANNOTATED CaAtTa- LOGUE OF THE FAMILY OF Muricip# NorTH OF THE ISTHMUS OF PanaMA, by Frank C. Baker, Chicago. Section of Geology and Mineralogy then organized. RICHARD E. DopGE, Secretary. SCTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. OcTOBER 17, 18098. Section met at 8 P. M., Professor Kemp in the chair, and twenty-two members present. The first paper, by Professor J. F. Kemp, on the MINERALS OF THE CoprpER Mines aT DuckTown, TENN., gave a brief his- tory of the mines, and described some of the processes em- ployed in treating the ores and the character of the rocks and the associated minerals. The paper was illustrated with an ex- tended series of lantern views of the mines and the works, and with a suite of specimens. Professor Kemp referred particularly to the extremely interesting crystals of Almandite Garnet which he showed, in which the faces of the hexoctahedron are strik- 482 RECORDS. ingly developed, giving 48-sided forms, sometimes with small faces of the rhombic dodecahedron in addition. Zoisite also occurs in fine terminated crystals, and Limonite of remarkable iridescence. The second paper, by Dr. Arthur Hollick, was entitled NorEs ON THE GLACIAL PHENOMENA OF STATEN ISLAND, and embodied the general results of several years of study and exploration by himself and others. The author outlined the topography of the island and the distribution of drift material upon it, and de- scribed the transported contents of the drift with relation to their sources. Most of the drift material is made up of the Triassic sandstone and shale from the adjacent mainland, ground up by the ice-sheet ; but the boulders are largely brought from afar. They comprise material from all the fossiliferous beds of central New York, from the Potsdam to the Hamilton, but there is a great preponderance of Lower Helderberg and Schoharie grit. The fossils are in many cases finely preserved, have been col- lected in large quantities, very carefully studied and determined. The question as to the route by which they have come, over the hilly and almost mountainous regions lying between their source and their resting place is one of much interest. An extended discussion followed the reading of this paper. Mr. van Ingen claimed that the course had probably been down the Mohawk Valley to that of the Hudson and then down the latter, rather than over the highlands of southern New York. Professor Stevenson suggested that the transportation over this long distance may have been due to repeated glacial movements, each transporting over a moderate distance. The next paper was by Mr. Francis C. Nicholas, on the SEDIMENTARY FORMATIONS OF NORTHERN SoUTH AMERICA, and dealt with 2 large area of fittle-explored country between the Caribbean coast andthe Northern Andes. It was illustrated by a most extensive and carefully labeled series of rocks, ores and minerals from many localities and horizons, to which it was im- possible to do justice within the limits of the evening. Among many interesting points described and illustrated with speci- mens was the agency of sun’s heat as a rock-disintegrator ; RECORDS. 483 the changes of day and night temperature in high regions in the tropics producing a fracturing of the superficial portions of exposed rocks, comparable in result to the action of frost in higher latitudes. The last paper was by Mr. Geo. F. Kunz, upon A Mereoric STONE THAT FELL AT ANDOVER, MAINE, ON AUGUST 5, 1808, with exhibition of the stone, or rather about half of it. The fall took place early in the morning of a cloudy and threatening day, so that the sound made by the meteor, which was heard for many miles around, was generally supposed to be thunder. A dark cloudy trail, like a dense smoke, followed and marked the path of the body through the air. Its course was from the north, southward, and in coming down it tore its way through a group of large trees, struck a heavy stone in a wall near the ground and buried itself in the earth. Here it was found two days later, by that time entirely cooled. The specimen is a typical stony meteorite, with a thin black crust on the outside, and of a bright pale gray on the broken surface, with very little iron. It weighs about 7 pounds, and its description will appear, later. Geo F. Kunz; Secretary. REGULAR - MEETING. OCTOBER 24, 1898. Academy met with President Osborn in the chair. Read- ing of the minutes was dispensed with. MEMBERS PROPOSED. The following nominations for Resident Membership were read by the Secretary and referred to the Council under the rules: MaTurin L. DELAFIELD, JR., 56 Liberty street. Rk. ELLswortH CALL, 201 Lenox avenue, Flatbush, Brooklyn. After a notice from the President in reference to the forth- coming meeting of the American Society of Naturalists, the Section of Psychology and Anthropology organized. RICHARD E. DOonbGE, Secretary. 484 RECORDS. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND YsYCHoOLoGy: OCTOBER 24, 1808. At the close of the regular meeting of the Academy, the Sec- tion of Anthropology and Psychology organized by appointing Professor Osborn Chairman pro fem. Professor J. McKeen Cattell presented a paper entitled SomME ANTHROPOLOGICAL TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS, showing two new instruments. Reports of summer field work in an- thropology were then made by Dr. Livingston Farrand and Mr. Harlan I. Smith, who spoke of their work on the northwest coast, and by Dr. H. M. Saville and Dr. Carl Lumholtz, who gave an account of explorations in Mexico. CHARLES B. BLIss, Secretary. PUBLIC LECTURE. OCTOBER 31, 1898. The first public lecture of the season of 1898-99 was given by Professor George W. Blodgett, of the Boston and Albany Railroad, on RAILWAY SIGNALLING, PAST AND PRESENT. The lecture was under the auspices of the Section of Astronomy and Physics. The lecturer was introduced by the Chairman, Mr. -P. H. Dudley, who gave a brief summary of railway progress within the last few years. Professor Blodgett spoke simply and very interestingly for an hour and a-half, sketching the various systems of railway signals in use on the more important railroads, and illustrating his re- marks with an extensive series of well-chosen lantern slides. The lecture was free from technicalities, and very pleasing. About sixty guests were present, and at the close of the lec- ture a vote of thanks was unanimously extended to Professor Blodgett. RIcHARD E. DonGceE, Secretary. RECORDS. 485 REGULAR MEETING. NOVEMBER 7, 18098. Academy met with Mr. P. H. Dudley presiding. There not being a quorum present, the business meeting was postponed to Monday, November 14th. RICHARD E. DoncGE, Secretary. SECTION OF. ASTRONOMY AND *PHYSICS: NOVEMBER 7, 1808. Stated meeting, Monday, November 7, 1898, Dr. P. H. Dud- ley presiding. Eight members present. Professor J. K. Rees read a paper on VARIATION OF LATI- TUDE AND THE CONSTANT OF ‘ABERRATION. In this he ex- plained the scope of the work that had been done in this direc- tion at Columbia University during the years 1894-98, gave a summary of the results, and stated that in future these observa- tions would be carried on chiefly at Government observatories. Accompanying the paper were plotted curves to show the dis- placement of the earth’s axis from time to time, based upon these observations. The Section then adjourned. R. Gorpon, : Secretary. ADJOURNED BUSINESS MEETING. NOVEMBER 14, 18098. Academy met at 8 P. M., President Osborn in the chair. Reading of the minutes of the previous meeting was dispensed with. : MeMBERS ELECTED. The following names for membership were reported from the Council, and the Secretary was instructed to cast one ballot for the list, and they were thereby elected. ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Scl., XI, January 19, 1899—32. 486 RECORDS. M. lL: Delafield; Jr, 56 Liberty street, (iene Wemiber Ernest Foley, 108 East 62d street. Dr HS: Washington, locusi Ney: Jacob M. Rich, 50 West 38th street. R. Ellsworth Call, 279 Winthrop street, Flatbush, Brooklyn. MEMBERS PROPOSED. The following nominations for membership were made and referred to the Council : Rev. A. B. Kendig, 86 Vernon street, Brookline, Mass. Daniel C: Beard,-204 Amity street eE lushing- eg. B. Talbot B. Hyde, 82 Washington street. Life Member. J. D. Irving, Columbia University. Professor Graham Lusk, New York ee Hospital and Medical College. Marshall A. Howe, Columbia Uiverige Dr. L. H. Reuter, Merck Building, New York City. Mason A. Stone, 20 East 66th street. M. H. Beers, 408-410 Broadway. Dr. Ivan Sickels; 17 Lexington avenue: Alfred Douglas, 170 West 5oth street. Dr. Max Meyer, 159 West 1034 street. William L. Mason, 170 Fifth avenue. William Wicke, First avenue and 3 Ist street. Edward R. Hewitt, 119 East 18th street. Professor Charles H. Judd, New York University. A series of proposed by-laws, presented by the Council, were read by the Secretary, and laid on the table until the next business meeting, according to the rules. RicHARD E. DopcGE, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY, MEETING OF NOVEMBER 14, 1808. Sixteen persons present. The resignation of Professor E. B. Wilson was read and ac- RBCORDS. 487 cepted by the section. Professor Frederick S. Lee was unani- mously elected chairman of the section. The following programme was then presented : 1. H. F. Osborn. ON THE PRESENCE OF A FRONTAL HORN IN ACERATHERIUM IncIstvuM Kavp. 2. H. F. Osborn. On Some ADDITIONAL CHARACTERS OF DipLopocus. 3. W. D. Matthew. On Some NEw CHARACTERS OF CL#- NODON AND OXYENA. 4. W. E. Ritter. On THE ASCIDIANS COLLECTED BY THE CoLuMBIA UNIVERSITY PuGET SOUND EXPEDITION OF 18696. Presented by Dr. Dean. 5. J.P. McMurrick. Report ON THE HEXACTINI® OF THE SAME EXPEDITION. Presented by Dr. Calkins. Professor Osborn described the appearance of an hitherto un- recognized frontal horn on the skulls of Aceratherium incisivum Kaup ; a discovery of great importance as it practically removes Aceratherium from the group to which it gives its name and ranges it with the rhinoceroses. Professor Osborn suggested that it may possibly be an ancestor of Alasmotherium. In discussing the paper Dr. Wortman criticised the common tendency to create types based an a single character, citing in support of his suggestion the considerable variations to which single individuals of a species are subject, and giving one or two instances where errors have occurred. In his second paper Professor Osborn described the structure of the vertebre of Dzplodocus, bringing out in considerable de- tail the variations in the sacrum of the herbivorous Dinosaurs. Dr. Matthew briefly described the characters of the teeth, manus and pes of C/enodon, a form belonging to one of the three families, Arctocyonide, which gave rise to the present-day Carnivora. The structure of the wrist bones in particular brings this form almost within the limits of the Carnivora and Dr. Mat- thew regards it as a primitive bear which lived on fruits, honey or other soft foods. Oxyena another typical Creodont, was also described by Dr. Matthew, the principal points brought out being the dispro- portion of the brain case, limbs and lower jaws. 488 RECORDS. In the discussion which followed, Professor Osborn showed that while C/enodon undoubtedly possesses many precocious bear-like structures there are many difficulties to be pushed aside before it can be considered the direct ancestor of the bear. There are transitional forms for example between dogs and bears, as shown in certain types of teeth (Amphicyon), while on the other hand there is a marked difference in the size of the brain of the Arctocyonidae and that of the bears ; the brain of the former re- sembling more closely the brain of the marsupials. If the Am- phicyon evidence is of a sufficient phylogenetic value the bear line must have arisen much later than Dr. Matthew believes. Dr. Lee also questioned the advisability of ascribing particular functions to specialized structures, a criticism which Dr. Mat- thew met by saying that in this case the relation of structure to function was in the nature only of an hypothesis ; an explanation supplemented by Professor Osborn’s statement that in all such cases it is necessary to have some working hypothesis, although each hypothesis is considered merely tentative. At the request of Dr. Dean, Mr. Richard Weil was asked to give the main results of his observations on the DEVELOPMENT OF THE OssICULA AUDITUS IN THE Opossum. Mr. Weil finds that both the malleus and incus are derived from the mandibular arch and have no connection with the hypidean, thus confirming the older German view. The other papers on the programme presented by Dr. Dean and Dr. Calkins were strictly technical and received only brief mention. Gary N. CALKINS, Secretary. REGULAR. MEETING. NOVEMBER 21, 1808. Academy met with Vice-President Kemp in the chair. Reading of the minutes was dispensed with. RECORDS. 489 MEMBERS PROPOSED. The following nominations were read and referred to the Council : Fred W. Franklin, 700 West End avenue. John I. D. Bristol, 1 Madison avenue. Rudolph Keppler, 28 West 7oth street. Academy adjourned. RicHARD E. DODGE, Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. NOVEMBER 21, 1898. Section met at 8 P. M., the Chairman, Professor Kemp pre- siding. Minutes of last meeting were read and approved. The first paper of the evening was by Dr. J. H. Pratt, State Mineralogist of North Carolina, on the OCCURRENCE, ORIGIN AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF CHROMITE. An abstract follows. Chromite has only been found in the peridotites and allied basic magnesian rocks and in the alteration products of these rocks. The mineral occurs in grains or crystals and in im- bedded masses near the boundary of lenticular masses of peri- dotite that have been shown to be of igneous origin. The chromite occurs in the fresh as well as in the altered peridotite. The theory advanced by the author for the origin of the chromite is that the mineral was held in solution by the molten mass of peridotite and crystallized out from the molten magma as this began to cool. The fused mass of rock would hold the different minerals in solution, and as this began to cool, the minerals would separate out, not according to their fusibility but according to their solu- bility in the fused magma. The more basic minerals being the more insoluble would be the first to separate out and in the present case would be the minerals chromite, spinel and corun- dum. This crystallizing or solidifying out from the molten magma would take place first on its outer boundaries, for here 490 RECORDS. it would cool first. Convection currents would tend to bring new supplies of material to the outer zone where the chromic oxide would be deposited as chromite. This theory would account for all the vagaries of chromite deposits, their pockety nature; the shooting off of apophyses from the main masses of the chromite into the peridotite, the widening and pinching of the chromite lodes ; and the appar- ently non relation or connection of one pocket of chromite with another. The masses of chromite that are found in the midst of a peridotite formation, which at the present time are isolated and have no connection with each other, were at the time of their formation part of the chromite concentrated near the bor- der of the peridotite. In mining for either chromite or corundum it is in that deposit found near the contact of the peridotite with the gneiss that a large deposit of either of these minerals would be expected to be found. Chemical Composition.—¥rom an examination of the analysis of chromite it is shown that a nearly pure chromite, with the composition FeOAO, is rarely found in nature. With the ex- ception of three, in all the chromite analyses examined, alumina and magnesia were invariably present, and this would seem to indicate that the molecule of the mineral now called chromite is not pure FeOAO, but is a combination of the three isomorphous molecules; PeOA,O,; MsOA,O;; and MeOAl Oana nee ratio of a FeQA, 0, e the MgOA,O, or Meee Ney is gen- erally 6. tor1o” 1. An analysis of a chromite from See Jackson Co., N. C., gave as A,O, — 95%; Al,O, — 29.28% ; FeO — 13.90, and MgO — 17.31. This gave for the formula of the chromite, ratio of the molecule MgOA,O, observed in any of the chromite examined. It was noticed that the magnesia usually varied with the alumina, those rich in alumina being correspondingly rich in magnesia. The second paper was by Professor D. S. Martin, entitled NOTES FROM THE SEMI-CENTENNIAL MEETING of A. A. A. S. RECORDS. 491 Dr. Martin summarized the more important papers in geology given at the 1898 meeting of the Association, and particularly the papers devoted to glacial phenomena. Section adjourned at 9: 45. Gal Ounz, Secretary. eee llION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. NOVEMBER 28, 1898. Section met at 8 P. M., with President Osborn and the Sec- retary in charge of the meeting. The following paper was read by title: A Parrozoic TErR- RANE BENEATH THE CAMBRIAN, by Geo. F. Matthew, of St. John, N. B. The first paper of the evening was by Dr. Geo. V. N. Dear- born, entitled, THE Emorion or Joy. Brief summary of a monograph in experimental and descriptive physiological psy- chology. ‘‘Somewhat in proportion to its pleasantness, an emotional extramotion of ‘expression’ consists in general ex- pansiveness and outwardly in contraction of the extensor mus- cles ; this is, in particular, true of the smile and laugh of Joy, the muscles concerned in which, from the early foetal cervical flexion are properly of the extensor sort.’’ Four series of ex- periments (nearly 3,500 in number), on the hands, head, arm, and leg, prove the correlation between pleasantness and organic sensation. The regular occurrence of habitual inhibitions, due to the complex conditions of civilized social development, sup- plies the apparent deficiency of the kinaesthetic theory in case of the emotions of man. Human “emotions” are not so in the biologic sense, but rather concrete expressions of the affec- tive social consciousness at present quite indefinite. The second paper of the evening was by Mr. E. G. Dexter, entitled THe INFLUENCE OF THE WEATHER ON MENTAL ACTIV- -ITIES OF CHILDREN, and was devoted to the particular study of the apparent influence of the weather on the children of Den- 492 RECORDS. ver, Col., as shown by the study of some 600 cases of punish- ment inflicted upon children during a period of years. It was illustrated by diagrams, and created considerable discussion. The third paper was by Mr. Stansbury Hagar, entitled THe WATER Buriat. Mr. Hagar paid particular attention to the evidences of water burial as seen among the Micmac In- dians, and gave a brief survey of similar customs in all parts of the world, present and past. The last paper was by Mr. A. Kroeber, entitled REMARKS ON THE ESKIMOS OF THE CUMBERLAND SounpD. In this paper Mr. Kroeber compared certain tales of the Eskimos of Cum- berland Sound with those of other Eskimos, and paid particular attention to two or three tales which were of unusual interest because of their variations from the ordinary myths as hitherto known among the Eskimos. Section adjourned at 10 P. M. RicHARD E. DopceE, Secretary. SUBSECTION: OF PHILOLOGY. NOVEMBER 28, 1808. The meeting was called to order at 8:30 P. M., by the Chair- man, Professor McLouth. The first paper was by Professor C. L. Speranza, entitled MAcHIAVELLI. Machiavellism in the odious sense generally attributed to the word, is misleading and does great injustice to Machiavelli. It originated in the fact that no notice was taken of the great man’s works except the one “‘ Del Principe,” which, moreover, was misunderstood and judged from the standpoint of morals instead of that of logic and science, as it ought. The great aim of the booklet, namely, the formation of a great Italian state, founded on the universal consent of the people, finding its legitimacy within itself, independent, autonomous, and defended not by mercenary soldiers, but by its own citizens, was lost sight of. All importance was attached to what immoral means the RECORDS. 493 author, prompted by experience, proposed as best fitted to ob- tain that aim ; and none whatever was given to the sound and, in some capital respects, original theory set down by him, ac- cording to which the ruler of a state must act exclusively as the representative of that state, propose to himself no other object than the good of it, ascertain the best means to accomplish it, and apply these means intelligently and resolutely. While Machia- velli was convinced that the task of forming a great Italian state capable of preserving its independence could be carried out only by one man, and not by a republic, he was also convinced that it was for the people to consolidate and make fruitful the work performed by the one man. But the coiner of the word Machiavellism took no notice of this; he ignored absolutely Machiavelli's “‘ Discors,”’ by which he taught the people how to govern themselves, and in which he devised the program of democratic government which is entirely modern. Nor was any notice taken of the other fact that Machiavelli proclaimed the necessity of an international code regulating the conduct and results of war, as well as other mutual relations between states ; or of the foundation laid by him upon which the philosophy of history has in modern times been built ; or of the thoroughly experimental method by which he arrived at his conclusions ; or the blow inflicted by him upon the artificial literary form of his days, and the inauguration of the ordinary, direct, natural way of discourse. In fact, Machiavellism, in its generally accepted significance, represents what in Machiavelli’s system was merely transitory and dependent upon circumstances of place and time, instead of representing what was original, characteristic and of permanent value. The second paper was by Professor A. Cohn, entitled SOME RerorMs IN FRENCH SPELLING. The needed reforms in French spelling are those that consist in introducing more uniformity, and correcting mistakes that have crept in through misapprehension. In the word /egs (legacy), for instance, the g was introduced, in the sixteenth century, by grammarians who thought this word came from the verb “guver, while it really comes from /azsser (to leave), a good reason for not pronouncing the ¢. 494 RECORDS The most important reform needed is the substitution of s for 4 in the plural, words like chapeaux, and in masculine adjectives like genereux, and, in general, at the end of all words where wx is preceded by a vowel. The presence of the # in these words is the result of a misapprehension ; in old French texts the letter + is there for ws, as shown by the interchangeable spellings in the same texts (for instance, dzar, diaus are both found in Aucassin et Nicolette). We see thus that in the spelling deux, the letter z is really twice represented. The advantage of spell- ing, in the plural deus, chapeaus, and, in a whole class of adjec- tives, gencrceus, odicus, etc., is evident. Besides being a correc- tion, it would simplify greatly the rules for the formation of the plural of nouns and adjectives, and of the feminine of adjectives, as well as the rules of pronunciation. The rule for the forma- tion of the plural of nouns and adjectives in az, eu, ou, would then simply be the general rule: add an s to the singular. The rule for the formation of the feminine of adjectives like g¢néreus, etc., would also be the general rule: add a mute ¢ to the mas- culine. Also why spell zez (nose) with z? This word comes from the Latin zaswm, and in old French texts z stands for ts. Ety- mology would rather require to spell ez (Lat. zatos) and nés (Lat. xasum), but, of course, no one thinks of substituting mes for zes in the participle. Silent penultimate letters like p in corps, temps, might be dropped, and one might also spell chandbre instead of chamore, substituting 2 for 7 before 6 and f/f, a spelling that would bring more uniformity in the representation of nasal sounds. The Latin origin of these words would be just as clear to scholars as before. None of these reforms, however, ought to be considered necessary, except the substitution of s for x, as above outlined. This last ought to be introduced at once, for the present spell- ing is perfectly absurd. This paper was discussed by Professor Jackson. Professor E. G. Sihler then read the third paper, on THE Main Lines oF CICERO’S PoLiTICAL JUDGMENTS. Dr. Sihler RECORDS. 495 was ied to comment upon Mommsen’s attitude toward Cicero and he endeavored to show from history and from Cicero’s writings that the Roman orator’s judgments of Caesar were abso- lutely fair. Professor Sihler went on to show that Cicero ac- tually had a definite policy, that he put himself on the conserv- ative side as opposed to the tribunal or democratic party, and that such were his ideals and such the true convictions that he lived up to in hiscareer. The paper was discussed by Professor Cohn. The subsection then adjourned. A. V. WILLIAMS-JACKSON, Secretary. REGULAR BUSINESS: MEETING. DECEMBER 5, 1808. Academy met at 8 P. M., President Osborn in the chair, Minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The following list of nominations were submitted from the Council, recommended for election as resident members, and the Secretary was authorized to cast a ballot for the list and they were thereby elected : RESIDENT MEMBERS ELECTED. Rev. A. B. Kendig, 86 Vernon street, Brookline, Mass. Daniel C. Beard,.204 Amity. street, Flushing, L. I. B. Talbot B. Hyde, 82 Washington street. Life member. J. D. Irving, Columbia University. Graham Lusk, New York University Hospital and Medical College. Marshall A. Howe, Columbia University. Dr. L. H. Reuter, Merck Building, New York City. Mason A. Stone, 20 East 66th street. M. H. Beers, 408-410 Broadway. Dr.-Ivan Sickles, 17 Lexington avenue. Alfred Douglas, 170 West 59th street. 496 RECORDS. Dr. Max Meyer, 159 West 103d street. William L. Mason, 170 Fifth avenue. William Wicke, First avenue and 3 Ist street. Edward R. Hewitt, 119 East 18th street. Charles H. Judd, New York University. Fred W. Franklin, 700 West End avenue. John I. D. Bristol, 1 Madison avenue. Rudolph Keppler, 28 West 7oth street. Life member. The proposed by-laws, submitted to the Academy for adop- tion, were adopted with two slight amendments, and will appear printed in ANNALS, Vol. XII, No. 1. After certain announcements by the Secretary in reference to new plans, the Academy adjourned. RICHARD E. DODGE, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS. DECEMBER 5, 1898. The meeting was called to order at 8:15 P. M. by the Chair- man, Mr. P. H. Dudley ; 24 members and guests being present. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. Mr. Wallace Goold Levison presented a paper A SysTEM OF CLASSIFICATION OF THE FLUORESCENT AND PHOSPHORESCENT SUBSTANCES, in which he classified as phosphorescent all those substances that give out rays of shorter wave-length than that of the rays they have previously received; and as fluorescent, all those substances that give out rays of greater wave-length than those they have received. The system was amplified by an arrangement of substances under headings with reference to the circumstances under which they phosphoresced or fluo- resced. The classification was very clearly shown by lantern slides of charts on which all phosphorescent and fluorescent substances were set down, and in addition, remarks about their behavior under various circumstances. This classification has required much labor for its preparation, and at the conclusion RECORDS. 497 of the paper the members of the Section expressed their appre- ciation of it in a few remarks, with especial reference to the logical arrangement of the subject-matter. There being no further business, the Section adjourned at 9:50 P. M. R. GORDON, Secretary. SECTION OF ‘BIOLOGY. DECEMBER 12, 1808. Thirty-one persons present, Professsor Lee in the chair. The following programme was offered : 1. F. S. Lee. THe Course or MuScLeE FATIGUE. 2. W. K. Brooks. THe EmsryoLocy or LUCIFER. 3. F. E. Lloyd. Srupies In THE EmBryoLocy OF THE Ru- BIACE. } 4. N. R. Harrington and Edward Leaming. THE Reac- TION OF AmazBA TO LIGHT OF DIFFERENT COLORS. Professor Lee showed that in the different types of animals ‘studied by him in determining the course of muscle fatigue, the height of the curve, which represents the lifting power, becomes less and less in all cases. The reduction in height of the curve is accompanied in the case of muscles from the frog and turtle, by a concomitant increase of the duration of relaxation. The duration of contraction is also increased slightly in the frog and greatly in the turtle. In the cat neither of these secondary phenomena is represented, the height of the curve, or the lifting power, alone varying. The experiments show that the diminu- tion of the latter phenomenon is the essential element in fatigue. Professor Brooks gave a brief review of his interesting obser- vations on the development of Lucifer bringing out in particular the essential features of cleavage and gastrulation which dis- tinguish this decapod from most of its allies. In the discussion which followed the paper it was shown by Professor Brooks that his results on the unusual mode of 498 hE CORDS. cleavage of this form throw no light upon its phylogenetic position or upon that of its allies. Professor Brooks’ paper was accompanied by a demonstra- tion of three microscopic preparations. Professor Lloyd showed that in a number of genera of Rubi- aceze studied by him the embryo-sac is divided into two regions ; an upper region in which the pro-embryo is developed, and a lower part containing numerous nuclei of uncertain origin. The suspensor of the pro-embryo develops branches which act as haustoria, taking food from the endosperm. The latter in turn takes its food from the integument by means of cells spec- ialized for food absorption. Dr. Leaming showed that light of different colors acts strongly upon the activities of Ameba proteus. Certain colors (red, orange, yellow and green) accelerate the protoplasmic flow, while other colors (white, violet and blue) retard it. The apparatus was fully described and the experiments were re- peated in part, before the Section. Gary N. CALKINS, Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND: MINERALOGN; DECEMBER IQ, 1898. Section met with Professor J. F. Kemp in the chair. Twelve persons present. A paper was read by Mr. Henry S. Washington, on THE IGNEous Rocks oF Essex County, Mass. The rocks were de- scribed in some detail, and shown to be mainly Granites, Quartz- Syenites corresponding to the Akerites and Nordmarkites of Brogger ; Quartz-Diorites and Diorites, with smaller areas of Nepheline-Syenite, Syenite, Essexite and Gabbro. These are cut by numerous dykes of various kinds, including Aplites, Granite-Porphyries, Paisanites, Solvbergites, Tinguaites, and many basic dykes, most of which are of Diabase, but some of camptonitic rocks. There are also extensive flows of Rhyolite, RECORDS. 499 accompanied by ash beds and breccias. Twenty-two analyses of the various types were given. The character of the region as a petrographical province was discussed at some length. Chemically it was shown to be rich in alkalies, especially Soda, low in Lime and very low in Magnesia, and rather acid. The low Magnesia was commented on, and the occurrence noted of many minerals in these rocks as varieties poor in this oxide which are usually rich in it, as Lepidomelane, Fayalite and Glaucophane. The usually high ratio of FeO to Fe,O, was discussed and it was pointed out that in most of the rocks FeO is extremely high, replacing MgO, while in the foyaitic group it is much lower. Iron oxides tend to vary with soda. Soda is constantly higher than Potash, but the molecular ratio varies a great deal, being about 1.10 in the granitic rocks, higher in the foyaitic group, and very high in the basic, the ratio in nearly every case approximating to whole numbers. This differentiation of Na,O was commented on and its impor- tance pointed out. Comparisons were instituted with other regions and the great resembance to the rocks of southern Norway were described. It was shown that probably the chemical composition of the magma as a whole approaches that of a Nordmarkite, and that it is rather acid, asin Norway. The relations of the rocks of Essex county to those of the other alkali-rich regions of the Atlantic slope were also discussed. The paper was discussed by Professor Kemp and others. fe 7, JULIEN, Secretary pro tent. al 7 pan i pia = hel “| ea? ’ GENERAL INDEX TO VOLUME XI. Names of authors in heavy face type. Generic and specific names in z¢a/ics. Bee DIEAL LON IN; . nes .ciec eves acess 49 | Andromeda parlatorit, Heer......420, 428 Abnaki,’see Wabaniki............000 Anilin colors; discovery of........... 184 Acalypha gracilens, of BlockIsland 65 | Annelids. Early development of..1, 3, 13 Acanthonyx petiverit, Milne-Ed- LOREM cn Seen Fe wes a 239, 244, 246, 250 MAIER IE san besanestddasees coddesse'e 236:| Anopla and -Bn0p1 a: vis fae cnscvseeet 197-9 Acasta cyathus, Darwin.............+. 254 Ant-Eater, Bronchial System of..... 138 Acheloiis depressifroms S., etc........ 233.1, Amtipyrin 5, discowely Of: .c0ss.56.0 184 Actea acantha, Milne-Edwards..... 232 | Antiseptic SUrgery..........cceesseeees 187 MODINE einai dSictaweccieewtves es 380, 388 | Anweers, A.. Hon Mem............ 460 Actinospherium, nuclei of........ 280; 206 | Adysta Glands) Of... Jancdes os eeaors 331 RMBEREIAT ECT oa gic cc cic noes ease , a stundasudsncgwdastseerat ademhece 189 Pee MIEICWICZ, TEL. ......:..:.-sarescas 364 | Aralia rotundiloba Newb (?)....421, 430 means. FF. D., Cor. Mem..........0. 461 | Archzeology of Block Id.............. 70 Adams and White, ref.............. 241 | Archenteron, formation of............ 6 Hepy, Ch.; ref. Archoplasm, of Protozoa............. 394 127-8, 131, 134, 139-40, 142-4, 146-7 | Avgeza, sp., of Puget Sd......... 261, 281 Afanassiew and Pawlow, ref..298, 364 | Arvgulus foliaceus; glands of.,...... 331 PEMSSIZ TOL io. c gee cdccsecss 189, 412-13 | Avzcta; Ancestral Reminiscence, mbasica’s AMpPhipora, ... isso ssesiee sae PEO By) GACUC aca caislatacynoansereaiteanes 3-6, 10-26 MON ARElIALA. «5 cecnt ss cae veess 390 | Arrochar, Staten Id., Cretaceous Marine Nemerteans.............. 193 (a (Re eye ay APRS Sos 416, 419-20 Alchemy and Chemistry .............. 177 | Artiodactyla; Bronchial System Algonkin Indians.............. 369-70, 377 CE PO EAC e aaa tic Sasi wicklaciwedties 129, 138 SEE ACC sc csioadieiscnsdseseessass 246 | Asclepias pulchra Ebrh., of Block Alpheus edwardsit, etc......06 246, 249- ote 1G a ie alee Seen re moe er eee 65 Amboy clay series ‘of Block Island.. 56/ Asia; Pacific Nemerteans of......... 191 mmer. Psych, Assoc., report of Asterias atlantica and tenuispina Be ININS tos sat co tecsutawenweds eRe CO, Py MAMI yore Sars s deca nibya ein Baaha d 408-9, 411 PIERO DYOLCUS; cidsaes vondanwes 89-90, 400 | Asteroids of Bermuda............. 407, 411 Reaction of, to colored light... 499 | Astrology and Astronomy ............ 177 Amphibia ; Coalescence of embryos 219 | Astronomy; sketch of history...... 177-9 Skin-glands of,...... 298, 2a 330-1 | Athanas ortmanni, N. SP.........008- 251 Poison-glands of... 331 | Atropine ; action of, and _pilocar- Amphipoda ; Northrop Coll., “254; pine, 296, 298, 301, 317, 320, 339, 349 embueeb (od: 03... dune cteomecske 261, 265 | Atlantic; Astertas of Eastern....... 408 Amphiporus , of N. Pacific, 196 Twenty-foot contour of coast, pL IC sss cat tinkiahs ¥ ieepar eee 210-14 Ra Nebeg etic ois hac nn'svv dele od oleeictas Nee 88 Amphithoé, of Puget Sd., Anda, of Puget Sd... incsececes ance 268 261, 271 273, 290| Auchenia; Bronchial System of, Amphitrite; Ancestral Reminis- £20, /130;.140,- 102 GCE. calle onacsss vicaabadersainaneaeemes 24 Rudimentary cells, 6, 12; ves- Bacteria, NUCIEUS Of. .i..2. cases te. cu' 382 IEPA GGENS ey aso nadieecodebetadiateboes 2 | Badger, Amer.; bronchial tree of..132-3 TAGS, 2.555. Sone ocaoemnsmtaeants 331 | BAHAMAS ; THE NORTHROP COL- ANCESTRAI, RENIMISCENCE; CON- LECTION OF CRUSTACEA FROM, SIDERATIONS ON CELL-LINEAGE De TR re fs oon, u dain S0'e Seuiwrep actetosin 225 ARDS UU ISOs cocces es Sedgutedent pibailey. VY WW .3 ref... ci. cveeces 63-4, 66 (501 ) ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCt., XI, March 14, 1899—33. 502 INDEX. Balanide, Darwin; of Bahamas... 254, Brachyura, of Puget Sd....227, 230, 262 Balfour,+W, 0B. Cor: Meém. 2... 461 | Bradypus ; Bronchial tree of........ 129 Ball’s Point, Block Id., Paleobot- Brandt 5 tetsu. secs seein ceeeeeee 267 AAW GL jet cesta: sese eee Sets 57 0038, 04"), IBAM Ce ier ee oe eee cae 376 Ballast ; destruction of by, trains.... 89) Brauer, A.; ref.......:..... 392, 395, 397 Balena, bronchial tree of........ 129, 135 | Bremerton; Lemeus, ceribratulus at 215 Laptisia ; absence of bronchial tree Brinton sel, oe teeere nee 376-7 PMI etepetceiiss = oasis cama scite' testa aeemed 66 | Brissus unicolor K\., of Bermuda.. 413. PArtint ey, WC ely.ccce a cgee rcecuseereaeues 364 | ‘Bristol, Jz TP: D.,) Res. Meme... 9496 Bate. Spence, Tel. ....stuntas-csess 240—Ti4| STISt@l eke a0 o.ccnucaresanee sere eee 407-9 244, 246, 250, 252, 264-8, 270, 273-4 | British Geol. Survey; basis of...... 184 Battery Resistance, measurement of 469 Sessile-eyed Crustacea........... 280 Baur, G: ‘Corsi Meni es wens: cis 461 | Columbia; Recent Archeol. Bayliss ; ref., 299; and Hill; ref 364 | Investigation in. (..22. 06040 450 Beard) ..D.iC. . des, WWlemy Sesjceee 495 | BRONCHIAL SYSTEM OF. MAMMALIA ; Benedict and Rathbun, ref....... 230| THE EPARTERIAL, Huntington 127 Beers, MVE... Res. Mem: is,.22.% 495 Symmetrical series of types, Beringer’s pseudo-fossils, Kemp... 449 Tyee Plate 4-4 eee 144 Berkely, John, tels..2.4¢45-2.c0 400 364 Aeby’s classification of B. Tree 129 BERMUDA; NOTES ON ECHINO- Brooks, W. K., Hon. Mem......... 460 DERMS On, ClaTK Fe cos.4cceeisners 407 | Brooks, W. K.; The Embryology Bernard, Clauderret.s-..5, 37.0.0. 295 of Loucifets Ranccgscaecec nero ne 497 besserier Steel process. cusenuecenacns 182 POL a. sass gaebesceeececee serene nee 253 Biondi-Ehbrlich mixtute:.0..-'fetigs.<.. betes eae eee 364 Calbuco, Chili; 7lectonema of.. 209 Calkins, Gary N. -THE PHYLO- GENETIC SIGNIFICANCE OF CER- TAIN PROTOZOAN NUCLEI........ 379 THE ORIGIN OF PROTOZOAN INNUCIID Iss ou ds conte eee eee 470 and Keppel, REPORT ON Pu- | GET SD. -HYDROIDS........, 475 | Call, (R. .; Res. Mem eee. 486 Callaway Co., Mo. JZelocrinus gre- ROFUTOMN cacke ocindoe= Geet de) kes: Memsee 445 Gardiner, IS. Gisele sic: scccneed. EA, 27 \bbale, (Ges) Can, em see 451 Gasteropods ; displacement in sinis- | Halation, action of,on Phot. Lines 406 tral, 14; cell homologies, 13; re- Fhale, televes.cjsois aoe ee eae eee 376-7 lation to ee 16; cleavage Halifax, N. S.; Zittorina littoria of 72 eee SESS NET AOL so dos eee ease ee $31 ') Thal: Protcexet tte eee 118-109, 185 IFAtSCHel iret. 25. 92..5 astesocelaasens 3760-7 | Hallez; LOL sa Saee Seal Meena eee 16 Gay Head, Martha’s Viney ani. Cre- Hallock, Wis MAKE-CIRCUIT taceous ot cba Ieee oer ted at 418 | PESDURDA 8 Au 2 ee 463 Gecarcinide, Dana, of Puget Sd... 228 | Hamilton group of fauna............. 117 Gecarcinus ruricola (Vo. Ve. cccedse cus 228 | Hansen, quoted, 252; ref...... 274, 281 Greeenbautss Kel. ccs sacha secon 25 | Hapatogaster mertensit, Brandt...... 260 Van Gehuchten ; ref. .2c¢.2.5 303, 365 | Harrington, N. R., REPORT ON GEOGRAPHY, SCIENTIFIC, IN Epvu- CRUST, “OF PUGET “Sp, 4655 CATION; DOG: 4252 socceuecaeeeea 449| ref., 259, 283-4, and Griffin, Geology and Cosmogony............. 177) |\» BO ssct tocente nese aes 206, 263, 283 Geol. Survey of England, 184 ; of (“Hlasse; Cos wet tt foo peeee ce eee 147 Ajnnted States 1.2) sesec. bacece cece oes 154 |‘ Hatcheck: ref: 5 notenca>. 5, ee oe 12 lock: stsbatidy 3.22 os tee 55) | teedend Spot Sree enes ssa ene 421, 430 Granaz7is er thas eee 5296, 30%) Meera rel... 250. cream anna 57-8, 60 Giard:and Bonnier; ref::..:/...<. 275-OL | Fheidenhains cel 25 ooo eee ee Sts Tel rsssac5 5 o5 23 san ao ae eee 229, 231| 294-9, 304-14, 317, 320, 324-5, Gill; Dayid:. Hon, Mem. :.2..:.<: 460| 327, 330-8, 342, 350-1, 355-7, lace dene. b ene eso 65 Gleichenia gracuzs Heer, Block Id 57, 76 | Glen Cove, ds I . Cretaceous Of... AUS Gnaphalium pur ‘pureum L. of Block Uden etecseeoncronv etc 66 Golgi, methylen-blue method........ 2904 Goniopsis cruentatus (Latreille)..... 229 Gonodactylus erstedit Wansen....... 253 RT GOELES LC thas cass we sereaet weonenan sheer 16 Gotthieb; vel. svete ses: 298, 333, 305 | Grace Point, Block Id., basal clays Of. Scscasieiecnds Loree beewsacianteste sk abes 62 Br apsus oF mpsUs | Vardosee oncmaee Sones 2209 | Grapside (Dana) of Puget Sd...... 228 | | Gramme, induction machine......... 181 | Grave, Caswell Tele. vcnecs.sacn, 408 | iaray, Rieniy ete each acnccoede 146 | Great Salt‘Pond, Block Id:.........: 70 Griffin, B. B.; DESCRIPTION OF | SOME MARINE NEMERTEANS OF PuGET ‘SD. AND ALASKA......... 193 | List of Published Writings..... 104 MARINE NEMERT. OF PUGET SD os seca rae Soares eis 464 and Harrington, ref., note..... 206 Graber, A. tet 382, 389, 392, 397 Grunow, J., instrument maker..... 38) Gaombagens iret. is:0tysscenanes cee 365 CGAVETIN; “Kelsi cise Soh achaleursiaw estes Zr 361, 365, 394; quoted notes, 295, 321-3, 308, 316, 333 Feiiprin; cel noose see ease eee 407-11 LL IGLOD IS Oe ae net eee Roe cee 38 Flenderson> ref :...cne0inescees soe 237, 220 (elenry’s telepraph: 2)-. S572. .02----e-- 180 der bsthiret iis... Gosessecenac cere eee 24 Herdman Protss et. .ca noe ee 284 Hering: ‘refi circa aeeeetenas 365 _Hermann’s Handbook on Phys... 294 Eberricks rel. .30202.ss 4 240-1, 251 Flerters tet: sisq ease eee 335 Hertwig; O. and R:; rei, £2.25) 27 aR: Moet Be ener oneers 3025) 904,397 | Heteractea ceratopa (Stimpson)... 232 Fleterograpsus nudus (Dana) and OF EZ ONLISUS cies amano’ 260 LL ACP ONEMUETTAND xian acoso ob es ices 200, 214 | Hewitt; Ei AR. « Res: Memes. 2. 496 | Heymons, R.; ref., 6 5) note:....- 12; 127 | Hibiscus moscheutos, L., of Block Tidy: donsnanme teen adanaeawumement ara 66 Hill, °G., Wa Home Miemerss. eter 460 Hill; Pela: biuy hose eee eee er 299 Hippide, Stimpson, of Puget Sd..... 237 Fiippolytide, OmmMann.,. accceesest=s 246 [ippolyte prionata, Stimpson..260, 264-5 brevissostris, Dana....is.:- 284 | Hipponoé esculenta, Leske........ 408, 412 Hitchcock, Romeyn; INDUS- TRIAL APPLIC. OF OXYGEN........ 463 INDEX. 507 MRE EL ccc ys eacewsnsdaseannan sateen 283 | Indians; of Block Id., 70; Oral eeeieson Ss equest... sic nusae ape vee ee 190| literature of, 369; love song, OMRON TOE os vin as 05 ventana scat £54 , 2753 Peace -ceremonies,. 372°; Hoftman, S. V. Res. Mem......... 468 Rs eet rei ha Sc orp ba ea ainsa.n'a ed he ACR 373 BROHCYs MIVENTON: 25.00. oc ceasincerave 182 | Induction; discovery of.............. 181 Hollick, Arthur; NOTES ON TRPOSORA, WERT ONIN; ius aadecacvecsscs 393 Biock ID., 55; ADDITIONS TO INSECT COALESCENCE; Griffin, THE PALEOBOTANY OF THE CRE- TACEOUS 3; NOTES ON THE GLA- CIAL PHENOMENA OF STATEN Ip., 482; FORMATION ON STATEN ID., 415; FURTHER NOTES ON BLOcK ID., 448; ref. 51; notes 67. Holmes, S. and J.; ref Holothuria surinamensis, 410 ; flor- tzdana Pourt, 410, 413; captiva Ludw.; abbreviata, Heilp......... 413 foppim, W. W.. Jes.. Mem......... 451 DAO ORLILENTUI os ansaesasvieuserestnia ses 198 Horace, and Epicureanism........... 432 Hornaday, W. H.; THE De- STRUCTION OF BIRDS IN THE MP Sin tS ie caccadene ude ds 46+ Horse, salivary secretion of, 3937451399; 322 Howard, James E.; ref, 91, 95, 96, 104 owe, J. M.. “Res. Mem.........:.. 451 Wea TOE a. ss ooo daca Geen ane valeon’ 364. Hubrecht, A.A. W,,; ref....... 198, 217 Prowe, M: A.-)Res. Mem.,..:.224. 495 Hubrechtia MestAervata...cccce ceeceees 200 Hudsonia tomentosa Nutt., of Block gia haitin sows vigiaea 2 dies 65 PMOL ® TOE sc ceccwsck A. “Aw ELEMENTS OF STRENGTH AND WEAKNESS. IN BUILDINGS STONES... s.dsb Ant.“Ocean......-- 269/Lee, F. S., FUNCTION OF EAR HMGULCTI ] o>, DOL. ; riiveecee mere 394, 397 AND LATERAL LINE IN FISHES, Mendip, As b..° Res. ‘Meme... 2. 495 453; THE CouRSE OF MUSCLE Kidney; secretion physiology of, FATIGUE," AO] 5: Lett. snsteeeentee 303 208=0; 335)| Iueeds cA, Rie. rer. eee ee 405 Kilisut Harbor, Puget Sd., Zzzezs Letolophus planissimus (HERBST) 228 Daa ce dace eahiese Serie aa ae TO 203, 215 | Lenard, Dr.; ref. on fluorescence, 42 Kingsley; ref., 226-7, 220, 246, 240-50 || Lenape Indians {..0--8--2-2.s-oese eee 4760-7 Kitchen. middens,.of,. Block Id * “7o | Lepadide, Warwinh-c.caxcec ecm etea ve 254 Kneifiia linearis and pumila, of Lepidoptera, gratting Of... .0......<.-- 219 BlGek aid 1. te ceseebenennese 66 | Leptoplana, eggs of, etc.....15-17, 20-22 Rossel; Prot.stret-7.1..2.<.20s-.8see- 303 | Leptostrobus, of Juras and Potomac Rossman 7 7sels, 5. oferetincecca sence 280 formations)... sc. tcsseeceeereeees 49, 51 Kowalevsky.,-A.; refs cee 12; 27, || Leshedezas 2 nes ketenes eee 6 Kudrewetsky’;.. réf.-.2.12. 6 -<22- 360, 366 |, Lesquereux + ‘rel... cscs eos ees 59 J oT OF oT eis 2) ae Se eee A 295, 335 Levison, Wallace Goold ; A sIM- Kubne; wea serel.c.).ccseceneee: 306 PLE AND CONVENIENT PHOS- Kunz, (G.ol:; METEORIC STONE OF ANDOVER, MAINE, 483; RE- CENT DISCOVERY OF HUGE OUARTZ, CRYSTAL. 27. scdscuseneee 454 WTAUGSE SPE ath coca ore floes 3,66 Kreischerville, S. I., Cretaceous ro) I aes OE EERIE AS Fri de ARR 416, 420 KRENNERITE FROM CRIPPLE Crem, Gol. Chester: «cc. 455 Kraeber, A., Eskimos OF CuUM- BERLAND Sp bse eadeuvetnddssosenenes 492 Lamellibranchs, cell lineage in.....13, 16 Lang; ref. ....14-16, 18, 20, 21, 27, 366 PANSIa Ol AN, BEARMIC, 20. Sea e oat 197-8 Langley,J.N.; ref., 290, 299, 303, 309, 311-2, 317, 321, 323-4 335, 350, 356, Se Langley and Fletcher; ref........ 366 LUankester, FE: KR. Hon, "Mem eee 460 Laricopsis, HORSUIS OL Wosaseatiass st oss 50-1 Larix, primary leaves upon, 46; leaf formistin cic. .es. tne eeent ones SLABES: sasucccay sory Mee amare ens es 24 LATERAL LINE ORGANS, Strong.. 470 LATITUDE, VAR. OF CONSTANT OF ABERRATION, “REGS: -.n.c2.heeesa 485 Watrewle: els ease pee aeeee ee 228-9 Laurus plutonia Heer, of Block WN AG Fe ccd terdvscvetsaleatoes 60, 78 Lauterborn, R.; ref,....389, 393-4, 397 PHOROSCOPE, 401; PHOTO- GRAPHED OCULAR MICROMET- ERS, 405 ; PHOT. EYE-PIECE MI- _CROMETERS, 469; A SYSTEM OF CLASSIFICATION OF THE FLUOR- ESCENT AND PHOSPHORESCENT SUBSTANCES =. con eothacey seen eee 496 Wevy Wax srelite. sees eters 357, 306 We ydig' 5: Teles. caciea..ce sos «carci tases Ligia pallastt,, Brandt: ... «2. ss 261, 282 TARGCETEs conver eek ti ease eden e eae 66 Lillie, FR? ret:.256; Dr —Taeen 5 ieee Limnoria lignorum (Rathke)....... 261 Limodorum tuberosum Lirrrccceceeee 66 Linckia guildingit, Gray...........6+ 412 LLNEUS SPP CATUSS TN. SP). Sera 214-15 of NvPacitic tc, ahs 195, 198 Tanin, ‘of nuclet2.2ie..e-<-aeea ee 379-83 LE WRODUWA LS ctnds. Coan ae 263 Lithotrya dorsalis, Sowerby......... 254 Littorina littoria, on Blockidise-- 72 Ltvoneca vulgaris, Stimpson........ 261 Llama-alpaca, Bronchial Tree of... 139 Lloyd, Francis E.; ON HYPER- TROPHED SCALE-LEAVES IN PINUS PPONDEBROSAssecaserees eee 45, 447 STUDIES IN EMBRYOLOGY OF THE RUBIACEEs.- tee cack 498 | Lloyd’s Neck, Lettorina hittoria of, 72 Lockingtom eet se st eco 262, 282 Locomotives, weight of, in track CEStS 2 oda ced testa cen can teeweeagaee 106 Loeb S:- “Res Memes nose a eeeurene 451 INDEX. Long Island ; Amboy clays of, 59 ; Myrtophyllum, Laurus, and 777- calycites of, 60-1; basal clays related to Block Id., 62; In Ice age and Geol. Hist., 67-8 ; Cre- eS 6.3 8 bles eM oa ee 416 Lophactea lobata (Milne-Edwards) 231 | Lephozozymus bellus (Stimpson).... 260 Meare ES. 5 TEL, 555. csteescceseces 274 _ Oo Ee eee nae ye 440 Puchsinger ; ref. ...0c2.s6 350, 360, 366 LucIFER, THE EMBRYOLOGY OF, Ss ne re rR 497 LUCRETIUS, THE LATTER -PART OF, AND EPICURUS repli peTe@pwov ME ag cl cB taare ks suet eeone Waser 431 Ludwig, C.; ref., 294-5, 299, 330, 337-8, 367 Bie ENOTES TOP ay. prised vncacs» 367 NEOPETS STHOLES 2 sins ast caacne doses 5 Lung, morphology of............... 142, 145 Maisie As. Res: Mem: 2.0..63% 2 495 Lysimachia quadrifolia L. of Block ES co 65 MACHIAVELLI, Speranza........... 492 MacIntosh ; ref........ 199, 207, 216-17 RIE TOR ss ald sadonies 367 McLouth, L. A.; Nores on E. JOSEPH’s KURENBURG THEORY.. 477 McMurrick, J. P.; REPORT ON HEXACTINI OF PUGET SD. Ex- MIAO eet 8S Sea ce sicsng'e's eves 487 MEI GWOTA D2 SD. cciccanecie-icacads 288 MacCracken, H. M. Res. Mem... 462 mercrura, Of Puget Sd2..5....415-.0%6 263 Macroceloma entheca (Stimpson)... 233 Macromeres, of Wereis........00..00: 32 MAMET I LICIES 0 oto mntvmin cassis sade s 393 McWhood, L.; A METHOD OF STUDYING THE MOTOR EFFECTS (Or NRUSICL A: Jet naar h case’: 473 ORE SECO: 5-2, patra nas oeesee eas 270 IE eae a OUR re oe Leese 261, 269 Maric, Prof; W..F.: ref...... 29, 30, 39 Magnolia woodbridgensis, Hollick, Peete G5. 4 of sith avdoe seen 60 and longifolia Newb......... 422, 428 Seabee, Pridians: Of, «ccd. s0keenss- 369, 376 wieorden, of Puget Sd......2.cke0ss 233 NMC OECI LE 50. & icisat cisd ace des snbdastas 197 PML AOONIGE <205 5. 5. ocicducsvcevhes uhees 276 Malisseet Indians............ 360;370, 377 Malorchestia californiana, Brandt, 265, 267 MAMMALIA; THE EPARTERIAL BRONCHIAL SYSTEM OF THE; PAUMATIEIEOR 55.00 chee vec icnnw nde 127 509 ORIGIN. ‘OF + ‘Osborn... :.....:: 447 Manganese and carbon in pig iron,, 182 MARINE NEMERTEANS, DESCRIP. OF PUGET SD. AND ALASKA, (Cpgliies Ones Seer eure, OPT 193 MMArINNeSOU Rel. J.806 Gi ote acs aca 364 Martha’s Vineyard, Amboy clays of 56, 58-59; Ficus of, 59; Lau- aus of, 60; Basal clays relat. to Block Id., 62; Geol.-Hist. of, 68 Marston, FS. . Res, Mem.\..%.: 451 Marsupalia, Bronchial tree of...... 129 Martien, iron refining process of..,.. 182 Martin: 1. S:) LifesiMem yee: 451 Martin, D. S., GEOL. OF COLUM- BIAG Oo: CG. AND VICINIEY; 475 5 ARCHEOL. NOTES NEAR DO.,.... 478 Mason, Wiel, Res: Mem-.5 25 496 Massachusetts, Indians of ........... 369 WL ASCSES melt aki crcecvbteeiwt ante wean 45 Matawan. horizon. 72252. Rivest 417 Mathews, Albert P., THE PHy- SIOLOGY OF SECRETION. ...... 293, 466 Matthew, G. F., PALEOZOIC TER- RANE BENEATH THE CAMBRIAN, 491 Matthew, W.D., ON SOME NEW CHARACTERS OF CLANODON Agia MOREE A 9! 3 dc dew ud todo gskeet 487 Miayers Ae Gre tel, 26.. .s5 seamen aoe. Mead, A.; ref., 2, 6, 11, 12, 15, 21,25,27 Medical News, ref 2.20. S025 sieseeme 30, 39 Mediterranean, Asterias of, ......... 408 Megalorchestia scabripes, Stimpson, 265 AOD OW La Cask aan isk aa 5s ed See odes 66 Meguyiks, see Mohawks, DICUIEESERSOFIS ING ir een vwnew aus dns .-es-. 14 | New York Acad. Sci. Records of Monotremata, Bronchial tree of..... 129 Micetingss.. cast esaeee ohio a 445 Montauk Point, Floral analogy to | INS YC. 6c Ti ie RR ealitests Block didisias at dec aetna comes O7:|, CORA cera sars se eee eee 93, 95, 100 Monterey, Cal., Cancer productus _ | New York, Hamilton Group in..... 117 AO cg se Saatts te eicieaioe aeRO eo 262 | New Zealand, Crustacea of........... 269 Moriconia cyclotoxon Deb. and Ett., Nicholos, Francis C., SEDIMEN- 57, 418, 428; of Amboy clay TARY FORMATIONS OF NORTH- SPECIES! nun eduncecberesuibe nes oh eee 5S. ERNiGs AMERICAS Ay s... eecnter 482 Mortis, Henry: ref cc.c..c24..000ee 146 | Nichols;.'G. LL... Res. Mem........ 451 Morse?s telegraplty, nc -cvsecemepacteen: ESO Nicolet; rel. so.0 0. nonce see ene 268 Morton and Conrad, on fossils, Nicotine, action of quinine and, in 185, and Vanuxem, Geol. Secretion, Jost teccstas 296, 311-14, 355 Stiidites wim JIN si |taenn sacntenaceweeseks 184-5 | Nobel’s work and bequest in chem- Moses,A; J.,. on rare minerals... 4455 | IStly ah ceeennesnesieeee ate.eaee eee Igl Mucinogen-and mucin«g....,...5.2.5.0 +5 303-4 | octiluca, ........ oie 38% 391-6, 400 Murray,3Gs Cor Miemivs. 6003 seces Ab |;Northrop; Dr. fs tele eee 423 MUSCLE FATIGUE, THE COURSE OF | NoRTHROP, COLL. ms eee TiCO Reames aecuinds aot tneneaeee 497 FROM THE BAHAMAS, ee 225, Muscle action, mechanism of secre- Norridgewok Indians............369, 37077 {OM Saracen b nnneamissiacal 324; 331 | Nova Scotia: Indians... wer eecre 369 Mushet, tron econvertine process: of. 182:\JNovi > teti.c 02... tes seeen se eee 367 Music, A METHOD OF STUDYING NUCLEI PHYLOGENETIC SIGNIFI- THE Moror EFFEcTs oF, Mc- CANCE OF CERTAIN PROTOZOAN, Wihoodis foe eerste oes 473 Calkins...) .:c..0. ce eee 379 Wtyrica louga, Weta sons 5OnAlO.- 4:30 Nucleoli of, 379-80, 383, 388-9, 392 Myrmechophaga jubata, Bronchial Intermediate type of, 384, 389, free of? oy... 2eveeeeee 138, 142, 160 396 ; distributed, 381, 394; Myrsine elongata, Newb.......... 420, 43 primitive type, 382; nuclear Myrtophyllum geinitzi Heer......... 60, 78 | membrane........ 379-80, 383, 387 ; Nussbaum siretcsve-eeeee 335, 307 Wantucket, (Geol. sElis).- 9.2 Wanssbencss 68 | Naples, Cerebvaryis aliens sek cca, 215 | Ocypoda arenaria (Catesby)....... 226 Narath, Albert; ref...129-30, 144, 147 | Ocyfodid@, Ortmann, of Puget Sd.. 227 MebenkOrnet:,ccscecnesreecy 387-8, 392-4 | Oersted, in: etectricity...c-<+00-1-m 180-1 INDEX. o11 OP reise nine sca ddsaan'anhisa te navees 198 | Panicum spherocarpon Ell, of DPE SPCICOVEC. 5. oun. vcacveswaseectnany 461 Block Id.; and pzzdbescens Lam.. 64 Old Harbor Pt., Block Id., basal Panopeus her bstit, Milne-Edw ards... 230 RO ee 20 ss vnc urneidignie & cote ales 62 occidentalis, Saussure , and PERSE «coc vg aca ont sccesesseesrios 241 RLEPECIIUS,. Disadoaivaces seven 231 Onagra ‘oakesiana (Gray) Britton, | Panulirus argus (Latr.)....ssceseee 240 REINS. BO ooo soc Siapnnnntans'pule aude ets 65 Paracrangon ” echinatus, Danae 260 ME A PRCT 5c. oo soon ee cae beens Seas 376 Palcgicke, 387, 392-6; ewlhardi.. 387 Onondaga Indians........... Re uendans 370 | Parapagurid@, Smith..........+...++ 240 Ophiactis miilleri, Lik..........+.+0. 412 | PASSAMAQUODDY DOCUMENTS, Ophiocoma crassispina, Say......+.+ 412 BGnh. (PLtniCe ., oncswsts Ogee ss ees? 369 miter Permits LAK. cscs Jc awesbace” 412 | Pasteur, in bacteriology.............+. 187 *. Ophiomyxa flaccida, Ltk..........++. 412 | Patagonia, Carinoma Of...........+0+ 200 Ophionereis reticulata, Ltk....... AOB, ALZ | Patella... .viacneavacaedvonensseaes cdasevee IL Ophiostigma tsacantha, Say... ai2| Patten, W., tel. .:..6..1ccssscexassees ey Ophiura oppressd, Say........000 408, 412 Paulmier, F. C., SPERMATOGEN- Ophiurids of Bermuda.......... 407-8, 412 ESI6) IN’ ELEMIPTERAS «0. cancees<< os 470 Optical illusions in fluorescence obs. 35-6 Pawlow; ref., 298, 333. 360, 367, Orchestia ( Talitrus) scabripes, and and S. Simanowskaja; ref., 367 EG Sab 5 272 ee A CnC ee 267 | Peccary, collared, Bronchial treein 13 Orchestoidea californiana, Brandt Péckham, W. Hi. Res. Mem... 451 261, 265 | Pelagoneniertes......cescsesereee coves 197 Reel Waly 5 TCL. acy , réf.c......60c 225, 262-3 PENDULUM, A MAKE-CIRCUIT, Osborn, H. F.; THE ORIGIN OF (hee SN (otc) aemeeenne ee een 2 463 THE MAMMALIA, 447 ; FRONTAL “Penna. R. R., Heavy rails used HoRN IN ACERATHERIUM INCIs- Oi and tests. 8. os. ois serenade 93, 105 IvuM Kaup, 487 ; ON SOME AD- | Penobscot Indians, DITIONAL CHARACTERS OF DIP- 369, 370-1, 373-4, 376 MeIOCUS: AST = TCL, ...0..05-0%- 225, 269 | Pentremitidea filosa, Whiteaves, 117,122 Osmosis, mechanism of............... 332 MilwaUuRensts Vi. SP ..cseeeceeeees 523 oF baste ie eee 367 | Pepsinogen .......s.s0ssoseeeeeroneceees 303 Othonia aculeata (Gibbes), | Periceride, Miers., of Puget Sd, 233 cherminiert, Schramm.............- 234 | Peridinium divergens......... 389-90, 400 Oudemans, A. C.; ref....199, 200, 217 Perkins, in anilin dyes .............+. 184 OXYGEN, INDUSTRIAL APPLICA- Personal Equation, in X-Ray Obs., 35 TIONS OF, Hitchcock............... 463 | Perth Amboy,'N. J., Cretaceous of 416 Oziide, Ortman, of Puget Sd........ 230 | Petrochirus gr anulatus (Olivier) 239 | Petroleum “aindusties:<.7..s IgI Pachycheles panamensts, Faxon.,.... 237 | Petrolisthes armatus (Gibbes) and FAIS, SUMAPSON 5s. . cene4aseuens oes 260| ¢ridentatus Stimp. 238; cinctz- Pachygrapsus transversus (Gibbes) 229| pes (Randall) ..........:..eeeeeee eee 260 Page and Clark, electric genera- Petromyzon, raucous glands of...... 331 Bees de bdvtch al eaanetanentor eet Eat; Meier: Tet fo ce.ssscreese- 295, 328, 367 Paguride, of Puget Sound....... 238, 263 | Phenacetin, discovery of............. 184 Paguristes turgidus, Stimpson...... SOI PUA tet PIU, od ict pete ne 259, 260, 262 Palegyge borret......cc.00 275-6, 278, 280 | Phoca, Bronchial tree of, 129, 142; Palemon savigniji (Bate), etc...... 244 CI LD, het ee EO EE TE ee IAT ETS PEIZOREMLETTUNG. ~ 0.500 sun's eaascns dacess 198 | PHospHOROSCOPE, A SIMPLE AND Paleobotany, of Block Id., 56; CONVENIENT, Levison. ........... 401 Preactical use: Of. :35..¢.sc.0eecevoress 186 PHoroGRAPHIC RESEARCHES PALISADES DIABASE; CONTACT- NEAR THE NORTH POLE OF THE METAMORPHISM OF THE; (Se ABAVENS, JACODYs:..s4si02sce nels.cdssces ace ee esenee 254 WUTICUS, Dama ..iweegeennstesiees 284 | Speranza, C. L., Machiavelli..... 492 Scott, W. B.- ‘Gor. (Meme ee 461 | Spermatophyta of Block Id.......... 64-6 Scyra acutifrons, Dana............0+ 260 | Spiders, poison glands of............. Zar Seal; Harbor, Bronchial tree of..... 141 | Szo; cell lineage of..1, 3, 6, 10, 12, 24 sebaceous glands ; musculature of. :\) 431 || SpOlOzOa ty cccicsieenessees chee eee 388 SECRETION, THE PHYSIOLOGY OF, Syuilliiog, Watreille. 2) .c\.e ne eeenes 253 Mathews . vicccecinbiemndgrtacateecms 293 | stabchen, jof nucleus,..5.....200 vais side 386 Secretions ; sweat, 359; pancreas, Starling, 2 Piss teh eee 299, 368 360; Sympathetic Salivary, 303 ; Staten Island, Amboy clay series due to muscle action, 331; Lit- of, 56-7; Laurus of, 60; Myrto- CTAtUTEOl Stk. Mesure eens 364| phyllum of, 60; Tricalycites of, Secretory nerve fibres.....294, 300-1, 304| 61; Basal clays, relation with Sedgewick; Adams tel... ..2..2.~. 25 Block Id., etc., 62; NOTES ON SI) C0 Of =) gape ey GA ET re aM 410| THE GLACIAL PHENOMENA OF, Semperta bErMUALENSIS. ...0..ccereeeee Atel), cEtoiel: evs cote oan ee eee WENAtOFS Fell fhe. cen sae cece eta 209)| Stauffacher 3 vet oo sseccste. sed ee 27 NunecaImdianss.coc.c ere ee 3276) Stebbing, Rev; 1. Rios; ser, Sericocarpus asteroides (.), of 259, 268-9, 280 Block Wlidsicc Matdis Soxteres eet 65 | Steel, Hist. Sketch of, 181; use of, SCSAV WIG, GEMEKCL ( SAY Vic sacs sda eaaee 2209) and forest (preservation. 2.2... 182 Sheep, Secretion physiology of, Stenopus hispidus (Latr.).........+.. 240 said tw can tebeeemenies 303-4, 309, 324, 333 semiiledts, vou Martinis: >: .s< refs.ch Saccckee 129, 148 | Woodbridge, N. J ; Cretaceous of 416 Weber; ref., on Secretion Phys... 368} Woodbridge, N. Y.; 7Z7ricalycites Wieber sso rel..... ee Cees: 225 FY 0) (0 ERP ee Sei nea Seni Rae nes tes. 2 61 Weil, Richard; DEVELOPMENT Wood’s Holl, Littorina fittoria of 72 OF OssICULA AUDITUS IN THE Woodward; Ca A. “Rest-Mem i: 451 OPOSSUM: 2h. ns. eens 488 | Woodward, B. D.; VOWELS oF Weismann; cell mosaic theory... 26) ROUMANIAN AND OTHER Ro- Weller, Stuart ; DESCRIPTION OF MANCEH PANGCUAGHSMie ieee 468 DEVONIAN CRINOIDS AND BLAS- Wright; 2s net eee 401 TOIDS FROM MILWAUKEE, en ee oe areca eee aes oemiote LOA 55 Kantiada. Ocmnannof ice cee Fev oes Gees oat ee a 336, 368 : West Berkely, Cal.; 2zplectonema 2S DIE EELS IER OLS fo gimens aoe if spieiindataeeatoaeee 208 PURPOSES, TSR Dr ea za West Indes, crastaceaol..........0s.. 225 | __ é P Whiartom’s duct y 20. coseecrs sac sonster 295-6 Yellow Pine, see Pinus ponderosa Wheeler, J. R.; THe NEWLY Yokahama Bay, Philyra pisum of 262 DISCOVERED POEMS OF BACCHY- TAD ES pci Seat cece ee atest oe 467 | Zabriskie, G. Res. Mem............ 451 WVihiteayes; teliasts act dete es 123, 216i.-Zachaniass wrete.. nce. .tean vette 382, 307 WH hitheld’s wetiads. tec oscidece enc ees 119| Zimmermann and Boas; ref., Whitman, C. O:.. Cor. Mem;,.-.... 401 MOLE bs Aeron ersdcns soles oben 145 SN Ditmams ster, asus anaes Mears 25'| Zinin, discovery;et-Anilin,.,s2,eeees 184 Wicke, W: U.Res. Memi.,<.054.... 496 | Zittel, K. von. Hon. Mem......... 460 Wiedemann’: refi; note, ....c4.<.. Aol.| Zoology: of Block lds jc.ee cere 71 Wiedersheim, R.; ref....134, 146, 368| Zostera marina L. of Block Id..... 64 Widdringtonites reichit (Ett.), Zunstein ss Teleco eee 147 CER Tie caoseRiettcca tant esenea ees 58 | Zyonemertes VITESCENS....recsesersaese 210 aoe At ) ay ‘ ~ , . ‘ i t MAYS on fiete’ Ly #1 <)" . els mr MA car: pe (is eae slices aimed oem eb 8 +X a ide tae 3 aie , Pp e * NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. Fifth Annual Reception and Exhibit of Recent Progress in Science in the American Museum of Natural History, ADM baad 14: 1898. * wee ~ “dee “i , at 4 ~ \k Dae 4 ¥, a ° =) * * Ae ics a A > % ‘ pa) i S ‘ Lae o » i Ps = - m a ¥ 7 ‘ be , ‘ ! - . ’ i 7 » _ iy Fi om | oe 16 . > 3 S i ‘ ¢ ws J Lhe . r L % 3 ’ ‘a i s ‘ ' - p ’ = pi ay Wie he ¥ , - *) ‘ toe - 1 “ ij ; 7 — : % tee 2 - : as ® 7 Pn i . , . ; P » 7 is c : ‘rR: . . a a : a. 7 4 / - > oe 3 ih, , . Poy , ars le ry a Tet, , ra po i ee tere ie fang ip Ate a : = f ne ey la : vad Ea PEN Se Z he ere - 4% Te ‘ ier , Je . % “ * an Ns iy al wf Bs ~ ~ a 4 .. - : +9 ae ] RA I oy y Lo nk ps ‘ ae ae : Ju ? eek ye >! a rs * F ay D heise i. Di eo : ’ iy i ae i . iy P a id My I act Fa eh ol < hee) Eke pe haa ip ss % Rs fs ‘ a ca ly pe » - ’ 1 a i Mae A» h oY by a aa? f rt ‘ af 4 ih “)} bd ag r iar Eve ab S Sy ol Committees. Honorary Committee of Members. ADDISON BROWN, MORRIS K. JESUP, CHARLES P. DALY, SETH LOW, WILLIAM E. DODGE, HENRY M. McCRACKEN, ABRAM S. HEWITT, WILLIAM C. SCHERMERHORN. Reception and Exhibition Committee. HENRY F. OSBORN, CHARLES F. COX, REGINALD GORDON, GARY N. CALKINS, RICHARD E. DODGE, Chairman. General Committee. ANATOMY: GEORGE S. HUNTINGTON anp JOS. A. BLAKE. ASTRONOMY: J. K. REES, HAROLD JACOBY anv H. 5S. DAVIS. BoTany: GEO. V. NASH. CHEMISTRY: CHAS. A. DOREMUS. ELECTRICITY: GEO. F. SEVER. ETHNOLOGY AND ARCHZ OLOGY: FRANZ BOAS Anp L. FARRANI). EXPERIMENTAL PsycHOLOGY: CHAS. B. BLISS. GeoLocy: ARTHUR HOLLICK. MINERALOGY: EDM. O. HOVEY. PALZONTOLOGY: GILBERT van INGEN. PHOTOGRAPHY: CORNELIUS Van BRUNT. Puysics: WILLIAM HALLOCK. PHYSIOGRAPHY: R. H. CORNISH. ZoOLocy: E. B. WILSON. PROGRAMME. APRIL 13. RECEPTION TO MEMBERS OF ACADEMY AND INVITED GUESTS, = 2 = . 8-10 P.M. APRIL I4. AFTERNOON EXHIBIT, - . - - 3-5 P. M. EVENING RECEPTION, TO MEMBERS OF THE SCIENTIFIC ALLIANCE, : - - S-II_ P. M. DEMONSTRATIVE ADDRESS, THE FUNCTION oF LARGE TELESCOPES,” Promptly at- - 9 P. M. By Pror, Gror Es bawe: PRECEDED BY AN INTRODUCTION BY THE PRESIDENT OF THE, ACADEMY, Pror. Henry F. OSBorn. AND BY THE PRESIDENT OF THE MasEuM Morris K. Jesur, isa; NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. FOUNDED IN 1817. ORGANIZATION. The New York Academy of Sciences is fourth in age among American scientific societies, having been organized in 1817 as the Lyceum of Natural History. It embraces all branches of science and its scope is the same as that of the older Euro- pean societies. Its publications are of world-wide reputation and contain the first announcement of many discoveries, which have proved to be of great importance in their practical and theoretical relations. The former Presidents have been: Dr. Samuel L. Mitchell, 1817-1823. Professor John Torrey, 1824-1826; 1836. Major Joseph Delafield, 1827-1837; 1839-1865.. Professor Charles A. Joy, 1866-1867. Professor John S. Newberry, 1868-1892. Professor O. P. Hubbard, 1892-1893. Dr. H. Carrington Bol- ton, 1893-1894. Professor John K. Rees, 1894-1896. Profes- sor J. J. Stevenson, 1896-1898. MEMBERSHIP. Honorary members are limited to fifty in number, and are elected from the representative scientific men of the world. Corresponding members are also chosen from distinguished men in different parts of the world engaged inthe prosecution of vari- ous branches of research, the results of which they are invited to communicate to the Academy from time to time. This list now includes over 250 names. Fellows are limited to 100 and are chosen from among the Resident Members in recognition of scientific attainments or services; they form the Council and the main working body, and conduct the business of the Academy. Resident Membership is not restricted to specialists, but is 5 6 open to those who take a general interest in science and desire to promote the work of the Academy by their subscriptions. The Initiation Fee is $5, and the annual dues are $10. Pay- ment of these confers upon Members full privileges and the right to all publications. By payment of $100 a Member may become a Life Member, commuting his annual dues. Donors of $250 become Patrons, and have all the privileges of Life or Resident Members. Members are elected as follows: The candidates are proposed publicly, in writing, at any meeting, by a Fellow or Member; and the nominations, together with the name of the person mak- ing them, are referred to the Council; if approved, the candi- dates may be elected by ballot at any succeeding business meeting. PUBLICATIONS. The publications of the Academy at present consist of two series— Zhe Annals (octavo) and The Alemotrs (quarto). All are distributed to Members and Fellows, and are circulated in exchange for the publications of nearly all the foreign and Amer- ican Academies and learned Societies. The Annals, which opened in 1824, contain the longer contributions and reports of researches, together with the reports of meetings. The Zrazs- actions, in which the shorter papers and business reports have hitherto appeared, are now abolished and the matter appears in the Annals. The complete volumes of Annals will hereafter coincide with the calendar year, and beginning with the volume now in press will appear with a new typography and arrange- ment of pages. Under the present system of printing, an author can secure immediate publication and distribution of a discovery in which it is important to establish priority. The present edition of the Annals is 1,000. The Memoirs, issued in quarto form, are adapted to papers requiring large plates or tabulations. But one number has thus far been issued. LIBRARY. The Library numbers over 18,000 titles, and is especially rich in sets of the publications of American and Foreign Societies. 7 In this respect it is one of the most complete in this country. It is now shelved in a special room of the Schermerhorn building at Columbia University, and is accessible to Members from 8 A.M. to 5 P.M. MEETINGS. The Academy at present meets at 64 Madison Ave. in Mott Memorial Hall. Meetings are held every Monday at 8 P.M., from October to May, inclusive. The Academy meets in sections on successive Mondays in the following order: Astronomy and Physics; Biology (Zoélogy, Physiology, Botany) ; Geology and Mineralogy; Anthropology, Psychology and Philology. Other sections may be formed by a vote of the Council. Each of the sectional evenings is devoted mainly to scientific papers and dis- cussions. All the meetings are open to the public and are an- nounced, with the subjects of the papers to be read, in the bul- letins of the Scientific Alliance of New York. SCOPE OF WORK. Owing to the increased scientific activity in this city, expan- sion of the Academy’s work is called for along three lines, pub- lications, lecture courses and grants for research. The Academy is endeavoring to increase its efficiency in the near future by se- curing a larger publication fund so that it will no longer be neces- sary to decline important scientific papers offered for publication, especially when accompanied by illustrations. A certain sum of money should also be available annually for lecture courses— such as the well known lectures of the Royal Institution in Lon- don; and for grants for original research. Our scientific men give their results freely to the world with no thought of financial return in most cases, and should be aided in their work by Sci- entific Academies. Persons desiring to join the Academy or support its scientific work by subscription in either of the lines suggested above should address THE SECRETARY, New York Academy of Sciences, TEACHERS CoLLEGE, NEw York Ciry. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY, 1898-9. President, HENRY F. OSBORN. First Vice-President, Second Vice-President NL BRITON. J. Fo KEMP: Corresponding Secretary, WM. STRATFORD Recording Secretary, RICHARD E. DODGE. Treasurer, GC. FCO Librarian, ARTHUR HOLLICK. COUNGIEEORS. CHARLES LL. BRISTOL, WILLIAM HALLOCK, CHARLES A. DOREMUS, HAROLD JACOBY, BASHFORD DEAN, LAWRENCE A. McLOUTH. MEMBERS OF COUNCIL, £x-offcco. Ex-Presidents O. P. HUBBARD, J. K. REES and J. J. STEVENSON: CURATORS: HARRISON G. DYAR, GEORGE F. KUNZ, ALEXIS A. JULIEN, LOUIS H.-LAUDY; : WILLIAM D. SCHOONMAKER. FINANCE COMMITTEE. HENRY DUDLEY, JOHN H. HINTON; CORNELIUS VAN BRUNT. OFFICERS OF THE SECTIONS, SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS. P. H. DUDLEY, Chairman. R. GORDON, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. E. B. WILSON, Chatrman. G. N. CALKINS, Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. J. F. KEMP, Chairman. H. RIES, Secretary. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY, PSYCHOLOGY AND PHILOLOGY. L.A. McLOUTH, Crewman. A.V. W. JACKSON, Secretary for Philology. CHAS. B. BLISS, Secretary for Anthropology and Psychology. A ANATOMY. In CuarGE oF GEo. 8. HuNTINGTON AND Jos. ie) BUARES g. RADIOGRAPHS AND DIAGRAMS SHOWING THE TOPOGRAPH- ICAL RELATIONS OF THE TRACHEA AND BRONCHI TO THE THoraAcic WaLLs. Exhibited by Dr. Jos. A. Blake, Department of Anatomy, Columbia University. z. THE STRUCTURE OF THE FOURTH VENTRICLE AND OF THE LATERAL REcEsSsES. Exhibited by Dr. Jos. A. Blake. 3. RECENT STUDIES IN THE VISCERAL ANATOMY AND THE é VASCULAR SYSTEM OF ReEptitia. Exhibited by the Department of Anatomy, Columbia University. 4. THE CEREBRAL GYRES AND FISSURES OF TWO NATIVES OF BritisH NEw Guinea. Exhibited by the Department of Anatomy, Columbia University. B mo iKONOMY. In CuarcGE or J. K. Rees, Haro_tp JAcospy AND HERMAN 8S. DAVIS. © 1. PHOTOGRAPHIC ILLUSTRATIONS OF RECENT Work. Ex- hibited by Harvard College Observatory through E. C. Pickering, Director. a. Vicinity of Eta Carine, photographed with the Bruce telescope. 4. Large Magellanic Cloud. ec. Arequipa Station, showing new Bruce Building. dad. Bruce Building. e. Spectroscopic Binary, yp! Scorpii. f- Spectroscopic Binary, A. G. C. 10534. 9 1. 7. bi Spectrum of § Puppis. Spectrum of Meteor as photographed. Spectrum of Meteor, enlarged 9 times. . Variations in Light of U Pegasi. Proper Motion of Z. C. 5h 243 and occultation of 26 Arietis. Dumbbell Nebula. Spiral and Ring Nebule. Nebula in Andromeda. 2. PHOTOGRAPHS OF APPARATUS AND OF STELLAR SPECTRA, b. Cc. d. ILLUSTRATING A NEw Metuop. Exhibited by Prof. Charles Lane Poor, of Johns Hopkins Observatory. Concave grating spectroscope; ordinary form attached to eye end of telescope. Concave grating spectroscope; direct form. Same as 4, mounted on telescope. Series of spectra of Sirius, including Glass positive, or- dinary size; photograph enlarged three times without widening; photograph, enlarged and widened; Glass positive, enlarged and widened; Series of Spectra of other stars. 3. CHARTS AND SKETCHES. Exhibited by United States Coast a. b. Cc. and Geodetic Survey, H. 5S. Pritchett, Superintendent, Washington, D. C. Isogonic and Isoclinic Charts for 1900 A. D. \ Base map showing astronomical positions and gravity stations to date. Sketch showing the Triangulation of the Great Transcon- tinental arc from Cape May, New Jersey, to Point Arena, California. 4. Grass Positives. Exhibited by the Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago, George E. Hale, Director. . Photographs of the Building and Instruments of the Yerkes Observatory. Thirty positives on glass. Stellar spectra photographed with the 4o-inch telescope and stellar spectographs by Hale. ue 1. Part of spectrum of a Orionis (three prisms). 2. Part of spectrum of o Citi (Mira)—(three prisms). 3. Comparison of the spectra of 78 Schjellerup ( Vogel’s type 3b) and p Persei (Vogel’s type 3a). 5. BromipE ENLARGEMENTS OF PHOTOGRAPHS OF RECENTLY SN bs ie, ConsTRUCTED INsTRUMENTS. Exhibited by Warner & Swazey, Cleveland, Ohio. . 6-inch Meridian Circle made for U. S. Naval Observa- tory, Washington, D. C. . 5-inch Alt-Azimuth made for U. S. Naval Observatory, Washington, D. C. 3-inch Combined Transit and Zenith Telescope. . 4-inch Zenith Telescope. 3-inch Prism Transit. Standard ro-inch Equatorial Telescope. 6. PUBLICATIONS OF VARIOUS OBSERVATORIES, showing repro- ay b. Cc. ductions of photographs of the Moon. Exhibited by Columbia University. Plates from Photographs, by M.M. Loewy and M. P. Puiseux, Paris Observatory. Plates by Dr. Weinek, of Prague. Plates from the Lick Observatory photographs. 7. MirRoRS AND REEL USED IN THE DETERMINATION OF THE [CONSTANT OF ABBERRATION BY THE LOEWY Metuop. Exhibited by Professor George C. Comstock, Washburn Observatory, Madison, Wis. C BOSANY., In CHARGE oF Geo. V. NASH. 1. ALBRECHT’S KLINOSTAT TO ILLUSTRATE THE EXCLUSION OF HELIOTROPIC AND GEOTROPIC CURVATURE. Exhibited by Dr. C..C.- @nens: On T@. » Wi BF 14. re. I2 MeETHOD oF MEASURING RooT GROWTH AND NUTATION. Exhibited by: Dr. C.-C. Curtis. SLIDES ILLUSTRATING THE LIFE HIsTOoRY OF SOME FRESH Water ALGa@.° Exhibited by Mr, I.E Hazen. MusEuM PREPARATIONS OF SEEDS AND SEEDLINGS OF PHE@- NIX DACTYLIFERA. Exhibited by Prof. Francis E. Lloyd. ABNORMAL CONE FROM DouGLAS SPRUCE, PSEUDOTSUGA MUCRONATA. Exhibited by Prof. Francis E. Lloyd. HyPERTROPHIED SCALE-LEAVES OF PINUS PONDEROSA. Pro- duced by pruning staminate shoots. Exhibited by Prof. Francis E. Lloyd. AccrEssory Buns IN PISUM SATIVUM, CULTIVATED VARIETY. Obtained by amputation of plumule and successive axil- lary buds. Exhibited by Prof. Francis E. Lloyd. STUDIES IN THE EMBRYOLOGY OF SPARGANIUM. Exhibited by Mr. F.C. -Paulmier. SET OF SLIDES SHOWING THAT THE FORMATION OF CELLU- LOSE DEPENDS UPON THE INFLUENCE OF A NUCLEUS. Exhibited by Dr. C. O. Townsend. STUDIES IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE OVULE OF LARIX LARICINA. Exhibited by Miss Ada Watterson. DEVELOPMENT OF THE EMBRYO SAC IN SAGITTARIA. Exhibited by Miss Louise B. Dunn. NEw JAPANESE AND AMERICAN CHARACE. With illus- trations and descriptions. Exhibited by Dr. T. F. Allen. New SPECIES FROM THE VICINITY OF NEw YorkK CIty. Illustrated by Specimens. Exhibited by Mr. Eugene P. Bicknell. Two NEW SANICULAS FROM THE SOUTHERN STATES. Represented by specimens. Exhibited by Mr. Eugene P; Bicknell: Mosses OF NoRTHERN BOLIVIA AND SOUTHERN PERU. Collected by Pierre Jay in July and October, 1893. Exhibited by Elizabeth G. Britton. 16. 17. 18. 19g. 20. 21. 22. BR: 24. ac: 26. a7. 28. 13 SoME New SpeciEs oF ASTER. Exhibited by Prof. Edward S. Burgess. SPECIMENS AND FiGurES ILLUSTRATING THE HEPATIC FLoraA OF CALIFORNIA. Exhibited by Mr. Marshall A. Howe. NEW SPECIES IN THE GRAMINEZ. Illustrated by speci- mens. Exhibited by Mr. Geo. V. Nash. Two New Grass GENERA. Illustrated by specimens. Exhibited by Mr. Geo. V. Nash. NEw GENERA AND SPECIES OF PLANTS FROM SOUTH AmeERiIcA. Exhibited by Dr. H. H. Rusby. NEw SpEcIES FROM Montana. Exhibited by Mr. P. A. Rydberg. NEw SPECIES IN THE SOUTHERN UNITED STATEs. IIlus- trated by specimens. Exhibited by Dr. John K. Small. RECENT DISCOVERIES IN THE GENUS ERIOGONUM. Illus- trated by specimens. Exhibited by Dr. John K. Small. Two New GENERA FROM NortH America. Exhibited by Dr. John K. Small. SPECIMENS REPRESENTING RECENT RESEARCH IN THE ASCLEPIADACE#. Exhibited by Miss Anna Murray Vail. NEw SPECIES FROM New Mexico. Exhibited by Mr. E. O. Wooton. A Fosstt Moss FROM THE TERTIARY, PROBABLY MIOCENE, OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON. Collected near Cle Elum, Kittetass Co., by ‘Mr. I. C.-Russell, July 7th, 1897. Exhibited by Dr. F. H. Knowlton, Elizabeth G. Britton and Dr. Arthur Hollick. SOME STUDIES ON THE BACTERIOLOGY OF THE NEW York City WATER SuppLy. Exhibited by Smith Ely Selintte,: Wiss iiaee, Meaeer, MD. and | ©.) Hensel, Pits: Notre.—The more important botanical publications of members dur- ing the year are exhibited on a table and are open to examination. 14 D CHEMISTRY: In CHARGE OF CHARLES A. DOREMUS. 1. Liquip AIR WITH EXPERIMENTAL ILLUSTRATIONS OF ITS PROPERTIES. Exhibited by Mr. Charles E. Tripler. 2. BomB CALORIMETER. Exhibited by Dr. H. W. Wiley, Chief of Division of Chemistry, United States Department of Agriculture. 3. IMPROVED SPECIFIC GRAVITY BOTTLES OR PYKNOMETERS. Exhibited by Dr. E. R. Squibb. . IMPROVED ZERO BurETTE. Exhibited by Dr..E. R. Squibb. . VISCOSIMETER. Exhibited by Mr. P. H. Conradson. . PROGRESS IN MANUFACTURE OF ArTisTIC GLass. Exhibited by Mr. Louis C. Tiffany. 7. SPECIMENS OF TRITHIOFORMAL DEHYDE, TRITHIOALDEHYDE AND ANHYDROFORMALDEHYDE-ANILIN ; SODIUM Oxy- METHYLSULFONATE, TRIOXYMETHYLENE AND SALI- FORMIN. Exhibited by Dr. L. H. Reuter. 8. SPECIMENS OF SALICYLID, SALICYLIDCHLOROFORM AND POLYSALICYLID... Exhibited by Dr. ixentern: Nm 9g. TABLES TO SHOW THE APPLICATION OF THE PERIODIC SyYS- TEM TO THE STUDY OF ANALYTICAL METHODS. Ex- hibited by Professor Robert W. Hall. 10. Moprets INDICATING THE RELATION BETWEEN VOLUME, PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE OF GASES. Exhibited by Professor Morris Loeb. 11. PURE PREPARATIONS OF TELLURIUM AND SOME OF ITS Compounps. Exhibited by Professor Morris Loeb and Mir. J: EE eehipley. 12. ARTIFICIAL CRYSTALS OF CHEMICAL CompounNDs, ILLUS- TRATING ISOMORPHISM AND ENANTIOMORPHISM. Ex- hibited by the Chemical Museum of New York Univer- sity. — td 13. EXHIBITS FROM THE LABORATORY OF COLUMBIA UNIVER- siry by Professor, C. E. Pellew and Dr. S.A. ‘Tucker. . Calico Printing. The production of insoluble azo col- ors in the cotton fibre. . Viscose. Exhibition of Process and Samples of the new form of Soluble and Amorphous Cellulose known as Viscose. c. Electrochemistry. The Persulphates and Percarbonates of Alkaline Metals, Prepared by Electrolysis of the Normal Salts. 14. EXHIBITS FROM THE LABORATORY OF THE COLLEGE OF THE City oF NEw YoRK. . Three different types of ray filters to contain either liquids or gases and suitable for photographic or purely chemical work. Exhibited by Dr. L. H. Friedburg. Red sublimate of Nitro-diphenylamin and Yellow crys- tals of quinone-oxim. Exhibited by Dr. L. H. Fried- burg. E miokhe RRICI EY: In CHARGE OF GEo. F. SEVER. I. EXHIBIT OF NEW APPARATUS by Queen & Co. through Mr. mH 2 AA WR O..-F. Lewis: Horizontal Magnet D’Arsonval Galvanometer. A new Automatic Self-Focusing Arc Lamp. Acme Testing Set. . Acomplete 12" X-Ray Outfit with Self-Regulating Tube. A new Lantern Galvanometer. A new Portable Photometer. . A new Portable Cable Testing Galvanometer. 16 2. AMERICAN APPARATUS FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF SIGNALS. AT A DISTANCE WITHOUT WIRES. MARCONI SYSTEM. Exhibited by Mr. W. J. Clarke. 3. EXHIBIT OF NEW ELECTRICAL APPARATUS by Prof. M. I. Pupin. a. Optical Telephone. 6. Induction Coil with 30" spark. c. Electrical Oscillators for Selective Signalling. d. Bridge for measuring phase retardation between current and electro-motive force. 4. METHOD OF SUPPORTING GALVANOMETERS TO AvoID VI- BRATIONS. Exhibited by Electrical Engineering De- partment, Columbia University. 5. Exuisit oF RECENT ELECTRICAL APPARATUS by Mr. J.G- Biddle. 1898 Type Willyoung Induction Coil. Willyoung Direct Reading Potentiometer. The Rowland Electro Dynamometer. The Rosa Curve Tracer for Alternating Current Curves. See rs ETHNOLOGY AND ARCH AOLOGy In CHARGE OF FRANZ Boas anp L. FARRAND. 1. EXHIBIT OF THE JESUP NorTH Paciric EXPEDITION. a. Facial paintings of Indians of the North Pacific Coast. Collected by F. Boas and L. Farrand. 6. The Prehistoric Races of southern British Columbia. Collected by Harlan I. Smith. c. Conventionalism among the Thompson River Indians. Collected by James Teit. 2. SYMBOLISM OF THE HuicHoL INDIANS OF Mexico. Col- lected by Dr. Carl Lumholtz and exhibited by the American Museum of Natural History. 17 G fx PERIVIEN TARAS YCMOLOGY. In CHARGE OF CHARLES B. BLIss. . An AUTOMATOGRAPH WITH REGISTRATION ATTACHMENTS. Exhibited by Mr. W. L. McWhood. . AN INSTRUMENT FOR STUDYING THE DISCRIMINATION OF LoupNEss OF Sounps. Exhibited by Prof. J. McKeen Cattell. . AN INSTRUMENT FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF THE TIME OF PERCEPTION AND MoveEeMENT. Exhibited by Prof. J. McKeen Cattell. . VERNIER CHRONOSCOPE. Exhibited by Prof. Edmund C. Sanford. . AN AUDIOMETER. Designed by Dr. J. A. Gilbert and ex- hibited by Prof. Charles B. Bliss. . An ADJUSTABLE STEREOSCOPE Carp. Exhibited by Prof. Charles B. Bliss. EL COG ve. In CHARGE OF ARTHUR HOLLICK. . SUITE oF EuROPEAN CLays AND KAOLINS AND OBJECTS SHOWING CLAY WHEN BuRNED. Collected and ex- hibited by Dr. Heinrich Ries. . BAUXITES FROM DEPARTMENT OF HERAULT IN SOUTHERN FRANCE. Obtained and exhibited by Dr. Heinrich Ries. . CoppER Ores AND AccoMPANYING Rocks, FROM OTTO SHAFT, EISLEBEN, NEAR MANSFIELD, GERMANY. Col- lected and exhibited by Dr. Heinrich Ries. . SPECIMENS FROM THE SALT MINES, STAASFURT, GERMANY. Collected and exhibited by Dr. Heinrich Ries. 18 5. FULLER’s EARTH FROM ENGLAND. Collected and exhibited by Dr. Heinrich Ries. 6. BAUXITE FROM STyRIA, AusTrRIA. Exhibited by Dr. Hein- rich Ries. 7. SPECIMENS SHOWING TRANSITION FROM QUARTZ-PORPHYRY To KAOLIN FROM DGOLAN, NEAR HALLE, GERMANY. Collected and exhibited by Dr. Heinrich Ries. 8. FULGURITE. Summit of Little Ararat, Russian Armenia. Collected ‘by “Dr. E: (O, Hovey, Sept: 30,1807. ae hibited by Dep’t of Geology, of American Museum of Natural History. 9g. GRANITES AND GNEISSES FROM FINLAND. Exhibited by Professor J. J. Stevenson. 10.{OrES AND Rocks’ FROM PELICAN AND Dives MINEs, GEORGETOWN, CoLo. Exhibited by Professor J. J. Stevenson. I1. PHOTOGRAPHS AND SPECIMENS ILLUSTRATING RECENT EXPERIMENTS IN PRODUCING COMPRESSIONS AND FLow- AGE OF MARBLE WITHOUT RUPTURE OR DESTRUCTION oF CoHESION. Exhibited by Dr. F. D. Adams, Me: Gill University, Montreal. 12. SUITE OF Rock SPECIMENS ILLUSTRATING THE RECENT PETROLOGICAL WorRK OF PROFESSOR W. C. BROGGER, IN THE VICINITY OF KRISTIANIA, Norway. Exhibited by Henry S. Washington, Locust, N. J. 13. SUITE OF ROCK SPECIMENS ILLUSTRATING RECENT PETRO- LOGICAL WorK OF THE EXHIBITOR UPON THE LEv- CITIC AND TRACHYTIC ROCKS OF THE ITALIAN PENIN- SULA. Exhibited by Henry S. Washington, Locust, Ny 14. EXHIBITION OF MODELS AND SPECIMENS by Professor J. F. Kemp, Columbia University. a. Model of the Franklin Furnace Zinc Ore-body, made by F. L. Nason for the Lehigh Zinc Co. 5S. 16. 17. 18. 19. ae 8. Suite of gold-bearing conglomerates from the so-called ‘¢banket” reefs, near Johannesburg, South African Republic. Collected by Mr. J. T. Curtis. c. Specimen illustrating the cross-section of a tin-bearing pegmatite vein, Saxony. d. Specimen illustrating the cross-section of the Half-moon vein, Pioche, Nevada, collected by Mr. George W. Maynard. e. Model illustrating the Black Rock silver vein, Butte, Mont., secured through the courtesy of Mr. W. D. Thornton. GEOLOGICAL MopEL oF NANTUCKET ISLAND. Exhibited by the designer and maker, George C. Curtis. Mope.t or New York Istanp. Colored as to Geology and exhibited by Dr. F. J. H. Merrill, of the New York State Museum. SERIES OF GEOLOGICAL MAps SHOWING RECENT PuB- LISHED RESULTS IN THE UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY, AND EXHIBITED BY THE SAME. . Pyramid Peak and Truckee, areal sheets. Franklin, Va., areal, economic and structure sheets. c. Wartburg and Briceville, Tenn., areal and economic. d. Peublo, Col., 8 sheets. e. Butte Special, Mont., topographic and economic. m8 SET OF SPECIMENS. Exhibited by Professor R. E. Dodge, of Teachers College. a. Fault breccia from the Quarry Bed, Meriden, Conn. 6. Cinders from the Ash Bed, Lamentation Mountain, Meriden, Conn. c. Strain slip cleavage from Wallingford, Vt. A SERIES OF ANDESITES, BASALTS, TUFFS, ETC., FROM THE AntTiI-Caucasus MounTAINS AND RussIAN ARMENIA, collected in September—October, 1897, by E. O. Hovey, and exhibited by the Geological Department, American Museum of Natural History. 20 I MINE RAROG TT. In CHARGE OF EpmuND O. Hovey. I. PETROGRAPHIC INSTRUMENTS. Exhibited by the inventor, Dr. T. A. Jaggar, Jr., Harvard University. . Microsclerometer, for determining exactly the hardness of minerals under the microscope. Instrument for inclining a preparation in the petro- graphic microscope. 2. MopELs AND APPARATUS recently acquired by the Mineral- a b C d. e up ogical Department, Columbia University, and exhibited by Prof. A. J. Moses. . Student Goniometer designed by Prof. P. Groth. Model of Spherical Projection, Isometric Crystal, Model of Spherical Projection, Triclinic Crystal. Model of Positive Uniaxial Ray Surface. Model of Negative Uniaxial Ray Surface. Model of Biaxial Ray Surface. 3. ExuisiT oF Pror. J. F. Kemp, Cotumsia UNIVERSITY. (Gfr b. Chalcanthite, Mt. Wilson, San Miguel County, Colo. Collected by M. B. Spaulding. Calaverite (?), inclosing Native Gold, Kalgoorlie, Wes- tralia. -Collected by G. J. Bancromt: 4. EXHIBIT OF THE DEPARTMENT OF MINERALOGY, AMERICAN ie Ses St8 Museum Natura. History, through L. P. Gratacap. Endlichite, Hillsboro, New Mexico. Pollucite, Paris, Maine. Hamlinite, Paris, Maine. Montmorillonite, Paris, Maine. Beryl, containing cesium, Haddam Neck, Conn. . Microcline, Haddam Neck, Conn. 21 . ExuisiT oF Pror. 8. L. PENFIELD, YALE UNIVERSITY. a. Wellsite, Buck Creek, Clay County, N. C. 6. Bixbyite, on Topaz, Near Simpson, Utah. c. Clinohedrite, Franklin, N. J. d. Illustrations of some methods for mounting crystals. al 6. Exurpit or Lazarp Caun, New York. a. Herderite, Auburn, Maine. 6. Hamlinite, Oxford County, Maine. c. Pollucite, Oxford County, Maine. d. Montmorillonite, Oxford County, Maine. 7. EXHIBIT OF ERNEST SCHERNIKOW, BROOKLYN. a. Tourmaline Crystals and cross sections, Haddam Neck, Conn. 6. Beryl, Haddam Neck, Conn. c. Microcline, with muscovite and _ lepidolite, Haddam Neck, Conn. 8. ExuisiTt oF Dr. A. E. FoorTeE, WarREN M. Foote, MAn- AGER, PHILADELPHIA. a. Crocoite, Western Tasmania. 5. Massicot, Western Tasmania. c. Cerussite, Western Tasmania. d. Gmelinite, Flinders, Victoria, N. S. W. e. Mesolite, Flinders, Victoria, N. S. W. f. Vivianite, Falls of Wannon River, Victoria. g. Ferrocalcite, Near Melbourne, Victoria. h. Phillipsite, Near Melbourne, Victoria. z. Phacolite, Near Melbourne, Victoria. j. Newberyite, Skipton Caves, near Ballarat, Victoria. &. Stephanite, Lake Chelan District, Montana. Z, Endlichite, Hillsboro, New Mexico. m. Marcasite, Near Sparta, Ill. z. Roeblingite, Franklin Furnace, N. J. o. Meteoric Iron (section), Sacramento Mountains, Eddy County, N. M. g. Exuipit oF GEorGE F. Kunz, NEw York. a. Celestite, Put-in-Bay, Ohio. 22 6. Meteoric Iron, York County, Nebraska. Sapphire Crystals, Yogo Gulch, Fergus County, Montana. d. Rutilated Quartz, sphere 5% inches in diameter, New Zealand. ‘The property of the Tiffany Co. e. Quartz (Rock Crystal), Mac Elumne Hill, Calaveras County, Calif. f. Tourmaline, Smoky Quartz and Graphic Granite, Mt. Mica, Paris, Me. 10. ExuiBit oF A. CHESTER BEATTY, NEw York. Calaverite, Cripple Creek, Colo. J PALAZONTOLEOGY. In CHARGE OF GILBERT VAN INGEN. i) 1. CAUDAL VERTEBRZ AND LimsB BONES OF THE GIGANTIC DinosAUR CAMARASAURUS, COPE, BRONTOSAURUS, MarsH. Exhibited by Professor Henry F. Osborn, Department of Vertebrate Paleontology, American Mu- seum of Natural History. 2. CAUDAL VERTEBRZ AND LimB BoNES oF DIPLODOCUS, MarsH. Exhibited by Prof. Henry F. Osborn, of the Department of Vertebrate Paleontology, American Museum of Natural History. 3. SERIES OF FEET AND SKULLS, ILLUSTRATING THE Evo- LUTION OF THE CAMELS AND LiaAmas IN NORTH AMERICA. Exhibited by Dr. J. L. Wortman, Depart- ment of Vertebrate Paleontology, American Museum of Natural History. | 4. SKELETONS OF THE EARLIEST AMERICAN UNGULATES— PANTOLAMBDA AND Euproroconia. Exhibited by Dr. W. D. Matthew, Department of Vertebrate Paleontology, American Museum of Natural History. 5. RESTORATIONS OF Extinct REPTILES AND MAMMALS. Seven large water colors exhibited by Chas. Knight, Department of Vertebrate Paleontology, American Museum of Natural History. 23 6. Mopers or Extinct VERTEBRATES by Chas. Knight, cast by Jacob Gommel. Exhibited by the Department of Vertebrate Paleontology, American Museum of Natu- ral History. 7. SERIES OF Exuisits by Dr. Chas. R. Eastman, of Harvard University. a. Fin of new species of Cladodont Shark, from the Hamil- ton group, near Buffalo, N. Y. 6. Photograph of Egg of Ostrich, Struthiolithus cherson- ensis, Brandt., from superficial (Pleistocene) deposits, northern China. c. Photograph showing variation in Dental Plates of the Chimeroid, Ptyctodes calcolus N. & W., from the Devonian of Iowa. d. Photograph of the remarkable Psammodont-Cochlio- dont-Lung-fish, Syzthetodus. From the Upper De- vonian (State Quarry) Fish-bed, Johnson Co., Iowa. S. Exnipir in Patzosotany by Mr. Arthur Hollick, of De- partment of Geology, of Columbia University. a. Fossil Plants from the Middle Cretaceous clays of Block Island, R. I. 6. Samples of the Plant Bearing Basal clays, Middle Cre- taceous, and the Superficial Bowlder-clays, Glacial, of Block Island, R. I. c. A new fossil Palm from the Yellow Gravel (Miocene ?) of Bridgeton, N. J. g. New Fossit FuncGi, PRESERVED IN SILICIFIED WooD AND EXHIBITED UNDER THE MicroscopE, by Dr. A. A. Ju- lien, Department of Geology, Columbia University. a. In wood of the Petrified Forest, at Chalcedony Park, Arizona. 1. Silicified fungus-spore, in act of sprouting. 2. Silicified bacteria. A chain of bacilli crossing lim- pid quartz. 3. Silicified mycelium, branching along the walls of the wood-cells, and secreting iron-oxide. 24 & In wood of the Petrified Forest, near Cairo, Egypt. 1. Young sporanges on walls of the wood-cells. 2. Mature sporanges, enclosing spores. 3. Chain of sporanges. ES PEHILOLOGY: In CHARGE OF LAWRENCE A. McLoutH Aanp A. V. WILLIAMS JACKSON. The exhibits in each language will represent all or part of the following heads: MANUSCRIPTS. 2. FACSIMILES OF MANUSCRIPTS. 3. Epirions—OLp, Rare, or NEw. 4. LEXICAL AND GRAMMATICAL WORKS. 5. ILLusTRATIVE MATERIAL: PHOTOGRAPHS, ENGRAV- INGS, AUTCGRAPH LETTERS, ARCHZOLOGICAL RE- MAINS. e ° 6. JOURNALS AND PERIODICALS. A. PHILOLOGY IN GENERAL. I. SOME OF THE MorE RECENT WORKS ON THE SUBJECT. 2. CERTAIN RESULTS IN THE PIELD OF DIALHET “STUDY IN AMERICA. Exhibited by Mr. E. H. Babbitt, Colum- bia University (Secretary of American Dialect Society). B. SpPEcIAL LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES. 1. INDO-GERMANIC. a. Indo-Iranian. With the codperation of Prof. A. V. Williams Jackson and Mr. A. Yohannan, Columbia University. 6. Armenian. With the codperation of Mr. A. Yohan- nan, Columbia University. 25 c. Greek. With the codperation of Professors E. D. Perry and J. R. Wheeler, Columbia University, and Prof. H. M. Baird, New York University. d. Latin. With the codperation of Professors E. G. Sih- ler, New York University, and E. C. Egbert, Columbia University. e. Romance. With the codperation of Professors H. A. Todd and A. Cohn, Columbia University, and Prof. W. K. Gillett, New York University. f. Germanic. With the codperation of Professors W. H. Carpenter and Calvin Thomas, Columbia University, Prof. L. A. McLouth, New York University, Prof. T. R. Price, Columbia University. 2. SEMITIC. a. Hebrew. With the codperation of Prof. J. D. Prince 6. Aramaic. and Mr. Geo. Osborne, New York Univer- e Atabic. sity, and Prof. R. J. H. Gottheil, Columbia University. 3. OTHER LANGUAGES. a. American Indian. Dr. F. Boas, Columbia University. 1. An Indian Newspaper. Printed in Shorthand. Edited by Rev. J. M. Le Jeune, ‘ Kamloops, British Columbia. Exhibited by Dr. Franz Boas. 2. Indian Manuscript. Written by a half-blood In- dian of Fort Rupert, B. C. 6. Chinese. With the cooperation of Prof. J. D. Prince, New York University. L PRoLOGRAPHY. In CHARGE OF CORNELIUS VAN BRUNT. 1. ExuHIBIT BY Mr. G. GENNERT. a. New developer, ‘‘ Ortol.” d. 26 . Zeiss telephoto lense, capable of doing instantaneous work. New Cycle and Hand Camera. New Platini paper—producing Platinotype effects. Series of framed prints, showing the work of Platini- paper. 2. Exuteirs or :.E. & Hef ANTHONY 2: Co. a. b. Ge d. Farrand Vignetter. New Dalmeyer Stigmatic lense, F. 6th Series, No. II. Frame of Photographs, illustrating New Dalmeyer Stig- matic lense combinations. Frame of Photographs, illustrating American Aristo- type paper—with new toner. 2. EXHIBIT oF BAuscH & LomMB OPTICAL Co. . Iconoscopes—Three sizes. . Ray Filters—Styles A and B. Zeiss convertable, Series VII. A, No. 8.—Lense with diaphragm shutter and telephoto attachment. . Zeiss convertable, lense C, set with diaphragm shutter. All manufactured by the above company. Photographs, showing effects with and without ‘‘ Ray tutes 4. THE JOLY-SamBra Co., Montclair, New Jersey. a. b. Demonstration of new color process by electric light. Lantern slides and screens. M PHYSICS: In CHARGE OF Won. HALLOCK. 1. SET OF PHOTOGRAPHS SHOWING WIDENING OF SPECTRUM LINES WITH INCREASE OF PRESSURE. Exhibited by Prof. J. S. Ames, Johns Hopkins University. 2. PHOTOGRAPHS OF PROJECTION LANTERN. Exhibited by Prof. Le Conte Stevens, Trov, N. Y. 27 3. BrEAK-ciRCcUIT ATTACHMENT FOR PENDULUM. Exhibited by Prof. W. Hallock, Columbia University. 4. PENDULUM, ADJUSTABLE PERIOD. Exhibited by Prof. W. Hallock, Columbia University. 5. Torsion PENDULUM oF ADJUSTABLE PERIOD. Exhibited by Prof. W. Hallock, Columbia University. 6. IMPROVED APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING BATTERY RE- SISTANCE; Mance’s method. Exhibited by W. 8. Day, Columbia University. 7. PHOTOGRAPHED MICROMETER OcuLar. Exhibited by Wal- lace Goold Levison. S. APPARATUS FOR SHOWING PHOSPHORESCENCE. Exhibited by Wallace Goold Levison. 9. STREMMATOGRAPH AND ReEcorps. Exhibited by oP. EG Dudley. 10. SIMPLE PHOTOSPECTROGRAPH WITH NEGATIVES. Ex- hibited by F. L. Tufts, Columbia University. 11. BauscH & Loms MicrRoscoPE STAND WITH SPECIAL ARM FOR MICROMETRIC MEASUREMENTS. Exhibited by 2. H. Dudley. 12. NEw Form or THERMOMETER FOR SUBTERRANEAN TEM- PERATURE Work. Exhibited by Prof. W. Hallock, Columbia University. 13. SERIES OF LANTERN SLIDES ILLUSTRATING A NEw METHOD oF CoLoRING BY WHICH UNIFORMITY OF TINT AND DEFINITION OF OUTLINE IS OBTAINED. Exhibited by C. C. Trowbridge, Columbia University. 14. SET OF SCALES PROVIDED WITH DIFFERENT TYPES OF VERNIER, used in the Physical Laboratory, Columbia University. Exhibited by C. C. Trowbridge and H. S. Curtis, Columbia University. 15. SCHONE’Ss APPARATUS FOR MECHANICAL ANALYSIS, AND SPECIMENS TESTED By IT. Exhibited by Dr. H. Ries, Columbia University. 16. a8. TQ. 20. 21. 28 PORCELAIN MILL FoR GRINDING CLAY AND OTHER SOFT- MinerALs. Exhibited by Dr. H. Ries. . SUITE OF SPECIMENS SHOWING SHRINKAGE OF CLAY AT DIFFERENT TEMPERATURES. Exhibited by Dr. H. Ries. AUDIMETER FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF THE SENSITIVE- NESS OF THE Ear. Exhibited by Prof. Alfred G. Comp- ton, Department Applied Mathematics, College of the City of New York. CALORIMETER FOR Liquips. Exhibited by R. L. Litch, Princeton University. WATERMAN CALORIMETER. Exhibited by Prof. F. A. Waterman, Smith College. SpPEcIAL ELecTrIcAL APPARATUS. Exhibited by J. E. Moore, Princeton University. . PHOTOGRAPHS SHOWING THE PENETRABILITY, THE PATH AND THE REFRACTION OF ROENTGEN’S Rays, by A. Bourgougnon. N PHYSIOGRAPHY. In CHARGE OF ROBERT H. CORNISH. . A SERIES OF THREE MODELs oF TyPicAL LAND Forms, de signed and modeled by Prof. W. M. Davis and G. C. Curtis, and exhibited by the Harvard Geographical Laboratory. . A Mopert SHOWING SEA Coast CHARACTERISTICS. Exhib- ited by the designer, G. C. Curtis. MODEL OF THE STATE OF NEw York. Executed under the direction of the New York State Museum, and exhibited by thesame, through Dr. F. J. Et.’ Merall, Director. MoDEL OF THE CATSKILL MountTAIns. Executed under the direction of the New York State Museum, and exhibited by the'same, through Dr. F. J. 1. Merrill, Director, . MopEt oF New York ISLAND, SHOWING TOPOGRAPHY IN 1776. Exhibited by the New York State Museum, through Dri Pa .t. Merrill, Directar 2o 6. ExuiBir oF RECENT TopoGrRAPpHic MAps, made and loaned by the United States Geological Survey, Washington, Dec. Vicinity ot Lake George. Mohawk Valley. Platte Valley, Nebraska. Drumlin Area of Wisconsin. e. Progress Map, New York and New England, oli eo 7. NUMBERS 36 AND 37 OF H6LZEL’s GEOGRAPHISCHE CHAR ' AKTERBILDER. Loaned by the Teachers College. 8. Two ‘TRANSPARENCIES FOR TEACHING ASTRONOMICAL GroGRAPHY. Published by the Century School Supply Co., and loaned by the Teachers College. 9g. PANORAMA OF CRATER LAKE, OREGON. Photographed and exhibited by Prof. F. E. Lloyd, of Teachers College. NotTe.—The more recent books in Physiography and the topographic maps of New York State thus far published are exhibited on a table. O ZOOLOGY: In CuHarcGe or E. B. WItson. 1. ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE FAUNA OF BERMUDA. From col- lection made in June, 1897, by the New York Univer- sity’ Alumni Expedition. Exhibited by Prof. C. L. Bristol. 2. ILLUSTRATIONS OF NEMERTEAN AND ENTEROPNEUSTAN FAUNA OF PUGET SounpD. Exhibited by B. B. Griffin.* a. Carinella sexlineata n. sp. (fragments). 6. Carinoma mutabils n. sp. type and var. argzl/ina with piece of clay in which latter lives. c. Emplectonema virtde Stimpson (a few individuals from San Francisco, showing lighter hue of written speci- mens). * Owing to Mr. Griffin’s death this exhibit could not be prepared. 3. 4. Cn “I 30 ad. Cerebratulus marginatus Renier and C. sp. e. Amphiporus, several species. Jf. Ptychodera sp. PREPARATIONS ILLUSTRATING DEVELOPMENTAL STAGES OF THE CRANIUM AND CLASPING ORGANS IN THE CHIM- £ROID, Hydrolagus colliec. Material from the Puget Sound expedition of 1896 of the Zodlogical Department of Columbia University. Exhibited by R. W. Shearman. a. DEVELOPMENTAL STAGES OF THE AUSTRALIAN LUNG- FISH, Ceratodus forstert, collected near Gayndah, Queensland. 6. Larva or EEts—Conger, Congermurena, Angu- zlla—from Strait of Messina. Received through Pro- fessor Lankester from Professor Grassi. Exhibited by Dr. Bashford Dean. . Errects or Licut or DirrerREnt Corors Uron Pro- TOPLASM. Exhibited by N. K.. Harrington ands 2 Leaming. . EXHIBITION OF TEACHING PREPARATIONS by B. B. Griffin. Development stages of: a. Petromyzon; @.° Shark; c. Skate; d. luepidosteuscac: Accipenser; f. Amia; 2. Amiurus; 7%. Necturusie Progsy7. luizard: . GRAFTING EXPERIMENTS UPON Motus. Compound pupeze and compound adult moths, illustrated by photographs and specimens. Exhibited by H. E. Crampton, Jr. . SLIDES ILLUSTRATING THE ORIGIN oF NUcLET IN. PROTO- zoA. Exhibited by G. N. Calkins. a. Monad ( Zetramztus) with distributed nucleus. 6. Monad ( Chzlomonas) with intermediate type of nucleus. c. Luglena viridis, with complete nucleus in early stage of division. d. Euglena viridis, with nucleus in anaphase of division. 31 9g. PREPARATIONS ILLUSTRATING THE DEVELOPMENT OF SPER- MATOZOA IN THE HEMIPTERA. Exhibited by F. C. Paulmier. 10. PREPARATIONS ILLUSTRATING THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE SPERMATOZOA IN AMPHIBIA. Exhibited by J. H. McGregor. I1. PREPARATION SHOWING ALVEOLAR STRUCTURE OF PRo- TOPLASM IN THE Ecc. Exhibited by Prof. E. B. Wilson. 12. SERIAL SECTIONS OF THE HEAD oF youNG Doc-FISH | (Squalus acanthias). Prepared for the study of the Cranial Nerves. Exhibited by Dr. O. S. Strong. 13. SECTIONS OF GrowiNnc Eccs or an AscipiAn, JZoleula manhattensts, Illustrating the Formation of the Albu- minous Food-material or Yolk. Exhibited by H. E. Crampton, Jr. 14. PECULIAR STAGES IN THE MATURATION AND FERTILIZA- TION OF THE Ecco or an Ascipian, MWoleula manhat- tensts. Exhibited by H. E. Crampton, Jr. 15. Exurpir of CyToLocicaL PREPARATIONS, by Francis B. Sumner. a. Fertilization stage of Fundulus heteroclitus. Entrance of spermatozo6én. 6. Abnormal amphiaster in periblast of Amdurus. A nu- clear division with no nucleus present. c. Degenerate mitoses. Transition to amitosis. 16. Maps anp DesicNs oF BuiLpIncs oF NEW York Zo- OLOGICAL Society. Exhibited by Prof. H. F. Osborn and W. T. Hornaday. VoL. XI. April 30, 1898. Part I. ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. Bs) .; The New Era Printing Company, Lancaster, Pa. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. OFFICERS FOR 1898-9. President, Henry F. Osporn. - Vice- Presidents, N. L. Brirron, J. F. Kemp. Recording Secretary, Corresponding Secretary, RicHarD E. DopcE, Wm. STRATFORD, TEACHERS COLLEGE: COLLEGE OF THE CITY OF NEW YORK. Treasury, | Librarian, Cer COX, ARTHUR HOLLIck, - GRAND CENTRAL DEPOT. ’ ‘ COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY. - Councillors, CHARLES L. BrIsTOL, Witiiam Hattrock, CHARLES A Doremus, _ HAROLD JAcosy, — BASHFORD DEan, LAawreNcE A. McLoutn. Members of the Council, ex-officio, | Lx Presidents : QO. P. Hupparp, J. K. Rees, J. J. Stevenson. Curators, Harrison G. Dyar, GeEoRGE F, Kunz, ALExIs A. JULIEN, Louis H. Laupy, Witiram D. SCHOONMAKER. Finance Committee, | Henry Dupiey, Joun H. Hinron, CORNELIUS Vis Brunt. OFFICERS OF THE SECTIONS. Section of Astronomy and Physics, | P. H. DupLey, Chairman, R. Gornon, Seeetary Section of Biolog E. B. Witson, Chazrman, G. N. CALkins, DED. watt Section of Geology and Mineralogy, | , J. F. Kemp, Chatman, H. Rigs, Secretary, — Section of Anthropology, Psychology and Philology, bt : L. A. McLouru, Chawyman, A. V, W. Jackson, : Secretary for Philolog CHAS. tr Buss, Secretary ‘fir Anthropology and Psychology. VOL. XI. August 31, 1898. PART II. ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. Editor: GILBERT VAN INGEN. The New Era Printing Company, Lancaster, Pa. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. OFFICERS, 1898-0. . President—HeEnry F. Ossporn, American Museum of Natural History. Vice-Presidents—N. L. Britton, J. F. Kemp. Secretary—RicHarp E. Dopcg, Teachers College, W. 120th St. Corresponding Secretary—-WM. STRATFORD, College of the City of New York. | LTreasurey——_CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Depot. Libvarian—ARTHUR HOLiick, Columbia University. L:ditor—-GILBERT VAN INGEN, Columbia University. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS. Chairman—P. H. Duptey, 80 Pine St. Secretary—_REGINALD GorpDoNn, Columbia University. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. Chaiyman—Epmunp B. Witson, Columbia University. Secretary—Gary N. CaLkins, Columbia University. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. Chatrman—JAMES F. Kemp, Columbia University. Secretary—Gr0. F. Kunz, 15 Union Square. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY, PHILOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. Chairman—\LAWRENCE A. McLoutu, New York University. Secretary for Philology—A. V.W. Jackson, Columbia University. Secretary for Anthropology and Psychology—Cuas. B. Buss, New York University. SESSION, 1898-1899. The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8 o'clock, from October 3d to June 5th, in the rooms of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, at 12 West 31st Street. IMPORTANT. All matter for the New York Academy of Sciences should be addressed— NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY, (SUB-STATION 84), WEST IIGTH STREET, NEw YORK CITY, UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. It is requested that all correspondents of the Academy will have the above address correctly recorded on their mailing , lists, and that exchanges be addressed accordingly. iy 7 VOL. XI. December 31, 1898. PART III. ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. Editor: GILBERT VAN INGEN. The New Era Printing Company, { Lancaster, Pa. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. OFFICERS, 1898-9. President—HEnNry F. OSBORN, American Museum of Natural History. | Vice-Presidents—N. L. Britton, J. F. Kemp. secretary—RicHAarD E. Doncg, Teachers College, W. 120th St. Corresponding Secretary—\WM. STRATFORD, College of the City of New York. Treasurey—CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Depot. Librarian—ARTHUR Ho tick, Columbia University. Editor—GILBERT VAN INGEN, Columbia University. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS. Chairman—P. H. Duptey, 80 Pine St. Secretary—REGINALD GorDON, Columbia University. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. Chairman—F rED. S. Lee, Columbia University. Secretary—Gary N. Caxins, Columbia University. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. Chairman—J AMES F. Kemp, Columbia University. Secretary —GEo. F. Kunz, 15 Union Square. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY, PHILOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. Chairman—LAWRENCE A. McLoutu, New York University. Secretary for Philology—A. V.W. Jackson, Columbia University. Secretary for Anthropology and Psychology—Cuas. B. Buiss, New York University. SESSION, 1898-1899. The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8 o'clock, from October 3d to May 22d, in the rooms of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, at 12 West 31st Street. er. a o ” . ier sigh CONTENTS OF VOL. XI. PART I. PAGE 1.—Wilson, E.B. Considerations on Cell-Lineage and An- cestral Reminiscence, based on a Re-examination of Some Points in the Early Development of Annelids and Polyclades. (Figs. 1-7),. .. 2.—Trowbridge, ©. C. An “X-Ray Detector” for Re- search Purposes). (Hips: 0-19) 8t6.. oo Se s+ 29 3.—Trowbridge, ©.G. The Use of the Fluoroscopic Screen | in Connection with Rontgen Rays. (Figs. 12-14), 4.—Lloyd, Francis E. On Hypertrophied Scale-Leaves in Pinus ponderosa... (PlateDy,. 54 eee: 5.—Hollick, Arthur. Notes on Block Island. (Plates IT.-IX.), 6.—Dudley, P. H. The Use of the Dudley “Stremmato- | graph” in Determining Stresses in Rails under Mov- — ing Trains, (Plates X.-XIII.),..~. APPENDIX. 30 ea: ae 89 | Catalogue of the Fifth Ann ual Reception and Exhibit, 5 April 13, 14, 1898. CONTENTS OF VOL, XI. PART IL. 7.—Weller, Stuart. Descriptions of Devonian Crinoids and Blastoids from Milwaukee, Wisconsin. (Plate EMME R Ga Se ck soe Ne! 6 a ahs oh ER ie ea Va 8.—Huntington, Geo. S. The Eparterial Bronchial Sys- tem of the Mammalia. (Plates XV-XXVIII.), . 9.—Stevenson, J. J. The Debt of the World to Pure Science. Annual Address of the Retiring President, 10.—Griffin, B. B. Description of Some Marine Nemer- teans of Puget Sound and Alaska. (Figs. 15—24.), 11.—Crampton, H. E., Jr. An Important Instance of In- ee eee a YS AIDE ee ee ae 12.—Rankin, W. M. The Northrop Collection of Crus- tacea from the Bahamas. (Plates XXIX, XXX.), 13.—Calman, W. T. On a Collection of Crustacea from Puget Sound. (Plates XXXI-XXXIV.),.... Pace 117 127 177 193 219 225 259 IMPORTANT. All matter for the New York Academy of: Sciences should be addressed— New YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY, (SUB-STATION 84), WEST IIGTH STREET, New YORK CITY, - UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. It is requested that all correspondents of the Academy will have the above address correctly recorded on their mailing lists, and that exchanges be addressed accordingly. CONTENTS OF VOL, XI. PART IIL Title Page, Contents, etc. to Volume XI. 14.—Mathews, Albert. The Physiology of Secretion, . 293 15.—Prince, J. -) a ‘a Z : = i a . — 3 9088 01302 1050 —s-« fim